l^ibraxD of iht lltuseunt OP COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY, AT HARVARD COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, MASS. I Journal OF THE Royal Microscopical Society; CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZOOILOG-^ AND BOTANTY (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY, & sc. » Edited by F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A., One of the Secretaries of the Society and Professor of Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in King's College ; WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc., F.L.S., I.ecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital , R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Cantab.), and J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A., Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, Edinburgh , FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY. FOR THE YEAR 1893. LONDON : TO BE OBTAINED AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS, 20 HANOVER SQUARE, W. ; of Messrs. WILLIAMS & NORGATE ; and of Messrs. DULAU & CO. tiie (Established in 1839. Incorporated by Eoyal Charter in 1866.) The Society was established for the promotion of Microscopical and Biological Science by the communication, discussion and publication of observa- tions and discoveries relating to (1) improvements in the construction and mode of application of the Microscope, or (2) Biological or other subjects of Microscopical Research. It consists of Ordinary, Honorary, and Ex-officio Fellows, without distinction of sex. Ordinary Fellows are elected on a Certificate of Recommendation, signed by three Ordinary Fellows, setting forth the names, residence, and description of the Candidate, of whom the first proposer must have personal knowledge. The Certificate is read at two General Meetings, and the Candidate balloted for at the second Meeting. The Admission Fee is 2 1. 2.s., and the Annual Subscription 2 1. 2s., payable on election, and subsequently in advance on 1st January annually, but future payments may be compounded for at any time for 31A 10s. FeRows elected at a meeting subsequent to that in February are only called upon for a proportionate part of the first year’s subscription. The annual Subscription of Fellows permanentlyresiding abroad is 11. 11s. 6d., or a reduction of one-fourth. Honorary Fellows (limited to 50), consisting of persons eminent in Microscopical or Biological Science, are elected on the recommendation of five Ordinary Fellows and the approval of the Council. Ex-officio Fellows (limited to 100), consisting of the Presidents for the time being of any Societies having objects in whole or in part similar to those of the Society, are elected on the recommendation of ten Ordinary Fellows, and the approval of the Council. The Council, in whom the management of the property and affairs of the Society is vested, is elected annually, and is composed of the President, four Vice-Presidents, Treasurer, two Secretaries, and twelve other Ordinary Fellows. The Meetings are held on the third Wednesday in each month, from October to June, at 20 Hanover Square, W. (commencing at 8 p.m.). Visitors are admitted by the introduction of Fellows. In each Session there is a Conversazione devoted to the exhibition of Instruments, Apparatus, and Objects of novelty or interest relating to the Microscope or the subjects of Microscopical Research. The Journal, containing the Transactions and Proceedings of the Society, and a Summary of Current Researches relating to Zoology and Botany (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), Microscopy, dfec., is published bi-monthly, and is forwarded post-free to all Ordinary and Ex-officio Fellows residing in countries within the Postal Union. The Library, with the Instruments, Apparatus, and Cabinet of Objects, is open for the use of Fellows daily (except Saturdays), from 10 a.m. to 5 p.m., and, from November 1st to J une 30th, on every Wednesday evening from 6 p.m. i , Lp,m' Cexcept Meeting nights). It is closed for four weeks during August and September. Forms of proposal for Fellowship, and any further information , may he obtained by application to the Secretaries , or Assistant-Secretary, at the Library of the Society , 20 Hanover Square, W. 1893. a patron: HIS ROYAL HIGHNESS ALBERT EDWARD, PRINCE OF WALES, K.G., G.C.B., F.R.S., &c. Past-prmfrmts, Elected ♦Sir Richard Owen, K.C.B., D.C.L., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 1840-1 ♦John Bindley, Ph.D., F.R.S 1842-3 *Thomas Bell, F.R.S 1844-5 *James Scott Bowerbank, LL.D., F.R.S 1846-7 ♦George Busk, F.R.S 1848-9 * Arthur Farre, M.D., F.R.S 1850-1 *George Jackson, M.R.C.S 1852-3 *William Benjamin Carpenter, C.B., M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. . 1854-5 George Shadbolt 1856-7 ♦Edwin Lankester, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S 1858-9 ♦John Thomas Quekett, F.R.S 1860 ♦Robert James Farrants, F.R.C.S. 1861-2 ♦Charles Brooke, M.A., F.R.S 1863-4 James Glaisher, F.K.S 1865-6-7-8 ♦Rev. Joseph Bancroft Reade, M.A., F.R.S 1869-70 ♦William Kitchen Parker, F.R.S , 1871-2 ♦Charles Brooke, M.A., F.R.S 1873-4 Henry Clifton Sorby, LL.D., F.R.S 1875-6-7 Henry James Slack, F.G.S 1878 Lionel S. Beale, M.B., F.R.C.P., F.R.S 1879-80 ♦P. Martin Duncan, M.B., F.R.S 1881-2-3 Rev. W. H. Dallinger, LL.D., F.R.S 1884-5-6-7 Charles T. Hudson, M.A., LL.D. (Cantab.) 1888-9-90 Robert Braithwaite, M.D., M.R.C.S., F.L.S 1891-2 * Deceased. COUNCIL. Elected 18tii January, 1893. I^resiijcnt. Albert Michael, Esq., F.L*S. Ura-ltasiirmts. ^Robert Braithwaite, Esq., M.D., M.R.C.S., V.P.L.S. *Frank Crisp, Esq., LL.B., B.A., Y.P. & Treas. L«S. James Glaisher, Esq., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. *Prof. Charles Stewart, Pres. L.S. Cmsum. William Thomas Suffolk, Esq, Smxtaries* Prof. F. Jeffrey Bell, M.A. Rev. Wo H. Ballinger, LL.D., F.R.S* #rbhtarjr JiUmhers of <&mntxl. Lionel S. Beale, Esq., M.B., F.R.C.P., F.R.S* Alfred W. Bennett, Esq., M.A., B.Sc., Y.P.L*S* Rev. Edmund Carr, M.A., F.R.Met.S. Edward Dadswell, Esq. Charles Haughton Gill, Esq., F.C.S. Richard G. Hebb, Esq., M.A., M.D., F.R.C.P* ^George C. Karop, Esq., M.R.C.S. Edward Milles Nelson, Esq. Thomas H. Powell, Esq. Prof. Urban Pritchard, M.D. Frederic H. Ward, Esq., M.R.C.S. Thos. Charters White, Esq., M.R.C.S* * Members of the Publication Committee. librarian anfr Assistant Sccwtani. Mr. W. H. Brown. C 0 N T E N T S. Transactions of the Society — page I. On an Endophytic Parasite of Diatoms. By Charles Haughton Gill, F.R.M.S., F.C.S. (Plate I.) Parti 1 II. The Chromatic Curves of Microscope Objectives. By E. M. Nelson, F.R.M.S. (Fig. 1) „ 5 III. The President’s Address: On the Anatomy of Mosses. By Robert Braithwaite, M.D., &c Part 2 137 IV. The Rotifera of China. By Surgeon V. Gunson Thorpe, R.N., F.R.M.S. (Plates II. and III.) „ 145 V. On Certain Cystic Worms found in Butcher’s Meat, and in Equine Animals, which simulate the Appearance of Tuber- culosis. By G. M. Giles, M.B., F.R.C.S., F.R.M.S., Surg.- Major I.M.S. (Plate IV.) Part 3^ 289 VI. Note on a Tapeworm from Echidna (Tsenia Echidnse sp. n.). By D’Arcy W. Thompson. (Plate V.) „ 297 VII. Notices of some undescribed Infusoria from the Brackish Waters of the Eastern United States. By Alfred C. Stokes, M.D. (Plate V.) „ 298 VIII. Notes on some of the Digestive Processes in Arachnids. By Henry M. Bernard, M.A. Cantab., &c. (Plate VI.) Part 4 427 IX. On Floscularia pelagica sp. n., and Notes on several other Rotifers. By Charles F. Rousselet, F.R.M.S. (Plate VII.) .. „ 444 X. List of New Rotifers since 1889. By Charles F. Rousselet, F.R.M.S „ 450 XI. The Foraminifera of the Gault of Folkestone. — IV. By Fred- erick Chapman, F.R.M.S (Plates VIII. and IX.) Part 5 579 XII. On the Development of the Continental Form of Microscope Stand. By J. B. Nias, M.D. (Figs. 89-94) „ 596 XIII. Remarks on some Progressive Phases of Spirillum volutans. By R. L. Maddox, M.D., Hon. F.R.M.S., &c. (Plate X.) .. Part 6 715 Summary of Current Researches relating to Zoology and Botany (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), Microscopy, &c., including Original Com- munications from Fellows and Others.* 18, 153. 303, 459, 603, 720. ZOOLOGY. A. — Vertebrata : — Embryology, Histology, and General. a. Embryology. Kolliker, A. — Development of Elements of Nervous System Assheton, R. — Development of Optic Nerves of Vertebrates .. .. Parti 18 . .. „ 19 Vialleton, L. — Origin of Vascular Germs in the Chick * In order to make the Contents complete, (1) the papers printed in the ‘ Trans- actions,’ (2) the abstracts of the ‘Bibliography,’ and (3) the notes printed in the ‘ Proceedings ’ are included here. Vlll CONTENTS. Goronowitsch, N. — Axial and Lateral Metamerism of the Head in Embryos of Birds Born, G. — Maturation of Amphibian Ova and Fertilization of Immature Ova of Triton Fick, R. — Fertilization of Axolotl Ovum Roudnev, Y. — Development of Endothelium of Heart of Amphibia .. W ilson, E. B. — Multiple and Partial Development in Amphioxus Rose, C. — Phytogeny of Mammalian Teeth Osborn, H. F. — History and Homologies of Human Molar Cusps Rose, C. — Rudiments of Teeth in Manis „ „ Dentition of Marsupials „ „ Dental Ridge and “ Egg -teeth ” in Sauropsida McIntosh, W. C. — Life-history and Development of Food and other Fishes Calderwood, W. L. — Ovary and Intra-Ovarian Egg of Teleosteans . . Holt, E. W. L. — Eggs and Early Stages of Rhombus maximus Roux, W., & 0. Herbst — Experimental Embryology Virchow, Hs. — Yolk-oells and Yolk Segmentation Baumgarten — Development of Auditory Ossicles Strahl — Degeneration of Ovarian Ova in Lizards Benda, C. — Spermatogenesis in Sauropsida Hasse, C. — Development of Vertebral Column of Anura Ruckert, J. — Doubling of Chromosomata in Nucleus of Selachian Ova . . Beard, J. — Hermaphroditism of Lampreys Cholodkowsky, N. — Theory of Mesoderm and Metamerism Hatschek, B. — Metamerism of Vertebrates Buckman, S. S., & F. A. Bather — Terms of Auxology Emery, C. — Cydopian Monsters Lwoff, B. — Germinal Layers in Vertebrates Schulze, O. — Development of Mammary Glands Nathusius, W. v. — The Shell of a Hen's Egg Stricht, O. van der — Cellular Islets at the Margin of the Blastoderm of the Chick Hasse, C. — Development of the Vertebral Column Stohr, Ph. — Development of Liver and Pancreas in Trout Piersoll, G. A. — Duration of Motion of Human Spermatozoa Lwoff, B. — Development of Amphioxus Ryder, J. A. — Inheritance of Modifications Rath, O. vom — Inheritance of Mutilations Wiesmann, A. — The Germ-Plasm Nussbaum, M. — Reproduction and Heredity Henneguy, L. F. — Parthenogenetic Segmentation of Ova of Mammals Perenyi, J. — Origin of Mesoderm Schottlaender, J. — Origin and History of the Graafian Follicle Fleischmann, A. — Placenta of Rodents Willey, A. — A Duck with Drake's Plumage Scheel, C. — Development of the Teleostean Vertebral Column Goeppert, E. — Development of the Pancreas Henneguy, L. F. — Vitelline Body of Balbiani in Egg of Vertebrates Balbiani, E. G. — Centrosome and Yolk-nucleus Felix, W. — Development of Liver and Pancreas Robinson, A. — Development of Mustela ferox Leche, W. — Development of Mammalian Dentition PAGB Part 1 20 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 Part 2 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 Part 3 99 99 21 21 21 21 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 153 154 154 155 155 155 156 156 156 157 157 157 303 303 304 „ 304 „ 304 „ 304 „ 304 „ 305 „ 305 „ 306 „ 306 „ 307 Part 4 459 „ 459 „ 460 „ 460 „ 461 „ 461 „ 461 Part 5 603 „ 603 „ 604 „ 605 „ 605 CONTENTS. IX Hoffmann, C. K. — Development of Urino-genital System in Birds . . Mitsukuri, K. — Gastrulation in Chelonia Olt, Ad. — Life-history of Rhodeus amarus Beneden, Ch. Van — Elimination of Nuclear Elements in Ovarian Ova of Scorpsena scrofa Hertwig, O., & others — Experimental Embryology Emery, C. — Heredity and the Theory of Descent Knauthe, K. — Transmission of Acquired Characters Wilckens, M. — Inheritance of Acquired Characters Wagner, F. yon — Ontogeny and Regeneration Lavocat — The Origin of Species Waldeyer — Theories of Heredity Ryder, J. A. — Energy as a Factor in Organic Evolution „ „ Mechanical Genesis of Form of Fowl’s Egg Seitz — Value of Mimetic Covering in the Struggle for Existence Davidoff, M. von — “ Urmund and Spina bifida ” Platt, J. B. — Ectodermic Origin of the Cartilages of the Head Keibel, F. — Development of Nose and Upper Lip Moore, J. E. S. — Mammalian Spermatogenesis Pjatnizky, J. J. — Human Tails Duval, M. — Placenta of Carnivora Keibel, F. — Development of Bladder and Allantois in Guinea-pig .. Rose, C. — Development of Teeth in Chamaeleon Saint-Remy. G. — Development of Pancreas in Ophidians Bambeke, C. Van — Gastrular Raphe of Triton alpestris Barfurth — Regeneration of Germinal Layers in Amphibia Nusbaum, J. — Development of Hepatic Vessels and Blood-corpuscles in Anura Nickerson, W. S. — Development of Scales of Lepidosteus McClure, C. F. W. — Segmentation in Petromyzon marinus Valenti, G. — Development of Nervous Tissue Part 5 11 11 11 19 91 11 91 Part 6 » 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 B. Histolog-y. Flemming, W. — Invisibility of Living Nuclear Structures Part 1 Vas, F. — Chromatin of Sympathetic Ganglia „ Dekhuysen, M. C. — Blood of Amphibia ,, Gehuchten, A. Van — Cerebro-Spinal Ganglia „ Notthafft, A. — Degeneration and Regeneration of Injured Peripheral Nerves „ Gehuchten, A. Van — Free Intra-epidermic Nerve-endings „ Golgi’s Method and the Distribution of Nerve-fibres „ Moore, J. E. S. — Relationships and Role of Archoplasm during Mitosis in the Larval Salamander Part 2 Kanthack, A. A., & W. B. Hardy — Wandering ( Migrating ) Cells of the Frog „ Spuler, A. — Alleged Intracellular Origin of Red Blood-corpuscles .. .. „ Hansemann, D. — Centrosomata and Attraction Spheres in Resting Cells .. „ Altmann — Granula-Theory „ Dallinger, W. H. — Biitschli’s Experiments on Artificial Protoplasm .. „ Strasburger, Ft.— Cell-division Part 3 Butschli, O. — Imitation of Karyohinetic Figures „ Dogiel, A. S. — Structure of Nerve-Cells and their Processes „ PAGE 607 607 608 609 609 610 612 612 612 613 720 720 720 721 721 722 722 x 722 722 723 723 723 724 724 724 725 725 725 725 24 25 25 25 26 26 27 157 158 159 159 159 284 307 307 308 X CONTENTS. Heidenhain, M. — Giant-Cells of the Medulla and their Central Corpuscles Part 3 Rose, C. — Weil's Basal Layer of Odontoblasts „ Apathy, St. — Contractile and Conducting Primitive Fibrils „ Butschli, O. — Structural Resemblance between Emulsions arid Protoplasm „ Van der Stricht, O. — Attractive Sphere Part 4 Bizzozero, G. — Nuclear Division in Cut Nerve-fibres „ Kallius, E. — Neuroglia-cells in Peripheral Nerves „ Frenzel, J. — Cell-multiplication and Replacement ,, Haswell, W. A. — Recent Views on Protoplasm Part 5 Hertwtg, O. — The Cell „ Brauer, A. — Origin of the Centrosoma „ Kerschner, L. -Muscle-spindles „ Heidenhain, M. — Intercellular Bridges between Smooth Muscle Cells and Epithelial Cells „ Stricht, O. Van der — White Corpuscles of Mammals .. .. „„ .. Part 6 y. General. Holt, E. W. L. — Survey of Fishing Grounds, West Coast of Ireland .. Part 1 Bles, E. J. — Plankton of Plymouth „ Garstang, W. — Marine Invertebrate Fauna of Plymouth „ Cosmovici, L. C. — Excretory System of Animals „ Driesch, Hs. — Studies in Developmental Mechanics . . „ Schdlze, F. E. — Terminology of Position and Direction Part 2 Thomson, J. A., & N. Wyld — Theory of Sex „ Francken, C. J. Wynaendtz— Evolution of Sex .. .. „ Bay, C. — Movements of Plants and Animals „ Kennel, J. yon — Classification of Animals „ Brandt, A. — Classification of Animal Variations „ Clarke, C. B. — Biological Regions and Tabulation Areas „ Verworn, Max — Movement of Living Matter Part 3 Ardissone, F. — The Living Organism „ Haeckel, E. — Plankton „ Biological Nomenclature „ Lilienfeld, L., & A. Monti — Phosphorus in the Tissues Part 4 Lwoff, B. — Nerve-cord and Notochord in Amphioxus Part 5 Weber, M. — Hairs and Scales in Mammals Part 6 Hyatt, A. — Bioplastology „ Sandeman, G. — A Parasitic Disease in Flounders „ B. — Invertebrata. Griffiths, A. B. — Blood of Invertebrata Part 2 „ „ Nervous Tissues of Invertebrates „ Braln, M. — Report on Animal Parasites „ Yung, E. — Influence of Light on Development of Animals Part 3 Mollusca. Hedley, C., & H. Suteb — Land and Fresh-water Mollusca of New Zealand Part 5 Eoisel, G. — Lingual Cartilages of Mollusca Part 6 D’Hardiyiller, A. — Nervous System of Lamellibranchs and Gastropods . . PAGE 308 308 308 309 462 462 462 462 613 613 614 614 614 725 27 27 28 29 29 159 160 160 161 161 161 162 310 311 311 311 463 614 726 727 811 162 162 162 311 615 728 728 CONTENTS. XI a. Cephalopoda. pack Joubin, L. — Coloration of Integument of Cephalopoda Part 5 615 Joubin, L. — Peculiar Chromatophores in a Cephalopod Part 6 729 Lonnberg, E. — Swedish Cephalopoda „ 729 y. Gastropoda. Villepoix, R. Moynier be— Repair of Shell of Helix aspersa Part 1 30 Woodward, B. B. — Growth and Structure of Shell in Velates conoideus and other Neritidae .. ,, 30 Scharff, R. F. — Slugs of Ireland „ 30 Plate, L. H. — Structure and Relationships of the Solenoconcha .... „ 31 Bouvier, E. L. — Affinities of Groups of Gastropoda Part 2 163 Erlanger, R. y. — So-called Primitive Kidneys of Gastropods „ 163 „ „ Nephridial Gland of Prosobranchs „ 163 „ „ Development of Cassidaria „ 163 Thiele, J. — Shell-structure „ 164 Cuenot, L. — Physiology of Pulmonata Part 3 312 Simroth, H. — Pulmonata of Portugal and the Azores „ 312 Erlanger, R. y. — Development of Bythinia „ ^313 Hecht, E. — Some Means of Defence in Eolididx „ 313 Heuscher, J. — Structure of Proneomenia „ 313 Griffiths, A. B. — Olfactory Organs of Helix Part 4 463 Bergh, R. — Opisthobranchs of the 1 Hirondelle * „ 463 Wackwitz, J. — Histology of Muscle in Heteropods and Pteropods .. .. „ 463 Hedley, E. — Range of Placostylus „ 464 Pilsbry, H. A. — New Classification of Helices Part 5 616 Andre, E. — Integument of Zonites cellarius „ 617 Heymons, R. — Development of Umbrella mediterranea „ 617 Vayssiere, A. — Homalogyra „ 618 Garstang, W. — Structure and Habits of Jorunna Johnstoni „ 618 Thiele, J. — Branchial Sensory Organs of Patellidx „ 618 Simroth, H. — Neomeniidx „ 618 Dall, W. H. — Phytogeny of Docoglossa Part 6 729 Sterki, Y. — Vallonia „ 729 Davenport, C. B. — Development of Cerata in JEolis „ 730 5. Lamellibranchiata. Grobben, C. — Structure of Cuspidaria and System of Lamellibranchiata.. Part 2 164 Bruyne, de — Phagocytosis in Gills of Lamellibranchiata „ 164 Jhering, H. von — South American Najadx „ 165 Chatin, J. — Seat of Coloration in Green Oysters Part 3 314 Schiedt, R. 0. — Oysters from N. W. Coast of United States „ 314 Chatin, J. — Ocular Nerves of Spondylus goederopus Part 4 464 Lotsy, J. P. — Food of Oysters , Clams , and Mussels „ 464 Boehm, G. — Pedal Impression of Pachyerisma „ 464 „ „ Lithiotis problematica Gumbel „ 464 Janssens, F. — Gills of Lamellibranchs Part 5 619 Kellogg, J. L. — Morphology of Lamellibranchiata Part 6 730 Coupin, H. — Elimination of Foreign Bodies in Lamellibranchs .. .. „ 731 xii CONTENTS. Molluscoida. a Tunicata. Oka, A. — Budding of Botryllus Parti Willey, A. — Studies on the Protochorda .. Part 2 Metcalf, M. M. — Eyes and Central Nervous System of Salpa „ Goppert, E. — Optic Organ of Salpa „ Pizon, A. — Blastogenesis in Botryllidse Part 3 Griffiths, A. B. — New Respiratory Globulin of Tunicates „ Day (doff, M. Y. — Canalis Neurentericus Anterior „ Salensky, W. — Origin of Metagenesis in Tunicata Part 4 Jourdain, S. — Deglutition in Synascidiae Salensky, W. — Nervous System in Embryos of Distaplia Brooks, W. K. — Origin of Organs of Salpa „ „ Nutrition of Embryo of Salpa .. Metcalf, M. M. — New Species of Octacnemus Newstead, A. H. L. — Perivisceral Cavity of Ciona Part 5 Hjort, J. — Development of Tunicates „ Brooks, W. K. — Salpa in Relation to the Evolution of Life Part 6 Willey, A. — Neuro-hypophysial System of Tunicates „ „ „ Position of Mouth in Larvae of Ascidians „ B. Bryozoa. Fowler, G. Herbert — Structure of Rhabdopleura Part 1 Harmer, S. F. — Embryonic Fission in Cyclostomatous Polyzoa Part 2 Hincks, T. — General History of Marine Polyzoa „ Demade, P. — Statoblast of Phylactolxmata „ Dayenport, C. B. — Urnatella gracilis Part 3 Cori, C. J. — Nephridia of Cristatella „ Gregory, J. W. — Classification of Cheilostoma Part 4 Hincks, T. — Marine Bryozoa Part 6 y. Brachiopoda. Fischer, P., & D. P. Oehlert — Development of Brachial Apparatus of some Brachiopods Part 3 Blochmann, F. — Structure of Brachiopoda Part 4 Crane, Agnes — New Classifications of Brachiopoda Part 5 Williams, H. S. — Brachial Apparatus of Hinged Brachiopoda .. .. Part 6 Arthropoda. Bernard, H. M. — Origin of Tracheae of Arthropoda from Setiparous Sacs Part 1 Taschenberg, O. — Parthenogenesis Part 2 Viallanes, H. — Compound Eye of Arthropods „ Viallanes, H. — Nerve-centres of Arthropoda Part 3 Zograf, N. — Origin and Relationships of Arthropoda „ Pocock, R. I. — Classification of Tracheate Arthropoda Part 5 a. Insecta. Rasp ail, V. — Development of Melolontha vulgaris Part 1 Bugnion, E. — Structure and Life-history of Encyrtus fusicollis .. .. „ Wasmann, E. — International Relations of Lomechusa „ Verhoeff, C. — Facts concerning Sex and Reproduction in Hymenoptera . . „ „ „ Use of Spines in Nymphs of Hymenoptera „ PAGE 31 165 167 168 315 316 316 464 465 465 466 467 467 619 619 731 732 732 32 168 170 170 316 317 467 732 317 468 620 733 32 170 170 318 319 620 33 33 34 34 35 CONTENTS. Xlll Linden, Maria von — Life-history of Phryganidae Part 1 Muggenburg, F. H. — Proboscis of Diptera pupipara „ Griffiths, A. B. — Colours of Insects Part 2 Coste, F. H. Perry — Reactions of Lepidopterous Pigments „ Henking, H. — Oogenesis , Maturation , and Fertilization „ Hoffbauer, C. — Wings of Insects „ Escherich, C. — Biological Import of Genital Appendages „ Petersen, W. — Dichogamy of Lepidoptera „ Spuler, A. — Phytogeny of Papilionidse „ Hampson, G. F. — Fauna of British India „ Muller, G. W. — Caterpillars Living in Water „ Latter, O. H. — Secretion of Potassium Hydroxide by Dicranura vinula.. „ Packard, A. S. — Aglia tau „ Gahan, C. J. — Sensory Nature of “ Appendix ” of Antennae of Coleop- terous Larvae „ Verhoeff, C. — Biological Notes on Hymenoplera „ Wasmann, E. — Sounds made by Ants „ Adelung, N. von — Tibial Auditory Apparatus of Locustidae „ Blatter, P. — Histology of Organs Appended to Male Apparatus of Periplaneta orientalis .. „ Lewis, R. T. — New Species of Aleurodes ( A . asparagi) „ Whitehead, C. — Insects Injurious to Crops Part 3 Standfuss, M. — Hybridism among Insects „ Merrifield, F. — Effects of Temperature in the Pupal Stage „ Elwtes, H. J., & J. Edwards — Male Genitalia of Yphthima „ Gonin, J. — Metamorphosis of Lepidoptera „ Chapman, T. A. — Pupae of Heterocerous Lepidoptera „ Rogenhofer, A. F. — Pocket-like Abdominal Appendages of Female Acraeidae „ Hart, J. H. — Habits of Trigona „ Linden, M. v. — Self-mutilation in Larvae of Pliryganidae „ Nassonov, N. — Systematic Position of Strepsiptera „ Meyer, Paul — Coccus cacti „ Krassilstchik, J. — Systematic Position of Pliytophthires „ Pungur, Gyula — Gryllidae of Hungary „ Buckler, W., & others — Larvae of British Butterflies and Moths . . . . Part 4 Watson, E. Y. — Classification of Hesperiidae „ Swinhoe, C. — Mimetic Forms of Hypolimnas „ Forel, A. — Ants’ Nests „ „ „ Notes on Ants „ Bos, J. Ritzema— The Pharaoh-Ant „ „ ,, Change of Diet in a Beetle „ Rath, O. vom — Reducing Division in Spermatogenesis of Gryllotalpa . . „ Schaff, E. — A Diluvial Cockroach „ Dahl, F. — Halobatidae of Plankton Expedition „ Packard, A. S. — Life-history of Cochliopodidae Part 5 Seitz, Ad. — Nutritive Relations of Lepidoptera „ Elmer, G. H. Th. — Evolution of Papilionidae „ Luciani, L., & D. Lo Monaco — Respiratory Phenomena in Chrysalids of Silk Moth „ Auerbach, L. — Remarkable Behaviour of the Spermatozoa of Dytiscus marginalis „ Emery, C. — Chirping and Jumping Ants „ PAGE 35 35 171 171 172 173 174 174 174 175 175 176 176 176 176 177 177 ' 178 285 320 320 320 321 321 322 322 322 323 323 324 324 324 468 468 469 469 469 469 470 470 470 470 621 621 622 622 622 623 XIV CONTENTS. Bargagli, P.— Nests of Formica rufa Guercio, G. Del — Hylotoma pagana Franceschini, F. — Autumnal Generation of Diaspis pentagona Verhoeff, C. — Pogonius bifasciatus F. Howard, L. O. — Biology of Chalcididae Cameron, P. — British Phytophagous Hymenoptera Boas, J. E. Y. — Copulatory Organs of Cockchafer Dubois, R. — Eggs of Acridium peregrinum Wheeler, W. M. — Insect Embryology Packard, A. S. — Life-Histories of Ceratocampidae, &c Poulton, E. B. — Colours of Lepidopterous Larvae Chapman, T. A. — Lepidopterous Pupa with Functional Mandibles .. Miall, L. C. — Dicranota : a Carnivorous Tipulid Larva Peytoureau, A. — Anatomy and Development of Male Genital Armature of Orthoptera Q. Myriopoda. Pocock, R. I. — Myriopoda of the * Challenger ’ Expedition Sinclair, F. G. — New Mode of Respiration in Myriopoda Verhoef, C. — Life-history of Julidae Adensamer, T. — Eye of Scutigera coleoptrata Verhoeff, C. — A new /Stage in the Development of Male Julidae Child, C. M. — Functions of Nervous System of Myriopoda Dubois, R. — Production of Light in Orya barbarica Chatin, J. — Cerebral Nuclei of Myriopoda y. Protracheata. Fletcher, J. J., & A. Dendy — Viviparity of Australian Peripatus . . Pollard, E. C. — Peripatus from Dominica Cockerell, T. D. A. — Peripatus jamaicensis 5. Arachnida. Marx — Distribution of Spiders Thorell, T. — Malayan and Papuan Spiders Koenike, F. — Two new Hydrachnids from the Rhaetikon „ „ Hydrachnidae Piersig, R.— Freshwater Mites Schimkewitsch, W. — South American Pantopoda Pocock, R. I. — Morphology and Classification of Arachnida Bernard, H. M. — Terminal Organ of Pedipalp of Galeodes Birula, A. — Reproductive Organs of Galeodes Purcell, F. — Eye of Phalangiidae Gaubert — Nerve-ganglion in Legs of Phalangium opilio Kramer, P. — Types of Larvae among Freshwater Mites Wagner, F. von — Chernes on a Tipulid Karpelles, L. — Peculiar Parasite of the Goura Jourdain, S. — Fixation of Parasitic Hexapod Larvae of Acari Canestrini, G. — Phytoptidee Weed, C. M. — Striped Harvest-Spider Kennel, J. von — A affinities and Origin of the Tardigrada Michael, A. D. — Bernard's “ Digestive Processes in Arachnids ” . . Bernard, H. M. — Digestive Processes in Arachnids Part 5 PAGE 623 55 623 55 623 51 623 „ 623 „ 624 55 624 15 624 Part 6 733 „ 734 51 734 55 734 55 735 55 735 Part 2 178 55 178 Part 3 325 Part 4 470 »> 471 Part 5 624 55 625 Part 6 735 Part 2 178 Part 6 736 55 736 Part 1 35 51 35 55 35 55 36 55 36 55 36 Part 2 179 51 180 55 180 „ 181 51 181 55 181 55 181 51 181 Part 3 325 55 326 55 326 55 326 55 420 Part 4 427 CONTENTS. XV Hessler, R. — Extreme Case of Parasitism Fart 4 C au sard, M. — Circulatory Apparatus of My gale csementaria „ Pocock, R. I. — Habits of Living Scorpions Part 5 Leydig, F. — Parasitism of Pseudoscorpions » Damin, N. — Parthenogenesis in Spiders » Michael, A. D. — New British Acarus Patten, W. — Brain and Sense-Organs of Limulus Pocock, R. I. — Classification of Scorpions Part 6 Michael, A. D. — Variations in Internal Anatomy of Gamasiwe e. Crustacea. Alcock, A. — Habits of Gelasimus annulipes Part 1 Bergh, R. S. — Germinal Area and Dorsal Organ of Gammarus pulex .. „ Frenzel, J. — Mid-gut of Artemia „ Groom, T. T. — Early Development of Cirripedia „ Malard, A. E. — Influence of Light on Coloration of Crustaceans . . . . Part 2 Viallanes, H. — Ganglionic Lamina of Palinurus „ Saint-Hilaire, C. de — Absorption in the Crayfish „ Sharp, B. — Hippa emerita ,, Bergh, R. S. — Development of Germ-stripe of Mysis „ Claus, C. — Structure of Cypridse ,, Dahl, F. — The Genus Copilia ( Sapphirinella ) „ Jolyet, F., & H. Viallanes — Nervous System of Heart of Crab .. .. Part 3 Allen, E. J. — Nephridia and Body-cavity of Larva of Palsemonetcs varians „ Giesbrecht, W. — Pelagic Copepoda of Naples „ Richard, J. — Lateral Eye of Pleuromma „ Dahl, F. — Lateral Organ of Pleuromma „ Chevreux, E., & J. de Guerne — Commensals of Mediterranean Turtles .. „ Beneden, P. J. Van — Neio Caligidse „ Capanni, V. — Daphnia „ Gruvel, A. — Structure and Growth of Calcareous Test of Balanus . . . . „ Herrick, F. H. — Cement Glands of Lobster Part 4 Haecker, V. — Protective Adaptations in Crabs „ Royal Academy of Amsterdam — Limnoria lignorum „ Brauer, A. — Parthenogenetic Ova of Artemia salina „ Herrick, F. H. — Podopsis „ Henderson, J. R. — Indian Carcinology Part 5 Cuenot, L. — Physiology of the Crayfish „ Cano, G. — Embryology and Morphology of Oxyrhynchi „ Urbanowitz, F. — Development of Maia Squinado „ Nusbaum, Jozef — Embryology and Histogeny of the Isopoda „ Rossykaia-Kojevnikova, M. — Formation of Gonads of Amphipoda . . „ Chevreux, E., & E. L. Bouvier — Amphipoda of Saint Vaast-la-Hougue „ Claus, C., & Al. Mrazek — Antennse of Cyclopidse „ Mrazek, Al. — Freshwater Harpacticidx, „ Valle, A. Della — Gammarini Part 6 Butschinsky, P. — Embryology of Cumacea „ Samassa, P. — Germinal Layers of Cladocera . . . . . . „ Thompson, I. C. — Copepoda of Liverpool Bay „ Giard, A., & J. Bonnier— New Choniostomatidx „ Moore, J. E. S. — Reproductive Elements of Apus and Branchipus .. . . „ Beecher, C. E. — Larval Forms of Trilobites „ Matthew, W. D., & H. M. Bernard — Appendages of Triarthrus Becki .. „ PAGE 471 471 625 625 626 626 626 736 736 36 36 37 37 182 182 182 183 483 184 184 326 326 327 327 328 328 328 328 329 471 472 472 472 473 627 627 627 628 628 629 629 630 630 737 737 737 738 738 738 739 740 XVI CONTENTS. Vermes. a. Annelida. PAGE Cori, C. J. — Anomalies of Segmentation in Annelids Horst, R. — Earthworms from the Malay Archipelago Friend, H. — British Tree- and Earth-worms Maier, B. L. — Eyes of Hirudinea Griffiths, A. B. — Blood-pigment of Gephyrea Saint- Josephs, de — Asymmetrical Growth in Polychseta Hering, E. — Alciopidse of Messina Hubrecht, A. A. W. — Nephridiopores of Earthworms Vejdofsky, F. — Nepliridia of Megascolides Beddard, F. E. — New Genera and Species of Earthworms „ „ Japanese Perichsetidse Rosa, D. — New Perichsetidse Friend, H. — New Earthworm from Ireland Goodrich, E. S. — New Oligoclisete Floericke, C. — New Naidomorpha Blanchard, R. — Glossiphonia tesselata in Chili Francaviglia, M. C. — Horse-Leech in Man Marenzeller, E. von — New Pelagic Polynoid . . ., Beddard, F. E. — New Earthworms Rosa, D. — New Species of Perichseta Bolsius, H. — Segmental Organ of Enchytrseidse Randolph, Harriet — New Tubificidse Leuckart — Salivary Glands of Hirudinea Blanchard, R. — Terrestrial Leech from Chili „ „ Notes on Hirudinea Buchanan, F. — Peculiarities in Segmentation of Polychsetes Apstein, C. — Alciopidse of Berlin Museum Bonnier, J. — Maxillary Apparatus of Euniceidse Goodrich, E. S. — New Organ in the Ly cor idea Ehlers, E. — Arenicola marina Wawrzik, E. — Supporting Tissue of the Nervous System Benham, W. B. — New Species of Nais Beddard, F. E. — Anatomy of Sutroa Benham, W. B. — New Moniligaster Blanchard, R. — Notes on Hirudinea Benham, W. B. — Post-Larval Stage of Arenicola marina Andrews, E. A. — Polychseta of North Carolina Buchanan, F. — Polychseta from Deep Water off Ireland Racovitza, E. G. — Micronereis variegata Woodward, M. F. — Variations in Genitalia of British Earthworms Eisen, G. — Anatomy of Ocnerodrilus „ „ Anatomy of Kerria Collin, A. — Earthworms of the Neighbourhood of Berlin Shipley, A. E. — Anatomy of Sipunculus Hering, E. — Alciopidse of Messina Lenhossek, M. v. — Inir a- epidermal Blood-vessels in Shin of Earthworm . . Moore, H. J. — New Genus of Oligochseta Guerne, J. de, & R. Horst — Allolobophora Savignii Part 1 11 11 11 Part 2 11 11 11 11 11 H 11 Part 3 11 11 11 11 11 11 Part 4 ii ii ii ii ii ii ii ii ii Part 5 ii a ii ii ii ii ii Part 6 11 11 11 38 38 39 40 40 184 185 185 185 186 186 187 187 187 187 187 188 330 330 330 330 331 331 331 331 473 474 474 474 474 475 475 475 476 476 630 631 631 632 632 632 632 633 633 740 740 740 741 CONTENTS. 0. Nemathelminthes. Rohde, E. — Muscle and Nerve of Nematodes Part 1 „ „ Muscle and Nerve in Mermis and Amphioxus „ „ „ Eolomyaria „ Charles, R. Havelock — Male of Filaria medinensis „ Magalhaes, P. S. de — Filaria Bancrofti and F. immitis „ Railliet, A., & A. Lucet — Eeteralds „ Giles, G. M. J. — Nematodes of Indian Horses and Sheep ,, Linstow, V. — Mermis nigrescens Part 2 Jammes, L. — Subcuticular Layer of Ascar ids „ Stiles, C. W. — Anatomy of Myzomimus scutatus „ Camerano, L. — Species of Gordius „ Francaviglia, M. C. — Species of Echinorliynchus „ Giles, G. M. — Cystic Worms found in Butcher's Meat and in Equine Animals , which simulate the appearance of Tuberculosis .. .. Part 3 Camerano, L. — Muscular Force of Gordius „ „ „ New Species of Gordius ., Manson, P. — Ecdysis of Filaria Sanguinis Hominis ,, Linton, E. — Avian Entozoa „ Wasielewski, von — Germinal Zone of Ascaris megalocephala Part 4 Linstow, von — Oxyuris Paronai and Cheiracanthus hispidus „ Strassen, O. zur — Bradynema rigidum Part 5 List, Th. — Development of Pseudalius inflexus . . . . „ Cerfontaine, P. — Trichinosis „ Magalhaes — New Eeterakis „ Linstow, von — Allantonema sylvaticum Part 6 Zschokke, F. — Life-history of Echinorhynchus proteus „ y. Platyhelminthes. Dendy, A. — Geonemertes australiensis Part 1 Benham, W. B. — Freshwater Nemertine in England „ Hallez, P. — Classification of Triclada „ Dendy, A. — Land Planarians from Tasmania and South Australia.. .. „ „ „ Land Planarians from Queensland „ „ „ Victorian Land Planarians „ Brandes, G. — Bevision of Monostomida „ Sekera, E. — Notes on Water- Vascular System of Mesostomidx „ Zschokke, F. — Bare Parasites of Man „ Linstow, O. v. — Taeniae of Birds „ Railliet, A. — Notes on Parasites „ Richard, J. — Cysticercoid in Freshwater Calanid Crety, C. — Structure of Solenophorus „ Chichkoff, G. D. — Freshwater Dendroccela Part 2 Zykoff, W. — Turbellarian Fauna of Moscow Graff, L. — Pelagic Poly clads ^ Haswell, W. A. — Systematic Position and Belationships of Temnocephaleae „ Lutz, A. — Helminthological Notes from Hawaii Parona, C., & A. Perugia — Microcotyle Sonsino, P. — New Species of Distomum Thompson, D’A. W. — Tapeworm ( Taenia Echidnae sp. n.) from Echidna.. Part 3 Pereyaslawzewa, S. — Monograph of Turbellaria of Black Sea Zacharias, O. — Distoma Cysts in Heart of Fish xvii PAGK 40 41 42 43 43 43 43 188 188 189 189 189 289 332 332 332 333 * 477 477 633 634 634 635 741 741 44 44 45 45 45 46 46 46 46 47 47 47 47 189 190 190 191 191 192 192 297 333 333 CONTENTS. xviii Zograf, N. — Ectodermic Tissues of Cestoda Part 3 Blochmann, F. — Development of Cercaria of Helix hortensis „ Haswell, W. A. — Turbellarian in Underground Waters Part 4 „ „ New Genus of Temnocephalese „ Verrill, A. E. — Marine Planarians of New England „ „ „ Dinophilidse of New England „ „ „ Marine Nemerteans of New England and adjacent Waters „ Plessis, G. du — Nemertea of Lake Geneva „ Dendy, A. — Reproduction of Geonemertes australiensis „ Gamble, F. W. — British Marine Turbellaria „ Lang, A. — Cercaria of Amphistomum subclavatum „ Will, H. — Anatomy of CaryophyUseus mutabilis „ Stossich, M. — Helminthological Notes „ Riches, T. H. — Nemertines of Plymouth Sound Part 5 Gamble, F. W. — Turbellaria of Plymouth Sound „ Penard, E. — Mechanism of Stinging Cells in Turbellaria „ Graff, L. — New European Land Planarian .. „ Bergendal, D. — Swedish Tricladidse „ Walter, E. — Structure of Trematodes „ Looss, A. — Body-parenchyma of Trematodes ,, Sonsino, P. — Trematodes of Reptiles and Amphibians „ Alessandrini, G. — The predominant Tienia of Rome „ Magalhaes, P. S. de — Brazilian Helminthology „ Stiles, C. W. — Notes on Cestodes „ Girard, C. — Planarians and Nemerteans of North America Part 6 Burger, O. — South Georgian and other Nemertines „ Sonsino, P. — Notes on Fluhes „ Braun, M. — Liver-Flukes of Cats „ Sonsino, P. — Life-cycle of Bilharzia hsematobia „ Lonnberg, E. — Helminthology of West Coast of Norway „ S. Incertae Sedis. Anderson, H. H., & J. Shephard — Victorian Rotifers Part 1 Wierzejsky, A. — Asplanchna „ Thorpe, V. G. — Rotifera of China Part 2 Morgan, T. H. — Balanoglossus and Tornaria of New England Prouho, H. — Notes on Myzostoma Jagerskiold, J. A. — Two new Species of Rotifers Hood, J. — New Species of Rotifers Levander, K. M. — New Species of Pedalion Part 3 Bryce, D. — Moss-dwelling Cathypnidx . . „ Rousselet, C. F. — Floscularia pelagica sp. n., and Notes on several other Rotifers Part 4 Rousselet, C. F. — List of New Rotifers since 1889 Glascott, L. S. — Irish Rotifers Bergendal, D. — Rotatoria of Greenland Daday, E. v.— Rotifera of the Gulf of Naples Wierzejski, A., & O. Zacharias — New Freshwater Rotifers Bryce, D. — Adinetidw Western, G. — Notes on Rotifers Haswell, W. A. — Phoronis from Port Jackson Bohmig, L. — Minute Anatomy of Rhodope Veranii PAGE 333 333 477 477 477 478 478 478 478 479 479 479 480 635 635 636 636 636 636 637 637 637 637 638 741 741 742 742 742 742 48 48 145 192 192 192 281 334 334 444 450 480 481 481 481 482 482 482 482 CONTENTS. XIX Wagner, F. v. — Gastrotricha Janson, O. — Philodinidae Dixon-Nuttall, F. R. — Euchlanis bicarinata Perty (Figs. 89a and 90a) Wiekxejski, A. — Rotifer without “ Rotating Organ ” „ „ New Floscularia Thorpe, V. Gunson — Construction of Lorica of Bracliionus Echino derma. Loven, S. — Echinologica Bell, F. Jeffrey — Catalogue of British Echinoderms „ „ Echinoderms from West Coast of Ireland Greenough, H. S. — Larva s of Echinoids Field, G. W. — Larvae of Asterias vulgaris MacBride, E. W. — Development of Amphiura squamata Perrier, E. — Morphology of Skeleton of Starfishes Marenzeller, E. von — Holothurians collected by the ‘ Ilirondelle ’ .. Herbst, C. — Yolk-membrane in Eehinoderm Ova Ludwig, H., & P. Barthels — Cuvierian Organs Ludwig, H. — Deposits of Synaptidae Alcock, A. — Deep-sea Asteroidea from the Indian Ocean Macbride, E. W. — Organogeny of Amphiura squamata Sluiter, C. P. — Movements of a Tropical Ophiurid Chun, C. — Formation of Skeletal Parts in Echinoderms Seeliger, O. — Development of Antedon rosacea Russo, A. — Aboral Vascular Lacunas in Ophiothricidx Perrier, E. — New Bilateral Holothurian MacBride, E. W. — Development in Asterina gibbosa Loeb, J. — Cleavage of Eggs of Arbacia Bell, F. Jeffrey — Crinoids from Sahul Bank Ludwig, H. — Holothurians from the Eastern Pacific Leipoldt, F. — Excretory Organ of Sea- Urchins Field, G. W. — Eehinoderm Spermatogenesis Marchisio, P. — Synonymy of Starfishes Bell, F. Jeffrey — Odontaster and Allied Genera „ „ Cidaris curvaiispinis Chapeaux, M. — Nutrition of Echinoderms Theel, H. — Development of Echinocyamus pusillus Chadwick, H. C. — Abnormal Specimen of Antedon rosacea Marenzeller, E. von — Notes on Holothurians Coelentera. Haddon, A. C. — Larva of Euphyllia Jourdan, E. — New Species of Epizoanthus from the Azores Nagel, W. — Sense of Taste in Sea Anemones Sluiter, C. Ph. — Historical Note as to Theories of Coral Reefs Maas, O. — Structure and Development of Cunina Buds Ortmann, A. — East African Coral Reefs Carlgren, O. — The Edwardsise Willem, V. — Absorption in Actiniae Chapeaux, M. — Digestion of Coelentera Schneider, K. C. — Histology of Coelentera Cazurro y Ruix — Structure of Anemonia sulcata Penn 1893. PAGE Part 4 483 Part 5 638 55 639 55 640 55 640 641 Part 1 48 „ 49 55 50 55 50 95 50 55 52 55 53 55 53 Part 2 192 55 193 55 193 55 194 55 194 95 194 55 194 Part 3 334 55 335 55 335 Part 4 483 ?5 484 55 484 55 484 Part 5 641 55 641 642 55 642 55 642 Part 6 742 55 743 „ 744 55 744 Part 1 53 „ 54 55 54 54 55 54 Part 2 194 V 195 „ 195 Part 3 335 55 335 55 336 55 b Xx CONTENTS. Brook, G. — New Species of Madrepora Antipa, G. — Neiv Species of Drymonema Gunther, R. T. — Medusa of Lake Tanganyika Beecher, C. E. — Development of a Palseozoic Poriferous Coral „ „ Symmetrical Cell-development in Favositidae Brook, G. — Affinities of Madrepora Appellof, A. — Edwardsix Greig, J. A. — Norwegian Pennatulida Chapeaux, M. — Organs of Relation of Hydromedusx Sigerfors, C. P. — Formation of Blastostyle Buds in Epenthesis McCradyi Bigelow, R. P. — Polydonia frondosa Murbach, L. — Development of Stinging Organs in Hydroids Claus, C. — Development of the Scyphostoma Antipa, Gr. — A new Stauromedusa Hartlaub, C. — Classification of Anthomedusx Zoja, R. — A new Hy droid Brook, G. — Catalogue of Madreporarian Corals Carlgren, O. — Septal Musculature and (Esophageal Grooves in Anthozoa „ „ Brood-chambers in Actiniae Goette, A. — Comparative Embryology of Scyphomedusx Hickson, S. J. — Early Stage of Distichopor a violacea Boveri, T. — Gyractis Alcock, A. — Corals fvom Indian Seas Hedlund, T. — Muriceidae Bedot, M. — Revision of the Forskaliidx Brook, G. — Catalogue of Madreporarian Corals Porifera, Bidder, G. — Flask-shaped Ectoderm and Spongohlasts of one of the Keratosa Lendenfeld, R. v. — Hexaceratina Vosmaer, G. C. J. — Morphological Value of the Terms “ Osculum” and “ Pore ” in Sponges Delage, Yves — Embryology of Sponges Maas, O. — Metamorphosis of Esperia Zykoff, W. — Development of Ephydatia from the Gemmules Topsent, E. — New Sponges from the Mediterranean Dendy, A. — Australian Calcarea Heterocoela Topsent, E. — Sponges of the “ Hirondelle” Weltner, W. — Gemmules of Spongillidae Dendy, A. — Structure and Classification of Calcarea Heterocoela Topsent, E. — Histology of Sponges „ „ Notes on Sponges Protozoa. Chapman, F. — Foraminif era from Chalk of Taplow Railliet, A., & A. Lucet — Notes on Caecidia Bertram — Sarcosporidia and Parasitic Sacs in Body-cavity of Rotifers .. Zacharias, O. — Infusorian Skin Parasite of Freshwater Fishes Klebs, G. — Flagellata Haswell, W. A. — Flagellate Infusorian as Intracellular Parasite .. Levander, K. M. — Shell of Glenodinium PAGE Part 3 336 11 336 11 336 Part 4 486 » 486 11 487 „ 487 11 488 11 488 11 488 11 489 11 4 89 11 490 11 490 11 491 491 Part 5 642 643 11 643 11 643 11 643 Part 6 745 „ 745 745 » 745 809 Part 1 55 Part 2 195 11 195 Part 3 337 »> 338 11 339 11 339 Part 4 491 11 491 11 492 Part 6 745 11 746 11 747 Part 1 56 11 56 11 56 Part 2 196 „ 196 V 197 >* 197 CONTENTS. XXl Minchin, E. A. — Gregarines of Holothurians Marshall, W. S. — Life-history of Gregarina Thelohan, P. — Myxosporidia of Gall-bladder of Fishes Yejdovskt, F. — Freshwater Thuricola Goes, A. — Neussina Agasizi Braun, M. — Beport on Parasitic Protozoa Buffer, M. Armand, & J. H. Walker — Parasitic Protozoa found in Cancerous Tumours Schuberg — Coccidia of Mice Stokes, A. C. — Undescribed Infusoria from Brackish Waters of Eastern United States Streng — Infusoria in Sputum from Pulmonary Gangrene Z acharias, O. — Infusorial Parasite from Freshwater Fish Frenzel, J. — New Argentine Protozoa Penard, E. — Pelomyxa palustris and other Low Organisms Topsent, E. — New Marine Bhizopod Woodward, A., & B. W. Thomas — Microscopical Fauna of the Cretaceous in Minnesota Leger, L. — Development of Gregarines of Marine Worms Labbe, A. — Hsematozoa of Cold-blooded Vertebrates Hartig, R. — Lower Organisms in Caterpillar Blood Wernicke, R. — Protozoa in Mycosis fungoides Pfeiffer, R. — Coccidiosis of Babbits Franze, R. — Stigmata of Mastigophora Balbiani, E. G. — Merotomy of Ciliated Infusoria Lister, J. J. — Beproduction of Orbitolites Rhumbler, L. — Depositions within Foraminifera Gruber, A. — Nuclear Division and Spore-formation in Bhizopods .. Labbe, A. — Dimorphism in Development of Ilsematosporidia Chapman, F.— Foraminifera of the Gault of Folkestone. — IV. Rhumbler, L. — Intranuclear Bodies Attfield, D. Harvey — Destruction of Bacteria by Infusoria Labbe, A. — Coccidia of Birds Franze, R. H. — Organization of Choanojlagellata Smith, Th. — i Etiology of Texas Fever Laveran — j. Etiology of Malaria Celli, A. — Parasites of Bed Blood-corpuscles Buffer, M. A., & H. G. Plimmer — Parasitic Protozoa in Cancerous Tumours Soudakewitsch, J. — Intracellular Parasitism of Cancerous Neoplasms . . Korotneff, A. — New Cancer Parasite Moore, J. E. S. — Structural Differentiation of Protozoa Labbe, A. — Coccidia of Birds •• Thelohan, P. — Coccidia Delepine, Sheridan, & P. R. Cooper — Psorospermosis or Gregarinosis . . Schuberg, A. — Parasitic Amoebae of the Human Intestine Pfeiffer, L. — Cancer and Sporozoa Cell-diseases Burchardt, E. — Coccidium in Colloid Cancer Bacelli — Pathogenesis of Malaria Chapman, F. — Foraminifera of the Gault of Folkestone. — Y Part 2 » yy yy yy yy 197 198 198 199 199 199 » n 200 201 Part 3 n » n » 298 339 340 340 341 341 » n » 11 11 Part 4 11 11 W 11 11 Part 5 ii yy yy 341 ' 342 342 342 342 343 492 492 493 494 494 494 579 644 645 645 645 646 646 647 5* 11 Part 6 ii ii ii ii ii 648 648 649 747 747 747 748 748 748 749 750 808 b 2 xxu CONTENTS. BOTANY. A. GENERAL, including* the Anatomy and Physiology of the Phanerogamia. a. Anatomy. (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. Buscalioni, L. — Structure of the Cell-wall Part 1 Krasser, F. — Structure of the Besting Nucleus „ Crato, E. — Physode, an Organ of the Cell „ Loew, O. — Active Albumen in Plants ,, Crato, E. — Structure of Protoplasm Part 2 Detmer, W. — Nature of the Physiological Elements of Protoplasm .. .. „ Schottlander, P. — Nucleus and Sexual-cells of Cryptogams „ Wiesner, J. — Elementary Structure of the Cell „ Buscalioni, L. — Cell-division following Fragmentation of the Nucleus .. „ Mangin, L. — Callose in Phanerogams „ Hoffmeister, W. — Cellulose and. its Forms „ Rosen, F. — Nucleus and Formation of Membrane in Fungi and Myxomy- cetes Part 3 Hauptfleisch, P. — Streaming of Protoplasm „ Loew, O., & T. Bokorny — Proteosomes „ Kienitz-Gerloff, F. — Streaming of Protoplasm and Transport of Nutritive Substances Part 4 Overton, E. — Reduction of the Chromosomes in Nuclei „ Mangin, L. — Pectic Substances in Tissues „ Nageli, C. v., & C. Cramer — Oligodynamic Phenomena of Living Cells.. Part 5 Decagny, C. — Cell-nucleus of Spirogyra ,, Gjurasin, S. — Division of the Nucleus in the Asci of Peziza ,, Bokorny, T. — Wall of Vacuoles „ Decagny, C. — Division of the Cell-nucleus Part 6 Buscalioni, L. — Constitution of the Cell „ Zimmermann, A. — Mechanics of Growth of the Cell-wall „ Moll, J. W. — Karyokinesis in Spirogyra „ Amelung, E. — Average Size of Cells „ Acqua, C. — Formation of the Cell-wall in the Hairs of Lavatera .. . . „ (2) Other Cell-contents (including* Secretions). Schunck, E. — Chemistry of Chlorophyll Part 1 Likiernik, A. — Vegetable Lecithin „ Kraus, G. — Calcium oxalate in the Bark of Trees ,, Stock, G. — Protein-crystals Part 2 Osborne, T. B. — Crystallized Vegetable Proteids „ Koningsberger, J. C. — Formation of Starch Part 3 Binz, A. — Morphology and Formation of Starch-grains „ Mesnard, E. — Localization of the Fatty Oils in the Germination of Seeds „ Moore, S. Le M. — Iron-greening Tannins „ Zopf, W. — Pigments of the lower Cryptogams Part 4 „ „ New Lichen-acid „ Green, J. R. — Vegetable Ferments .. „ PAGE 57 58 58 59 202 202 203 204 204 204 204 344 344 345 495 495 495 650 650 651 651 751 751 751 752 752 752 59 59 59 205 205 345 346 346 346 496 497 497 CONTENTS. XX111 PAGR Monteverde, A. N. — Distribution of Mannite and Dulcite Part 5 651 Borodin, J., & others — Distribution of Calcium oxalate „ 651 Mesnard, E. — Perfume of the Orchidex „ 652 Petit, P. — New Vegetable Nuclein Part 6 752 Chittenden, R. H. — Ferment of the Pine-apple „ 752 Tschirch, A. — Formation of Oil or Resin in Schizogenous Receptacles . . „ 753 (3) Structure of Tissues. Kruger, F. — Thickening of the Wall of Cambium-cells Part 1 60 Godfrin, J. — Resin-canals of the Leaves of Abies pectinata „ 60 Rowlee, W. W. — Root-system of Mikania scandens „ 60 Adler, A. — Length of Vessels and Distribution of Vessels and Traclieids.. Part 2 205 Russell, W. — Assimilating Tissue of Mediterranean Plants ,, 206 Schilberszky, K. — Formation of Secondary Vascular Bundles in Dicotyle- dons „ 206 Jonnson, B. — Sieve-like Pores in Tracheal Xylem-elements „ 206 Baccarini, P. — Tannin-apparatus of the Leguminosx Part 3 347 Guignard, L. — Secretory System of Copaifera „ 347 Wisselingh, C. wx—Suberous Layer and Suberin „ 348 Noack, F. — Mucilage-threads in Intercellular Spaces of Roots of Orchidese ., fc 348 Pirotta, R. — Mucilage Receptacles of Hypoxidese „ 348 Dreyer, A. — Function of the Protecting -sheath Part 4 498 Chodat, R. — Sieve-tubes in the Xylem „ 498 Kruch, O. — Structure of Phytolacca „ 498 Scott, D. H., & G. Brebner — Secondary Tissues of Monocotyledons .. Part 5 652 Rimpach, A. — Curvature of the Cell-wall of the Endoderm of Roots . . . . „ 652 Fellerer, C. — Anatomy of the Begoniacex „ 653 Debold, R. — Anatomy of Phaseolese „ 653 Trecul, A. — First Formation of Vessels in the Leaves of Composite . . Part 6 753 Solla, R. F. — Tannin-cells in the Fruit of the Carob „ 753 Buchenau, F. — Structure of Prionium serratum „ 753 Koningsberger, J. C. — Histology of Rheum „ 753 (4) Structure of Organs. Reiche, C. — Resemblances in Habit between Plants belonging to different Genera Biourge, P. — Structure of Pollen Ewart, M. F. — Staminal Hairs of Thesium Mattirolo, O., & L. Buscalioni — Structure of the Integument of the Seed of Papilionacex Lubbock, Sir John — Seedlings Morris, D. — Branching Palms Frank, B., & others — Dimorphism of the Root-tubercles of the Pea Heinricher, E. — Structure of Lathrxa Clos, D.— Principles of Teratology Schilberszky, K. — Pistillody of the Poppy Tubeuf, K. y. — Seed-wings of Abietinex, and closing of the Cones of Coni- fer x .. .. Foerste, A. F. — Casting-off of the Tips of Branches Pee-Laby, E. — Comparison of Cotyledons and Leaves Haberlandt, G. — Tropical Foliage Klein, J. — Abnormal Leaves Part 1 61 „ 61 „ 61 „ 62 „ 62 „ 62 „ 63 „ 63 Part 2 206 „ 207 „ 207 „ 207 „ 207 „ 208 a 208 XXIV CONTENTS. Petit, L. — Petiole of Phanerogams Oger, A. — Action of Humidity of Soil on Structure of Stem and Leaves . . Groom, P. — Thorns of Randia dumetorum Nobbe, F., & others — Root-tubercles of Elxagnus and of the Leguminosx Bertrand, G., & G. Poirault — Colouring-matter of Pollen Aufrecht, S. — Extra-floral Nectaries Berlese, A. N. — Seeds of the Ampelidex Micheels, H. — Embryo of Palms Bruns, E. — Embryo of Grasses Groom, P. — Embryo of Petrosavia Schumann, K. — Phyllotaxy Wagner, A. — Leaves of Alpine Plants Geneau de LamarliIjre, L. — Leaves developed in the Sun and in the Shade Schenck, H. — Lianes Schimper, A. F. W, — Flora of the Indo-malayan Coasts Masters, M. T. — Inversion of Organs or Tissues Hartmann, T. — Structure of Witch-broom Baroni, E. — Pollen-grains of Papaveracex Guignard, L., & others — Development of the Integument of the Seed Lalaune, G. — Anatomical Characters of Persistent Leaves Groom, P. — Influence of External Conditions on the Form of Leaves Balicka-Iwanowska, & H. Ross — Leaves of Iridese Heinricher, E. — Structure of Lathrxa Berwick, T. — Cotyledonary Glands of Rubiacex C hod at, R., & R. Zollikofer — Capitate Hairs with Vibratile Filaments Groom, P. — Velamen of Orchids Maxwell, F. B. — Roots of Ranunculacese Clos, D. — Passage of Organs into one another Curtiss, C. C. — Seeds of Orchidex GrTtter, W. — Testa of the Seed of Lythrariex Rowlee, W. W. — Achenes and Seedlings of Compositx Borzi, A. — Biology of the Pericarp Noelle, A. 0. — Structure of Runners and Stolons Winkler, A. — Cotyledons of Tropxolum Huth, E. — Wool-climbers Duchartre, P. — Prickles of Rosa sericea Keller, Ida A. — Glandular Hairs of Brasenia , Nobbe, F., & others — Root-tubercles of Elxagnus angustifolius Chatin, A. — Multiplicity of Homologous Parts , . Paoletti, G. — Epicalyx of Tofieldia True, R. H. — Development of the Caryopsis Nestler, A. — Floating-apparatus of the Fruit of Proteacex „ „ Leaves of Ranunculacex Groom & others — Pitchers of Dischidia Groom, P. — Bud-protection in Dicotyledons Holzinger, J. M. — Winter-buds of Utricularia Thomas, M. B. — Rhizome of Corallorhiza Part 2 55 Part 3 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 Part 4 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 Part 5 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 Part 6 55 55 55 PAGE 208 208 209 209 348 349 349 349 350 350 350 350 351 351 351 352 352 498 498 499 499 500 500 501 501 501 501 653 653 653 654 654 654 654 655 655 655 655 754 754 754 754 754 755 755 755 755 /3. Physiology. (1) Reproduction and Embryology. Mann, G. — Embryo-sac of Myosurus Part 1 64 Schulz, A. — Sexual Organs of Flowers „ 65 Millardet, A., & S. A. Beach — Hybridization of the Vine „ 65 CONTENTS. XX Y Rimpau, W.— Crossing of Cultivated Plants Cobelli, R. — Pollination of the Primrose Meehan, T., & M. Reed— Cross- and Self-pollination Riley, C. Y. — Pollination of Yucca Buchenau, F. — Pollination in the Juncacese Riley, C. Y. — Fertilization of the Fig Ascherson, P. — Pollination of Cyclamen persicum . . . . Magnin, A. — Parasitic Castration of Lychnis and Muscari Martin, G. W. — Embryo-sac of Aster and Solidago Meehan, T. — Proterandry and Proterogyny Wehrli, L., & C. A. Newdigate — Pistillody of Male Catkins of Hazel . . Macfarlane, J. M. — Structure of Hybrids Newell, J. H., & others — Cross and Self-pollination Roze, E. — Pollination of Naias and Ceratophyllum Munson, W. M. — Secondary Effects of Pollination Willis, J. C. — Gynodioecism in the Labiatse Strasburger, E. — Process of Impregnation Nawaschin, S., & C. Fritsch — Embryogeny of the Birch Hildebrand, F., & L. Trabut — Distribution of Sexual Organs in Plants Naudin, C. — Fertilization of the Date-palm Heckel, E. — Sexuality of Ceratonia Siliqua Noll, F. — Hermaphrodite Flowers in the Larch Heinsius, H. W. — Pollination by Insects Kirchner, O. — Anemophilous and Entomophilous Plants Pammel, L. H. — Perforation of Flowers by Insects Mottier, D. M. — Embryo-sac and Embryo of Senecio aureus Belajeff, W. — Pollen-tube of Gymnosperms Golinski, St. J. — Androeceum and Gynceceum of Grasses Solms-Laubach — Fertilization of the Fig Baroni, S. — Pollination of Bohdea Molliard — Parasitic Castration of Knautia arvensis of Fluids). Bonnier, G. — Effect of the Electric Light on Vegetation Wiesner, J. — Influence of Position on the Form of Organs Berthoud, E. L. — Dissemination of Plants by Buffaloes Walker, E. — Dissemination of the Seeds of Oxalis stricta Tschirch, A. — Physiology and Biology of Seeds Arcangeli, G. — Parasitism of Cynomorium Jost, L. — Growth in Thickness of Trees Jentys, S. — Influence of an Excessive Proportion of Carbonic Acid on the Growth of Roots Bokorny, T. — Assimilation of Carbon dioxide Kossowitsch, P., & others — Mode of Absorption of Free Nitrogen by the Leguminosx Frank, B. — Exchange of Gases in the Root-tubercles of Leguminosse Rowlee, W. W. — Adaptation of Seeds to Germination Janczewski, E. de — Germination of Anemone Vochting, H. — Transplantation on parts of Plants Mobius, M. — Influence of External Conditions on the Flowering of Plants Hoveler, W. — Importance of Humus for Plants Wieler, A. — Bleeding of Plants Part 1 6G ,, 6G Part 2 209 209 ff 210 ft 210 ft 210 ff 210 Part 3 352 ff 353 ff 353 Part 4 501 502 » 503 » 503 „ 503 Part 5 655 f f 656 656 >) 657 ff 657 ff 657 ff 657 ff 658 ff 658 Part 6 756 ff 756 756 ff 757 ft 757 ” 757 merits Part 1 66 ff 66 ff 67 ff 67 ff 67 ff 67 ff 67 ff 68 ff 68 ff 68 ff 68 Part 2 211 f f 211 ff 211 ff 212 ff 212 ff 213 XXVI CONTENTS. 1'runet, A. — Reserves of Water in Plants Part 2 Schlcesing, T. — Interchange of Carbon Dioxide and Oxygen between Plants and the Atmosphere „ Willis, J. C. — Distribution of the Seed in Claytonia Part 3 „ „ Exotrophy „ W iesner, J. — Unequal Growth in Thickness resulting from position .. .. „ Candolle, C. de — Action of the Ultra-violet Rays on the Formation of Flowers „ Schwendener, S., & others — Torsions in the Growth of Leaves and Flowers „ Jost, L. — Secondary Increase in Thickness of Trees „ Prunet, A. — Development of Potato-tubers „ Bohm, J. — Stem-pressure „ Bonnier, G. — Transmissibility of Pressure in Plants „ Schwendener, S. — Ascent of Sap „ Frank, B. — Nutrition of Pines by Mycorhiza „ Kraus, C. — Adaptation of the Root to vital conditions „ Wortmann, J. — Water Culture of Plants „ Gain, E. — Influence of Moisture on Vegetation „ Prunet, A. — Effects of Freezing on Absorption and Evaporation .. .. „ Schlcesing, T., & others — Fixation of Free Nitrogen by Plants .. . . „ Berthelot — Absorption of Atmospheric Nitrogen by Microbes „ Schneider, A. — Influence of Anaesthetics on Transpiration „ Chodat, E. — Effect of the Electric Light on Vegetation Part 4 Loew, E. — Adaptations for Epiphytism „ Muller-Thurgau, A. — Influence of the Seed on the Development of the Fruit „ Pfeffee, W. — Energetics of Plant' life Part 5 Trabut, L. — Germination of the Cocoa-nut „ Sachs, J. — Relationship between Specific Size and Organization . . . . „ Tischutktn, N. — Nutrition of Insectivorous Plants „ Christison, D. — Increase in Girth of Stems „ Arcangeli, G. — Growth of the Leafstalk of Nymphaeacese s, Girard, A. — Transport of Starch in the Potato „ Jones, H. L. — Graft-hybrid „ Geneau de Lamarliere, L. — Germination of Umbelliferae Part 6 Godlewski, E. — Growth of Plants „ Busse, W. — Growth of the Silver-fir „ Gain, E. — Development of the Tubercles of Leguminosse „ Pasquale, F., & E. Guinier — Exudation from Leaves „ Daniel, L. — Transpiration from Grafts „ (3) Irritability. Claudel, L., & W. Pfeffer — Causes of Sensitive Movements Part 1 Hansgirg, A. — Nyctitropic, Gamotropic, and Carpotropic Movements . . „ Kothert, W. — Propagation of Heliotropic Irritability „ Darwin, F., & Miss D. F. M. Pertz — Artificial Production of Rhythm in Plants „ Macfarlane, J. M. — Irritability of the Leaves of Dionaea Part 3 Wilson, W. P., & Jesse M. Greenman — Movements of the Leaves of Melilotus „ Noll, F. — Heterogenous Induction ,, Errera, L. — Cause of Physiological Action at a Distance „ PAGE 213 214 353 353 354 354 354 354 355 355 355 355 356 356 356 356 356 357 357 357 504 504 504 658 659 659 659 659 659 660 660 758 758 758 759 759 759 69 69 70 70 357 358 358 358 CONTENTS. XXVll Sachs, J. — Latent Irritability Part 4 Bonnier, G. — Changes of Pressure in Mimosa „ McDoxjgal, D. T. — Irritability of the Tendrils of Passijlor a Part 5 (4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). Sigmund, W. — Oil-splitting and Glycoside-splitting Ferments . . . . Part 1 Detmer, W. — Normal Respiration of Plants Part 2 „ „ Decomposition of Albumen in the Absence of Free Oxygen . . ,, Schtjltze, E. — Transformation of Proteids „ Laurent, E. — Reduction of Nitrates by Plants „ Muller, H. K., & H. Warlich — Formation of Calcium oxalate .. .. Part 3 Loew, O.— Influence of Phosphoric Acid on the Formation of Chlorophyll „ Aubert, E. — Physiology of Succulent Plants Part 4 Detmer, W. — Influence of Light on Respiration „ Belzung, E. — Formation of Sulphates and Nitrates „ Brown, H. T., & G. H. Morris — Physiology of Leaves Part 5 Wehmer, C. — Function of Salts of Calcium and Magnesium „ Mayer, A. — Production of Albumin in Plants „ Gruss, J. — Entrance of Diastase into the Endosperm Part 6 y. General. Piccioli, L. — Relationship between Plants and Snails Part 1 Mesnard, E. — Perfumes of Flowers Part 2 Frank’s Text-Book of Botany „ PAGE 504 505 660 71 214 214 214 214 359 359 505 506 506 660 660 661 759 71 214 215 B. CRYPTOGAMIA. Cryptogamia Vascularia. Farmer, J. B. — Embryology of Angiopteris Poirault, G. — Gleicheniacese Potonie, H. — Leaves of Annularia Giesenhagen, K. — Hygrophilous Ferns Goebel, K. — Oophor e-generation of the Hymenophyllacese . . Velenovsky, J. — Axis of Vascular Cryptogams Poirault, G. — Calcium oxalate in Vascular Cryptogams . . Campbell, D. H. — Sporocarp of Pilularia Muller, C. — Development of the Sporange in Polypodiacese Cormack, B. G. — Cambial Development in Equisetacese Grand’Eury, C. — Fossil Vascular Cryptogams Bower, F. O. — Sporophyte of Vascular Cryptogams .. Campbell, D. H. — Development of Azolla Druery, C. T. — Apospory in Lastrea Hovelacque, M., & H. Potonie— Structure of Lepidodendron Muscineae. Braithwaite, R. — Anatomy of Mosses Barnes, C. R. — Classification of Mosses Cardot, J. — Fontinalacese Goebel, K.— Simplest Form of Moss Brizi, U. — Cyathopborum Rabenhorst’s Cryptogamic Flora of Germany ( Musci ) Evans, A. W. — Arrangement of Hepaticx Part 1 71 Part 2 215 99 215 Part 3 359 99 359 Part 5 661 661 99 662 662 99 662 99 662 Part 6 759 99 760 99 761 99 761 Part 2 137 99 215 99 216 99 216 Part 3 360 99 360 Part 6 761 XXV111 CONTENTS. Goebel, K. — Rudimentary Hepaticx Schiffner, Y. — Metzgeriopsis Goebel, K. — Development of Riella Characese. Franze, R. — Antherozoids of Chara Rabenhorst’s Cryptogamic Flora of Germany ( Characese ) Belajieff, W. — Antherozoids of Characese Algae. Bennett, A. W. — Vegetable Growths as Evidence of the Purity or Im- purity of Water Klebs, G. — Production of Zoospores Rosenvinge, L. Kolderup — Growth of Cladophora and Chxtomorplia .. Lagerheim, G. v. — Propagation of Prasiola Klebs, G. — Reproduction of Vaucheria .. .. Schmitz, F. — Tuberous Outgrowths of Floridex Bornet, E. — New Genera of Algae Ivlebahn, H. — Fertilization of (Edogonium Hansteen, B. — Anatomy and Physiology of Fucoidex Heydrich, F. — Algae of German New Guinea Huber, J. — Hairs and Bristles of the Chaetophorese Lagerheim, G. v. — Trichophilus Neniae sp. n „ „ Snow-flora of Ecuador Barber, C. A. — Nematophycus Johnson, T. — Stenogramme „ „ Callosities of Nitophyllum Davis, B. M. — Development of Champia Buffham, T. H. — New Marine Chantransia Klebahn, H., & A. Hansgirg — Chaetosphseridium , a new Genus of Algae Correns, C. — Naegeliella , a new Genus of Brown Freshwater Algae .. Karsakoff, N. — Myriotrichia Lutkemuller, J. — Chlorophyll-bodies of Desmidiaceee Sauvageau, C. — Parasitic Phaeosporeae Buffham, T. H. — Reproductive Organs of Prasiola Batters, E. A. — Giffordia , a new Genus of Ectocarpaceae Schmidle, W. — Chlamydomonas Kleinii sp. Lagerheim, G. v. — Rhodocliytrium, a transitional form behveen the Proto- coccaceae and the Chytridiaceee Mcebius, M. — Tetrasporidium , a new Genus of Algae Reinke’s Atlas of German Seaweeds Buffham, T. H. — Plurilocular Sporanges of Chorda filurn Schmidle, W. — Variability of Desmidieae Correns, C. — Apiocystis Schenk, A., & O. Borge — Fossil Algae Rauff — Receptaculites and Bornetella Schmitz, F. — Lophothalia and Seirospora Smith, A. L., & others — Morphology of the Fucacex Crato, E. — Fucosan Murray, G. — Cryptostomates of the 1‘hxophycex Mitchell, M. O. — Structure of Hydroclathrus Schmitz, F. — Systematic Position of the Bangiacex Murray, G. — Halicystis and Valonia West, W. — New British Freshwater Algx Part 6 761 „ 762 55 762 Part 3 360 360 Part 5 662 Part 1 72 55 72 J9 72 55 73 55 73 Part 2 216 „ 217 55 217 55 218 55 218 218 55 219 55 219 55 219 Part 3 361 55 361 5» 361 55 361 55 361 55 362 55 363 363 Part 4 506 55 506 55 507 * 507 507 55 508 Part 5 663 55 663 55 663 59 663 55 664 55 664 Part 6 762 55 762 „ 763 763 „ 763 55 763 55 764 55 811 CONTENTS. XXIX Fungi. Gill, C. H. — Endophytic Parasite of Diatoms Lagerheim, G. v. — Mastigochytrium , a new genus of Chy tridiace x .. Voglino, P. — Mxycele of Peronospora Costantin, J., & E. Prillieux — Fungus-parasites on Mushrooms .. Dangeard, P. A. — Fungus- parasites of Apples and Pears Lindner, P. — Discriminating and Photographing Yeasts Kosctany, T. — Influence of different Wine Yeasts on Character of Wine Boutroux — Fermentation of Bread Soncint, G. — Influence of Yeast on the Smell of Wine Hansen, E. C. — Influence of Tartaric Acid on Brewer's Yeast Roux, G., &* G. Linossier —Morphology and Biology of the Thrush Fungus (Oidium albicans ) Wolff, M., & J. Israel — Pure Cultivations of Actinomycosis and its Transmissibility to Animals Dietel, P. — Alternation of Generations in the TJredinex Magnus, P. — TJredinex parasitic on Berberis Prillieux, E., & others — Fungus-parasites of cultivated plants Henschel, G. — Mycorhiza of the Fir Patouillard, N., G. v. Lagerheim, & G. Masses— New Genera of Fungi Hariot, P. — New Luminous Fungus Lagerheim, G. v. — Saprophytic Fungus on Snow Matruchot, L. — Development of the Mucedinex Moeller, H. — Cell-nucleus and Spores of Yeast Schrohe, A., & others— Koji, a Ferment producing 18 per cent, of Alcohol Lasche, A. — Saccharomyces Jorgensenii GrOnland, C. — New Torula and Saccharomyces Hansen’s Criticism of the Oidium and Yeast Forms described by Ludwig and Brefeld Berlese, A. N. — Dematophora and Rosellinia "Vial a & Boyer — Aureobasidium, a new Genus of Parasitic Fungi .. Schwarz, F. — Fungus-parasite of the Scotch Fir Voglino, P. — Fungus-diseases of Cultivated Crops Underwood, L. M. — Fungus Diseases of the Orange Zoebl, A. — Brown and Grey Barley Vullemin, P. — JEcidiconium, a new Genus of TJredinex Patouillard, N., & others — New Genera of Fungi M‘Millan, 0. — Carnivorous Fungus Tavel, F. von — Classification of Fungi Frank, A. B., & A. Herzfeld — Bed-staining Fungus of Raw Sugar Wakker, J. H. — Influence of Parasitic Fungi on the Host-plant Giesenhagen, K. — Fungi Parasitic on Ferns Giard, A. — Lachnidium Acridiorum Leclerc du Sablon — Fungus-disease of the Plane Halsted, B. D., & D. G. Fairchild — Blaclc-rot of the Batatas Krasser, F. — Cell-nucleus in Yeast Ferry, R., & J. H. Schuurmans — Saccharomyces hephyr Lagerheim, G. von — Dipodascus , a new Sexual Genus of Hemiasci Massee, G. — Vanilla Disease Prillieux, E. — Fungus of Intoxicating Rye Smith, E. F. — Peach-blight Vuillemin, P. — Conids in the TJredinex Part 1 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 >1 5) Part 2 ii v ii ii ii ii ii ii ii ii ii ii ii ii Part 3 »> V »» )) 5* J* » PAGK 1 73 74 74 74 75 75 76 76 76 76 77 78 78 78 79 v 79 79 219 220 220 220 221 221 221 222 222 222 223 223 223 223 223 224 363 364 364 365 365 366 366 366 366 366 367 367 367 367 XXX CONTENTS. Rehsteiner, H. — Fructification of the Gasteromycetes Dammer, U. — Resting-cells of Merulius lachrymans Habtig, R. — Rhizina undulata Busgen, M. — Germination of Parasitic Fungi Tubeuf, C., & others — New Parasitic Fungi Costantin, J. — Chanci , a Disease of Mushrooms Baroni, E. — Relationship of Calcicolous Lichens to their Substratum Hieronymus, G. — Structure of Yeast-cells Raum, J. — Granules and Vacuoles of Yeast-cells Hansen, E. C. — Saccharomyces Wortmann, J. — Fermentation Differences of Wine Yeasts Fentzling, K. — Influence of Parasitic Uredineae on the Host-plant .. Klebahn, H. — Hetercecious TJredinese Richards, H. M. — Development of the Spermogone of Gaeoma Halsted, B. D. — Anthracnoses of the Solanaceae Humphrey, J. E. — Monilia fructigena Morgan, A. P., & R. Thaxter — Phyllogaster, a new Genus of Phalloideee Arcangeli, G. — Luminosity of Pleurotus olearius Magnus, P. — Effect of Parasitic Fungi on the Flower Wutherlich — Effect of Poisons on the Spores of Fungi Galloway, T. W. — Pythium and Saprolegnia Fischer, M. — Kryptosporium leptostromiforme Minx, A. — Structure and Biology of Lichens Koehler, J. — Saccharomyces membranaefaciens Klein, K. — Red Barley Dangeard, P. A., & Sapin-Tbouffy — Histology of the Uredineae .. Massee, G. — Triphragmium Humphrey, J. E., & others — Parasitic Fungi Chmielewskij, Y. — Fungus-parasite of Spirogyra Tieghem, P. Van, & P. Vuillemin — Classification of the Basidiomycetes Boudier — Pilose Tubercles of Agaricineae Sabouraud, R. — Trichophyton megalosporon pyogenes Lasche, A. — Two Red Mycodermata Neebe & Nun a — The nine known Species of Favus Moller, A. — Fungus-gardens of Ants Costantin, J.— Relationship of the Conidial Forms of Fungi Magnus, P. — Membrane of the Oosperm of Cystopus Tragopogonis .. Humphrey, J. E. — Saprolegniaceae of the United States Wilpeman, E. de — New Chytridiacese Jatta, A. — Ulocodium and Nemacola Jannsens, Fr. A. — Nucleus of the Yeast-cell Pichi, P. — Two new Species of Saccharomyces closely allied to S. membra- naefaciens Rathay, E. — White-rot of the Vine Soppitt, H. T. — JEcidium leucospermum Sauvageau, C., & Perraud — Fungus-parasite of Cochylis Mattirolo, O. — Choiromyces Rabenhorst’s Cryptogamic Flora of Germany (Fungi) Mycetozoa. Viala, P., & C. Sauvageau — Plasmodiophora Vitis and calif ornica Celakovsky, L. — Absorption and Digestion of Organic Substances by the Plasmodes of Myxomycetes Part 3 PAGE 367 „ 368 368 Part 4 508 99 508 509 509 95 509 95 510 55 510 „ 510 J99 511 59 511 99 512 512 99 512 59 513 55 513 Part 5 664 55 664 55 665 55 665 59 665 55 666 99 666 59 666 „ 667 59 667 99 668 99 668 59 669 95 669 59 670 „ 670 Part 6 764 „ 764 59 764 95 764 765 99 765 99 765 55 766 55 767 59 767 55 767 59 767 95 767 Part 1 80 Part 3 368 CONTENTS. XXXI PAGE Zopf, W. — Labyrinthuless Part 4 513 Zukal, H. — Uymenobolus, a new Genus of Myxomycetes Part 5 C71 Lister, A. — Division of Nuclei in the Mycetozoa Part 6 768 Morgan, A. P. — New Myxomycetes „ 768 Protophyta. a. Schizophycese. Gill, C. H. — Endophytic Parasite of Diatoms Part 1 1 Castracane, F. — Biology of Diatoms „ 80 Edwards, A. M. — Species of Diatoms „ 80 Schmidt’s Atlas der Diatomeenkunde „ 80 Lagerheim, G. y. — Glaucospira, a new Genus of Phycochromacex . . . . Part 2 224 Buffham, T. H. — Conjugation in Diatomacex „ 225 Moller, J. D. — Index to the Photographs of Moller's Preparations of Diatoms „ 225 Artari, A. — Development and Classification of Protococcoidex Part 3 369 Miquel, P. — Sporangial Form of Diatoms „ 369 Marx, F. A. — Cells of Oscillatoria „ A 370 Nadson, G. — Phycocyan of the Oscillator iacex .. .. „ 370 Gomont, M. — Lyngbyex Part 4 514 Sauvageau, C. — New Genera of Schizophycex „ 514 Miquel, P. — Biology of Diatoms „ 514 Franze, R., & others — Scenedesmus Part 5 671 Tempere, J. — Genera of Diatoms „ 672 Schmidt, A. — Atlas der Diatomaceen-Kunde „ 672 Turner, W. B. — New Genera of Protococcacex Part 6 768 Butschli, O. — Movement of Diatoms „ 769 Richter, P. — Microcrocis, a new Genus of Cyanophyceze „ 769 Grenfell, J. G. — Diatoms with Pseudopodia „ 806 /3. Schizomycetes. Buchner, H. — Influence of Light on Bacteria Part 1 80 Kirchner — Effect of Chloroform on Bacteria ff 81 Viron, L. — Soluble Pigments produced by Bacteria w 81 Eijkmann, C. — New Phosphorescent Bacterium 82 Pasquale, B. — “ Mai Nero ” of the Vine „ 82 Schenk, S. L. — Micrococcus tetragenus concentricus n 82 Sternberg, G. M. — Micrococcus pneumonise crouposae )} 82 Menge, K. — Micrococcus agilis citreus ?? 82 Tubeuf, C. von — Disease of the Nun (Liparis monacha) „ 83 Ferran, J. — New Chemical Function of the Cholera Bacillus „ 83 Pick, A. — Influence of Wine on Development of Typhoid and Cholera Bacilli 84 Kerry, R., & S. Fraenkel — Action of Bacillus of Malignant (Edema on Carbohydrates and Lactic Acid 84 Perdrix, L. — Bacterium which ferments Starch and produces Amyl Alcohol „ 84 Schreider, M. v.— Mixed Cultivations of Streptococci and Diphtheria Bacilli .. 84 D'Espine & Marignac — Streptococcus obtained from the Blood of a Scarlet Fever Patient ^ 85 XXX11 CONTENTS. Lesage & Macaigne — Bacterium coli commune Tavel, E. — Differential Characters of Bacterium coli commune and Bacillus typhosus Rodet & Roux, & others — Relations of, and Differences between Bacillus coli communis and Bacillus typhosus Fischel, F. — Pathogenic Bacterium in Frogs' Livers Behring — Streptococcus longus Metschnikoff, E., & A. Looss — Phagocytes and Muscular Phagocytosis Kanthack, A. A. — Spleen and Immunization Dahmen, Max — Bacteriological Examination of Water Karlinski, J. — Distribution of Water -bacteria in large Water Basins Witte — Pyosalpinx and Bacteria Szekely, A. von, & A. Szana — Changes hi the Microbicidal Power of the Blood during and after the Infection of the Organism Fraenkel & Pfeiffer’s Photomicrographic Atlas of Bacteria Bibliography Forster, J. — Development of Bacteria at Low Temperatures Wladimiroff — Osmotic Experiments on Living Bacteria Lagerheim, G. v. — Violet Bacteria Overbeck, A. — Pigment-bacteria Eijkmann, C. — Photobacterium javanense Griffiths, A. B. — Pigment of Micrococcus prodigiosus Noury, C., & 0. Michel — Microbicidic Action of Carbon Dioxide .. Frankland, P. F. — Chemistry and Bacteriology of Fermentation Industries Landi, L. — Toxic Substances produced by Anthrax Martin, S. — Chemical Products of the Life-processes of Bacillus anthracis Lupke, F. — Morphology of Anthrax Bacilli Metschnikoff, E. — Aqueous Humour, Micro-organisms and Immunity . . Heurck, H. van — Structure of the Cholera Bacillus Haffkine — Asiatic Cholera in Guinea-pig Charrin & Phisalix — Lasting Abolition of the Chromogenic Function of Bacillus pyocyaneus Karlinski, J. — Behaviour of Typhoid Bacilli in the Soil Kustermann — Existence of Viable Tubercle Bacilli in Prisons A rloing — Phylacogenous Substance found in Liquid Cultivations of Bacillus Anthracis Looss, L. — Phagocytosis Scheibe, A. — Diplococcus Pneumonise and Mastoiditis ! Freire, Domingos — Bacterial Origin of Bilious Fever of the Tropics Germano, E. — Bacillus membranaceus amethystinus mobilis Loew, O. — Bacillus methylicus Luksch, L. — Diagnosis of Bacillus entericus from Bacterium coli commune Scheibe —Influenza Bacillus and Otitis media Babes — Influenza Bacteria Bibliography Thaxter, R. — Myxobacteriacex, a new Order of Schizomycetes Koltjar, E. — Influence of Light on Bacteria Feroni, C. — Diastatic and Inverting Ferments of Bacteria Liesenberg, C. — Leuconostoc mesenterioides Kionka, H., & others — Bactericidal Influence of the Blood Barbacci, O. — Bacterium coli commune and Peritonitis from Perforation Kaman, L. — Demonstrating Typhoid Bacilli in Drinking Water Part 1 55 55 55 55 5* 55 55 Part 2 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 Part 3 55 55 55 55 PAGE 85 85 86 86 87 87 88 88 89 89 89 90 91 225 226 226 227 227 227 227 228 228 228 229 229 229 230 230 230 231 231 232 232 232 233 233 233 234 234 234 370 371 371 371 372 373 373 CONTENTS. XXX1U Heim — Bacterium from Acid Urine Part c Phisalix, C. — Restoring Spore-formation to Asporogenous Anthrax . . .. ,, Wurtz & Hermann — Presence of Bacterium coli commune in corpses .. „ Spronck, C. H. — Invasion of Subcutaneous Tissue by the Diphtheria bacillus „ Nicolle & Quinquand — Bacillus of soft Chancre », Jumelle, H. — Spirillum luteum » Wasmuth, B. — Penetrability of the Shin for Microbes >, Sawtschenko, J. — Flies and the Spread of Cholera „ Zumft — Putrefactive Processes in large Intestine , and Micro-organisms which induce it ,, Schow, W. — Gas-forming Bacillus from Urine in Cystitis „ Buchner, H. — Bactericidal Action of Blood-serum „ Sternberg's Bacteriology ,, Miller, W. D. — Micro-organisms of the Mouth „ Bibliography „ Forster & Bonhoff — Effect of High Temperatures on Tubercle Bacilli . . Part ■ Hankin, E. H. — Origin and Presence of Alexins in the Organism .. . . „ Kitsert, E. — Mucoid Change in Infusions „ Heider, A. — Efficiency of Disinfectants at High Temperatures „ Sherrington, C. S. — Escape of Bacteria with the Secretions „ Bastin, A. — Bactericidal Power of the Blood „ Simmonds, N. — Flies and the Transmission of Cholera „ Zopf, W. — Sphserotilus roseus, a new red aquatic Schizomycete „ Laer, H. yan — Saccharobacillus Pastorianus „ Tizzoni, G., & E. Centanni — Hereditary Transmission of Immunity to Rabies „ Massart, J. — Chemotaxis of Leucocytes and Immunity „ Frenzel, J. — Structure and Spore- formation of Green Tadpole Bacilli . . „ Finkelnburg — Variability of Cholera Bacilli „ Bang, B. — Bacteriology of Swine-plague „ Wurtz, R., & R. Leudet — Pathogenic Action of Bacillus lactis .. .. „ Bake, B. — Tuberculosis and Leprosy „ Fischel, F. — Morphology and Biology of the Tubercle Bacillus „ Letzerich, L. — Bacillus of Influenza „ Reblaud, Th. — Bacterium pyogenes and B. coli commune „ Lewascheff, S. W. — Parasites of Typhus Fever „ D’Espine & de Marignac — Streptococcus isolated from Scarlatina-blood „ Russell, H. L. — Bacteria in Vegetable Tissues Part Migula, W. — Diseases caused by Bacteria „ Macfadyen, A. — Behaviour of Bacteria in small Intestine of Man .. .. „ Swan, A. P. — Resistance of the Spores of Bacillus megaterium to dryness . . „ Ward, H. M. — Action of Light on Bacillus anthracis „ Werigo — White Corpuscles as Protectors of the Blood „ Laser, H. — Hew Bacillus pathogenic to Animals }J Rekowski, L. de — Presence of Micro-organisms in the organs of those dead of Cholera }} Frank, G., & O. Lubarsch — Pathogenesis of Anthrax in Guinea-pigs and Rabbits „ Klein, E. — Pleomorphism of Tubercle Bacillus „ Metschnikoff, E. — Hog-Cholera and Phagocytosis „ Ranvier, L. — Clasmatocytes and their Relation to Suppuration „ Denys, J., & E. Brion — Toxic Principle of Bacillus lactis aerogenes .. „ Griffiths, A. B. — Bacillus pluviatilis „ PAGE 374 374 374 375 375 375 376 376 377 377 377 378 379 379 515 515 516 516 * 517 517 518 518 518 519 519 520 520 520 521 522 522 522 522 523 523 ) 672 672 673 673 673 673 674 675 675 676 676 676 677 678 XXXIV CONTENTS. 6 PAGE Rodet, A., & others — Bacillus typhosus and Bacillus coli communis . . Part 5 678 Maebaix, H. de — Virulence of Streptococci ,, 679 Abel, R. — Bacillus mucosus oz sense „ 680 E oughton, E. W. — Micro-organisms of the Mouth „ 680 Krannhals, EL — Growth of the Comma Bacillus on Potato „ 681 Calmette — Chinese Yeast and Amylomyces Rouxii „ 681 Weibel, E. — Choleroid Vibrio from Well-water „ 682 Bujwid, O. — Bacillus choleroides a and /3 „ 682 Zopf, W. — Bacterium vernicosum „ 682 Crookshank, E. M. — Streptococcus pyogenes . . • • „ 683 „ Non-identity of Streptococcus pyogenes and Strepto- coccus erysipelatosus „ 683 Rodet, A., & J. Courmont — Products of Staphylococcus pyogenes .. .. ,, 683 Phisalix, C. — Asporogenous Heredity of Anthrax „ 684 Frankland, P. F., & H. Marshall Ward — Vitality of Bacillus anthracis „ 684 Blackstein & G. Schubenko — YEtiology of Cholera „ 685 Trenkmann — Saline Constituents of Well-water and the Cholera bacillus ,, 685 Dixon, S. G. — Involution Form of Tubercle Bacilli „ 685 Nobbe, F., & others — Spread of Leguminosse-Bacteria in the Soil .. .. ,, 686 Slater, C. — Bacteriology of Artificial Mineral Waters „ 686 Jorgensen’s Micro-organisms and Brewing „ 687 Bibliography „ 687 Maddox, R. L. — Progressive Phases of Spirillum volutans Part 6 715, 808 Burci, E., & Y. Frascani — Bactericidal Action of a Continuous Electric Current ; Part Amann, J. — Pleocliroism of Stained Bacteria „ Stagnitta-Balistrera — Formation of Sulphuretted Hydrogen by Bac- teria „ Schmidt, A. — Influence of Fatty Cultivation Media on Bacteria „ Dahmen, Max — Fertilization-processes in Vibrios „ Roth — Behaviour of Mobile Micro-organisms in Running Fluids .. .. ,, Sanarelli — Defence of the Organism against Microbes after Vaccination „ Heim, L. — Resistant Germs in Gelatin „ Schenk, S. L. — Thermotaxis of Micro-organisms and its Relation to Chill »» .. .. •• •• •• •• •• .. •• •• .. #. « . ,, Boyce, R., & A. E. Evans — Action of Gravity on Bacterium Zopfii .. „ Atkinson, G. F. — Organism of the Root-tubercles of Leguminosse .. .. „ Hesse, W. — JEtiology of Cholera „ Fokker — Microbe resembling the Cholera Bacillus „ Metschnikoff, E. — Relation of the Cholera Vibrio to Asiatic Cholera . . „ Gabritschewsky, G., & E. Maljutin — Detrimental Effect of Cholera-pro- ducts on other Organisms „ Everard, C. & others — Modification of Leucocytes , as the Result of Infec- tion and Immunization „ Bujwid, O. — Influenza Bacillus „ Vincent, H. — Association of Streptococcus and Bacillus typhosus .. .. „ Lafar, F. — Suspected Identity of Bacillus butyri fluorescens and Bacillus melochloros „ Charrin, A. — Bacillus pyocyaneus in Plants „ Foa, P. — Varieties of Diplococcus lanceolatus „ Fbeudenreich, E. de — Toxic Action of Cultivation Products of Avian Tu- berculosis „ 769 770 770 771 772 773 773 774 774 774 774 775 775 775 775 776 776 776 777 777 778 779 CONTENTS. XXXV PAGE Galippe, V. — Microbic Synthesis of Tartar and Salivary Calcidi .. .. Part 6 7/9 Bibliography » 779 MICROSCOPY. Cross & Cole’s Handbooh of Microscopy Part 4 524 White, T. C. — The Microscope and how to use it Part 6 809 o. Instruments, Accessories, &c. (1) Stands. Watson (W.) & Son’s No. 4 Van Heurck Microscope (B) (Fig. 2) .. „ „ Fine-Adjustment (Figs. 3 and 4) Nelson, E. M. — Note on Watson’s Edinburgh Student’s Microscope .. Nachet’s Hand-Microscope (Fig. 5) „ Movable Stage (Fig. 6) Nelson, E. M. — New Student’s Microscope (Figs. 15-21) ,, New Form of Watson’s “ Edinburgh ” Microscope . . Reichert Microscope (Fig. 39) „ Hand-Microscope (Fig. 40) Salomons, Sir D. L. — Electric Projection Microscope Reichert’s Travelling Microscope (Fig. 60) „ Preparation Microscope (Fig. 61) „ Movable Stage (Fig. 62) Brown, G. W., jun. — A Slidinq Carriage and Staqe for the Microscope (Figs. 63 and 64) The Society of Arts Microscope Dallinger, W. H. — Criticism of the Continental Form of Microscope Nias, J. B. — Development of the Continental Form of Microscope-stand . . Czapski, S., & F. Schanz — A Cornea- Microscope (Figs. 95 and 96) Leitz — New Form of Microscope on English Model Part 1 » »> Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 93 93 95 97 97 236 274 ^380 381 424 524 526 527 » Part 5 Part 6 527 529 573 596 688 810 (2j Eye-pieces and Objectives. Nelson, E. M. — Chromatic Curves of Microscope Objectives Part 1 5 Peragallo, H. — Use of the Microscope with Higli-power Objectives (Figs. 22-24) Part 2 239 Lighton, W. — The Analysing Eye-piece (Fig. 25) „ 246 Dallinger, W. H. — Criticism on Nelsons “ Chromatic Curves of Micro- scope Objectives ” „ 282 (3) Illuminating: and other Apparatus. Nachet’s Camera Lucida (Fig. 8) Part 1 „ Compressor (Fig. 9) „ Altmann, P. — New Microscope-Lamp as Safety Burner (Figs. 10-12) .. „ Nelson, E. M. — An Improved Form of Dr. Edinger’s Apparatus for Drawing Objects under Low Powers (Fig. 13) „ Ebner, Y. v. — Fromme’s Arrangement of the Polarization Apparatus for Histological Purposes (Fig. 26) Part 2 Schiefferdecker, P. — New Microscope-Shade (Fig. 27) „ Merrill, G. P. — Cheap Form of Box for Microscope Slides (Fig. 28) .. „ Payne, — —Electric Turn-table „ 99 100 100 101 249 250 251 284 XXXY1 CONTENTS. Edwards, A. M. — Bod Illuminator •• Reichert Illuminating Apparatus (Figs. 41 and 42) ,, Movable Object-Stage (Fig. 43) Salomons, Sir David — Optical Projection Kurtschinski, W. P. — Electrical Thermostat (Fig. 44) Heydenreich’s Regulator and Remarks on Thermostats (Fig. 45) Rdusselet’s New Compressorium (Fig. 46) Koch, A. — Air-pump* for Microscopical Purposes (Fig. 47) Bate, G. P. — White Ground Illumination Maddox, R. L. — Rod Illuminator Leitz — New Form of Camera Lucida Griffiths, E. H. — Three new Accessories for the Microscope (Figs. 65-68) Rogers, W. A. — Filar Micrometers Reichert’s New Heating Apparatus (Fig. 69) „ New Cover-glass Measurer (Fig. 70) Sir David Salomons’ Electric Lantern (Figs. 71 and 72) Behrens, W. — WinkeVs Movable Object-stage (Fig. 97) Rogers — Value of Artificial Sources of Light Macer’s (R.) Reversible Compressorium (Fig. 98) Ambronn, H. — Application of Polarized Light to Histological Investiga- tions Preston, W. N. — Practical Drying Oven (Fig. 107) Boettcher, F. L. J. — Slide Carriage and Object-finder (Fig. 108) .. Bernhard, W. — Desk for Microscopical Drawing (Fig. 109) Piffard, H. G. — Improved Means of Obtaining Critical Illumination for the Microscope: Piffard’ s Electric Lamp (Fig. 110) Preston, W. N. — New Mounting Table (Fig. Ill) PAGE Part 2 Part 3 » » » *> » Part 3 Part 4 » Part 5 » 286 381 383 383 384 385 386 387 419 423 424 530 531 531 532 532 689 691 691 Part 6 692 780 781 782 783 784 (4) Photomicrography. Nachet’s Camera (Fig. 7) „ large Photomicrographic Apparatus (Fig. 14) Bousfield’s Photomicrography Smith, T. F. — Podura Scale Fabre-Domergue — Photomicrography and direct positive Enlargements (Fig. 29).. .. .. Smith, T. F. — Monochromatic Yellow Light in Photomicrography .. Piffard, H. G. — Monochromatic Yellow Light in Photomicrography Izarn — Photography of Gratings and Micrometers engraved on Glass Barker, D. W. — Camera for Microphotography (Fig. 48) Deck, Lyman S. — New Heliostat (Fig. 73) Sternberg, G. M. — Photomicrographs by Gas-light (Fig. 74) Reichert’s New Photomicrograpliic Apparatus (Figs. 75-77) Zeiss, Carl — Apparatus for the Projection of Microscopic Images (Figs. 99-101) Pringle’s (A.) Vertical Photomicrographic Apparatus (Fig. 102) . . Kent, A. F. Stanley — Practical Photomicrography Atkinson, G. F. — Photography as an Instrument for recording the Macro- scopic Characters of Micro-organisms in Artificial Cultures .. Piffard, H. G. — A suggested Improvement in the Correction of Lenses for Photomicrography (Figs. 112 and 113) Part 1 >» 5) 98 103 103 105 Part 2 252 276, 285 „ 279 Part 3 387 >5 Part 4 » 388 534 535 536 Part 5 692 695 695 Part 6 785 » 786 CONTENTS. XXXY11 (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. Aubert, A. B., & H. L. Smith — Index of Refraction Gotz, J. R. — Optical Glass Ebner, V. v. — Plane of Polarization and Direction of Vibration of the Light in Doubly Refracting Crystals (Fig. 30) Lovibond, J. W. — Measurement of Direct Light Ashe, A. — Determination of “ Optical Tube-length ” Czapski, S. — Theory of Optical Instruments Delage, Yves — On the Subjective Magnitude of the Monocular and Binocular Images in the Hand-lens (Figs. 78 and 79) Ewell, M. D. — Numerical Aperture (Figs. 80 and 81) Ambronn, H. — New Method for the Determination of the Refractive Indices of Anisotropic Microscopic Objects Part 5 697 Klein, C. — On Work with a Polarization Microscope' and a Simple Method for the Determination of the Sign of the Double-refraction Part 2 254 » 255 r the 256 . . 5* 275 Part 3 389 Part 4 538 and >> 539 542 Sohncke, L. — Unusual Microscopic Images .. Beck, C. — Standard Tube-length for Microscopes 698 Part 6 791 „ 814 (6) Miscellaneous. The late Sir Richard Owen , K.C.B., F.R.S. .. .. Part 1 106 Bacteriological Department of King’s College „ 107 Fifteenth Annual Meeting of American Microscopical Society Part 2 258 Scottish Microscopical Society ,, 258 Tolman, H. L. — Microscopy at the World’s Fair Part 3 391 Cole, A. H. — Solution of the Dust Problem in Microscopy (Fig. 82) . . . . Part 4 546 Visit to Bausch & Lamb’s Factory „ 548 Progress in Microscopy Part 5 698 Tolman, H. L. — Microscopy at the Columbian Exhibition ,, 699 The late G. Brook , F.R.M.S. „ 701 Weir, W. W. — The Microscope in Public Schools „ 701 Ingpen, J. E. — The late Mr. Charles Baker , F.R.M.S. Part 6 792, 808 The late Mr. Joseph Zentmayer Part 6 793 /?. Technique. Behrens’ Introduction to Botanical Microscopy . . Bibliography Cl) Collecting- Objects, including- Culture Processes. Petri & Massen — Preparing Nutrient Bouillon for Bacteriological Pur- poses Part 1 110 Dahmen, M. — Degree of Alkalinity of Media for Cultivating Cholera Bacilli „ 110 Troppau, P. — Method for Sowing Bacteria on Gelatin Plates and other Surface Media „ 111 Miquel, P. — Culture of Diatoms „ 111 Macchiati, L. — Cultivation of Diatoms „ 111 Dahmen, M. — Preparing Litmus Tincture for Testing Reaction of Gelatin „ 112 Marchal, E. — Sterilizing Incoagulable Albumen „ 112 Rouart, Geneste, & Herscher — Sterilization of Water by Pressure .. „ 112 Altmann, P. — Thermo-Regulator for Petroleum Heating „ 113 Russell, H. L. — Apparatus for Obtaining Samples of Deep Sea Water and from the Sea Bottom „ 113 Part 1 109 Part 6 796 XXXV111 CONTENTS. Jolles, M. — Pur it as Water Filter Part Smith, T., & Y. A. Moore — Testing the Pasteur- Chamberland Filter .. „ Weyland, J. — Method for Differentiating betiveen Bacilli of Typhoid Fever and Water Bacteria closely resembling them „ Bujwid, O. — New Biological Test for Cholera Bacteria „ Pfeiffer — Bacteriological Diagnosis of Cholera „ Bibliography „ Davalos, J. N. — Coco-nut- Water as a Cultivation Medium Part Frankel, Eug. — Alkalinity and Liquefaction of Gelatin „ Acosta, E., & F. Grande Rossi — Chamberland Filter „ Bibliography „ Ward, H. M. — Apparatus for Cultures in Vacuo (Fig. 49) Part „ „ Glass Culture-chamber for Hanging Drops (Figs. 50 and 51) ,, Heydenreich, L. — Apparatus for setting Gelatin „ Roth, O. — Simple Method for Anaerobic Cultivations (Figs. 52-51).. .. „ Landois, L. — Self -regulating Constant Incubator (Fig. 55) „ Koch, A. — Stoppings and Aerating Arrangements for Pure Cultivations (Figs. 56-58) „ Heydenreich, L. — Plate-making „ Siegel — Method, for Finding the Exciting Cause of Vaccinia .. ... .. „ Marchal, E. — Incoagulable Albumen as Cultivation Medium „ Acosta, E., & F. Grande — New Method for Preparing Gelatin .. .. „ Morpurgo & Tirelli — Method for Cultivating Tubercle Bacilli .. .. ,, Sakharoff, N. — Simplification of Method for Diagnosing Diphtheria . . „ Lagerheim, von — Simple Apparatus for* Collecting and Preserving Pus, Blood, &c., for Microscopical or Bacteriological Work „ Johnson, Wyatt — New Method for the Culture of Diphtheria-Bacilli in Hard-boiled Eggs „ Miquel, P. — Culture of Diatoms Part Elion, H. — Cultivating Ascospores on Clay Cubes „ Sander — Growing Tubercle Bacilli on Vegetable Nutrient Media . . . . „ Pannwitz — Impervious Self-acting Self-regulating Stopper for Sterilizing Purposes „ Esmarch, von — Improvising Bacteriological Apparatus Schill — Rapid Demonstration of Cholera Bacilli in Water and Fseces . . Koch, R. — Present Position of the Bacteriological Diagnosis of Cholera . . „ „ Bacteriological Examination of Water for Cholera Bacilli Ducrey, A. — Cultivation of Leprosy Bacillus Gebhard, C. — Cultivating Gonococcus Freudenreich, E. de — Permeability of the Chamberland Filter to Bacteria Drossbach, P., & K. Holten — Plate Method for cultivating Micro- 1 2 3 4 organisms in Fluid Media „ Chamberland, Ch., & E. Fernbach — Action of Disinfectants on dry and wet germs „ Kamen, L. — Method of using Thor Stented? s Centrifuge for detecting Tubercle Bacilli ,, Giltay, E., & J. H. Aberson — Method for Testing Filtering Apparatus (Fig. 83) Dall, W. H. — Collecting Mollusca Part 5 Riley, C. Y. — Collecting and Preserving Insects „ Klein, E. — Examining for Influenza Bacilli „ Miller, W. D. — Method of Examining Saliva for Pathogenic Organisms „ PAGE 1L3 114 114 115 115 115 258 259 259 259 392 394 395 396 397 399 401 402 402 402 403 403 403 404 550 550 550 551 551 551 552 553 553 553 554 554 555 556 556 702 702 702 703 CONTENTS. XXXIX Roux, E., & L. Vaillard — Preparing the Antitoxic Serum of Tetanus .. Wortmann, J. — Concentrated Must as a Nutrient Material for Fungi Miquel, P. — Sterilizing Power of Porcelain Filters Beyerinck, W. — Cultivating Lower Algae in Nutrient Gelatin Bibliography Uschinsky — N on-albuminous Nutritive Solution for Pathogenic Bacteria .. Lindner, P. — Growing Yeasts on Solid Media Steinschneider — Cultivation of Gonococcus Young, G. Buchanan — New Apparatus for Counting Bacterial Colonies in Roll-Cultures Schiller — Diagnosis of Cholera Bacilli by Means of Agar Plates Hauser, G. — Use of Formalin for Preserving Cultivations of Bacteria .. Bibliography Part 5 99 99 >9 Part 6 99 99 703 704 704 704 704 796 797 797 797 798 798 799 (2) Preparing- Objects. Dekhuysen, M. O. — Examination of Bloodmof Amphibia Bendy, A. — Examination of Land Nemertines Stiles, C. W. — Killing Nematodes for the Microtome MacBride, E. W. — Methods of Studying Development of Amphiura squamata Field, G. W. — Preparation of Larvae of Aster ias vulgaris Maas, O. — Preserving Cunina Moeller, H. — Preparing and Staining Yeast Ilkewitsch — Method for Discovering Tubercle Bacilli in Milk with the Centrifuge Moore, S. Le M. — Demonstrating Continuity of Protoplasm Altmann — Demonstration of Intergranular Network Spcler, A. — Blood Csokor, J. & A. — Bone-cutting Machine Willey, A. — Preserving Larvae of Ascidians Viallanes, H. — Examination of Eyes of Arthropods Jammes — Examination of Sub-cuticular Layer of Ascarids Morgan, T. H. — Method of obtaining Embryos of Balanoglossus Chichkoff, G. D. — Investigation of Freshwater Dendroccela Rousselet, C. — Killing and Preserving Rotatoria Ruffer, M. Armand, & J. H. Walker — Demonstration of Parasitic Protozoa in Cancerous Tumours ThSrner, W. — Use of Centrifugal Machines in Analytical and Micro- scopical Work Herz — Aid to Microscopical Examination of Faeces Leze, R. — Separation of Micro-organisms by Centrifugal Force Goodall, E. — New Method of Preparing Spinal Cord Lepkowski — New Method of Preparing Dentine Seeliger, O. — Preserving Larvae of Crinoids Barnes, A. S. — Demonstration of Living Trichinae Jensen, P. — Observing and Dissecting Infusoria in Gelatin Solution Martin, G. W. — Demonstrating Structure of the Embryo-sac Faber, Knud — Giant Cells and Phagocytosis .. Longhi, P. — Eserin in Protistological Technique Heinricher, E. — Preserving Achlorophyllous Phanerogamous Parasites and Saprophytes Bieliajew, W. — Preparation of Vegetable Objects Klercker, J. af — Isolation of Living Protoplasts Part 1 116 „ 116 „ 116 „ 117 „ 'H8 „ 118 „ 118 Part 2 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 119 259 260 260 260 260 260 261 261 262 262 262 „ 263 „ 263 „ 264 Part 3 405 „ 405 „ 406 „ 406 „ 406 „ 407 „ 407 Part 4 558 558 558 558 xl CONTENTS. Chapeaux, M. — Histological Observations on Hydromedusae Schottlaender, J. — Graafian Follicle Gage, S. H. — Methods of Decalcification .. .. Janssens, F. — Mode of Studying Gills of Lamellibranchs Hickson, S. J. — Preparation of Early Stages of Distichopora violacea . . Buffer, M. A., & H. J. Plimmer — Examination of Protozoa in Cancerous Tumours Taylor, T. — Freezing Attachment to Microscopes (Fig. 103) Mann, G. — Fixing Fluid for Animal Tissue Stefanelli, P. — Preservation of Colours in Dragon-Flies Theel — Embryology of Ecliinocyamus Moore, J. E. S. — Preparation of Sections of Protozoa (3) Cutting-, including Imbedding and Microtomes. Schiefferdecker, P. — Jung’s Microtomes (Fig. 31) „ „ Minot’s Microtome (Figs. 32 and 33) Dawson, C. F. — A Bacteriological Potato Section Cutter (Figs. 34-36) . . Hinz — A Microtome for 50 Cents Schultze, O. — Microtome for Cutting Large Sections Garcia, S. A. — Glass Vessel for Serial Sections (Fig. 59) Reichert’s Microtomes with Oblique Planes (Figs. 84 and 85) Moll, J. W. — Beinhold-Giltay Microtome (Figs. 104-106) Mummery, J. H. — Method of Fixing and Imbedding Tissues for the Pock- ing Microtome Liebreich — Imbedding Fresh Tissues in Metal Borgert, A. & H. — New Arrangement for Raising the Object in Jung Microtome (Fig. 114) (4) Staining and Injecting. Ketel, B. A. van — Method for Staining Tubercle Bacilli Mayer, P. — Staining Solutions made with Carmine , Cochineal , and Haematin Heim, L. — Demonstrating Cholera Vibrio Schwarz, R. — Staining Flagella of the Tetanus Bacillus Luksch, L. — Staining Flagella of Bacteria Gabritschewsky — Examining Sputum in Sections Letulle — Rapid Staining of Tubercle Bacilli preserved in Muller’s Fluid Bibliography Brown, A. P. — Staining Bacteria to demonstrate the Flagella Nicolle — Staining of Micro-organisms which will not colour by Gram’s Method Kaiser — Rapid Staining of Nervous Tissue by Weigert-Pal and Iron Chloride Methods Kolossow’s Osmic Acid Method Schwarz, F. — Staining Fungus of Pinus sijlvestris Richards, H. M. — Staining Parasitic Fungi Davalos, J. N. — Method for rapid Staining Microbes Vas, F. — Chromatin of Sympathetic Ganglia Gulland, C. L. — Obregia’s Method for Class Purposes Middlemass, J. — Improved Form of Injection Apparatus Rhumbler, L. — Double- Staining for Distinguishing Living and Dead Substances after their Preservation Part 4 559 99 559 99 559 Part 5 705 705 9% 705 99 706 Part 6 799 >> 799 » 800 99 800 Part 2 264 265 99 267 Part 3 408 5» 408 408 Part 4 560 Part 5 760 Part 6 800 >> 801 99 801 Part 1 119 99 120 99 120 99 121 99 121 99 121 122 99 122 Part 2 268 Part 3 409 99 409 99 410 99 410 99 410 99 411 99 411 99 411 99 411 Part 4 562 CONTENTS. X Klercker, J. af — Staining of Protoplasts and Cell-wall Ssudakewitsch, J. — Metachromatism of Parasitic Sporozoa and Carcinoma Cells Torok, L. — Protozooid Appearances in Carcinoma and Paget's Disease .. Ohlmacher, A. P. — Safranin Nuclear Reaction and its Relation to Carcinoma Coccidia Thanhoffer, L. y. — Nerve-endings in Muscle Bristol, C. L. — Restoration of Osmic Acid Solutions Gage, S. H. — Trustworthy Solution of Hsematoxylin Mangin, L. — Ruthenium-red as a Staining Reagent Nicolle, M., & J. Cantazucene — Staining Properties of Oxychloride of Ammoniacal Ruthenium Kultschitzky, N. — A new Staining Method for Neuroglia Solles — Negative Staining Method for Finding Tubercle Bacilli Spohn, G. — Nature of the Staining Process Roulet, 0. — New Process of Double-staining Vegetable Membranes .. Waldner, M. — Staining living Sex-cells Laveran, A. — Demonstrating Malaria Parasites Everard, 0., & others — Preparing and Staining Blood-films for Exami- nation of Leucocytes Ramon y Cajal, S. — Mode of Investigating Retina of Vertebrates .. Hill, A. — Examination of Brain of Ornithorhyncus Kaiser — Staining Nerve-Tissue Beneke — Staining Connective Tissue Solger, B.— Fat as affected by Osmic Acid Roulet, Ch. — Double Staining of Vegetable Membranes Strauss — Method of Staining the Cilia of Living Bacteria Pacinotti, G. — Staining Tubercle Bacilli in Tissues Rahmer, A. — Demonstrating Polar Bodies in Cholera Boxilli Bay, J. C. — New Infection Needle PAGB Part 4 562 » 563 563 v » » » 564 564 564 564 565 »> >» Part » 565 565 566 5 711 711 711 711 >* Part 6 » » » » >S '712 712 802 802 802 803 803 803 803 804 804 \ (5) Mounting-, including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. Krasser, F. — Preserving Fluid and Fixing Material Part 1 122 McClung, C. E. — Glycerin Mounting „ 122 Gage, S. H. — An Aqueous Solution of Hsematoxylin which does not readily deteriorate „ 124 Dawson, C. F. — Method for Hermetically closing permanent Cultivations of Bacteria Part 2 270 Edwards, A. M. — Medium for Mounting Microscopical Objects which will not mould „ 270 Weber, R. — Influence of the Composition of the Glass of the Slide and Cover-glass on the Durability of Microscopic Objects „ 270 Halford, F. M.— G. S. Marry at' s Form of Mounting and Dissecting Stand (Figs. 37 and 38) „ 270 Geoffroy, A. — Chloral for Mounting Microscopical Preparations .. .. Part 3 412 Walker, N. — Keeping Paraffin Sections Flat „ 412 Weber, R. — Influence of the Composition of the Glass of the Slide and Cover-glass on the Preservation of Microscopic Objects „ 412 Mansbridge, J. — Method of Mounting Calcified Microscopic Specimens .. „ 414 Julien, A. A. — Mounting Medium for Algse and Fungi Part 4 566 ,, „ Spiral Springs for Manipulating Cover -glass Preparations „ 566 Schenck, H. — Mounting large Sections of Vegetable Preparations .. .. „ 567 xlii CONTENTS. Julien, A. A. — Balsam-paraffin for Cells Moore, Veranus A. — Apparatus for Holding Cover-glasses (Figs. 86-88) Edwards, A. M. — Gum Thus Weaver, A. P. — Pneumatic Bubble-remover Mann, G. — New Fixing Fluid for Animal Tissues Reinke, F. — Lysol in Histological Technique (6) Miscellaneous. Moore, S. Le M. — Millon’s Reagent Harding, L. A. — Forensic Microscopy Rogers, W. A. — The Microscope in the Workshop Bell, Clarke, & others — Blood and Blood-stains in Medical Jurispru- dence Bohm & Oppel’s Pocket-book of Microscopical Technique Christmas, J. de — Mixtures of Antiseptics Mangin, L. — Determination of Pectic Substances in Plants Youdale, W. H. — Diseased Beard-hairs Noll, F. — Demonstration of Heliotropism „ „ Demonstrating the Pigment of the Floridese Molisch, H. — Detection of “ Masked Iron ” in Plants Talmage, J. E. — Selenite from Utah Noll, F. — Apparatus for Observing Movements in Plants Jentys, St. — Determination of Diastase in Leaves and Stems Zacharias, E. — Chemical Nature and Chromatophily of Protoplasm Proceedings and Conversazione op the Society — November 30, 1892 (Conversazione) December 21, 1892 January 18, 1893 (Annual Meeting) Report of Council for 1892 Treasurer’s Account for 1892 February 15, 1893 March 15, 1893 April 19, 1893 May 17, 1893 June 21, 1893 October 18, 1893 November 15, 1893 Index of New Terms in Zoology and Botany Index PAGE Part 4 567 567 Part 5 713 >» 713 714 Part 6 804 Part 2 272 J? 272 Part 3 415 415 V 416 416 417 423 Part 4 569 » 569 570 )> 571 Part 5 714 „ 714 Part 6 805 Part 1 126 128 »» 130 » 132 „ 134 Part 2 274 >> 283 Part 3 418 „ 422 Tart 4 571 Part 6 806 V 809 „ 815 >» 817 The Journal is issued on the third Wednesday in February, April, June, August, October, and December. r jTo Non -Fellows, 1893. Part 1. (ofj1/' FEBRUARY. { Price 6s. Journal OF THE Royal Microscopical Society; CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, and a summary of current researches relating to ZOOLOGY BOTANY (principally Xnvertebrata and Crypto^amia) , MICROSCOPY, <3cc- Edited by " l- w F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A., One of the Secretaries of the Society and Professor of Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in King's College; \VITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND A W BENNETT, M.A., B.Se., F.L.S., I J. ARTHUR THOMSON M.A., Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, ■R, G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Cantab.), and | Edinburgh, FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY. ' A LONDON : TO BE OBTAINED AT THE SOCIEIY’S ROOMS, 20 HANOVER SQUARE, W.; of Messrs. WILLIAMS & NORGATE ; and of Messrs. DULAU & CO. /d\ ffl PRINTED BY VIM. CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED] [STAM FOND STREET AND CHARING CROSS. CONTENTS. Transactions of the Society — PAGK I. — On an Endophytic Parasite of Diatoms. By Charles Haughton Gill, F.R.M.S., F.O.S. (Plate I.) .. 1 II. — The Chromatic Curves of Microscope Objectives. By E. M. Nelson, F.R.M.S. (Fig. 1) 5 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. ZOOLOGY. A. VERTEBRATA : — Embryology, Histology, and General. a. Embryology. Kolliker, A. — Development of Elements of Nervous System 18 Assheton, R. — Development of Optic Nerves of Vertebrates 19 Vialleton, L. — Origin of Vascular Germs in the Cliich 20 G oronowitsch, N. — Axial and Lateral Metamerism of the Head in Embryos of Birds 20 Born, G. — Maturation of Amphibian Ova and Fertilization of Immature Ova of Triton 21 Fick, R. — Fertilization of Axolotl Ovum 21 Roudnev, Y. — Development of Endothelium of Heart of Amphibia 21 Wilson, E. B. — Multiple and Partial Development in Amphioxus 21 Rose, C. — Phytogeny of Mammalian Teeth 22 Osborn, H. F. — History and Homologies of Human Molar Cusps 22 Rose, C. — Rudiments of Teeth in Manis .. .. 23 „ „ Dentition of Marsupials .. .. 23 „ „ Dental Ridge and “ Egg-teeth” in Sauropsida 23 M'Intosh, W. C. — Li f e-history and Development of Food and other Fishes .. .. 24 Calderwood, W. L. — Ovary and Intra-Ovarian Egg of Teleosteans 24 Holt, E. W. L. — Eggs and Early Stages of Rhombus maximus 24 jS. Histology. Flemming, W.— Invisibility of Living Nuclear Structures 2 Vas, F. — Chromatin of Sympathetic Ganglia 2 Dekhuysen, M. C. — Blood of Amphibia 2. G ehuchten, A. Van — Cerebro-Spinal Ganglia 2r Notthafft, A. — Degeneration and Regeneration of Injured Peripheral Nerves .. 2t Geiiuchten, A. Van — Free Intra-epidermic Nerve-endings 2( Golgi’s Method and the Distribution of Nerve-fibres 27 y. General. Holt, E. W. L. — Survey of Fishing Grounds , West Coast of Ireland 27 Bles, E. J. — Plankton of Plymouth .. .. .. .. 27 GaRoTang, W. — Marine Invertebrate Fauna of Plymouth 28 Cosmovici, L. C. — Excretory System of Animals 29 Driesch, Hs. — Studies in Developmental Mechanics < 29 B. INVERTEBRATA. Mollusca. y. Gastropoda. Villepoix, R. Moynier de— Repair of Shell of Helix aspersa 30 Woodward, B. B. — Growth and Structure of Shell in Velates conoideus and other Neritidx 30 Scharff, R. F. — Slugs of Ireland 30 Plate, L. H. — Structure and Relationships of the Solenoconcha 31 Molluscoida. a. Tunicata. Oka, A. — Budding of Botryllus 31 3 B. Bryozoa. Fowler, G. Herbert — Structure of Rhabdopleura Arthropoda. Bernard, II. M. — Origin of Trachea u of Arthropoda from Setiparous Sacs a. Insecta. Raspail, Y. — Development of Mehlontha vulgaris Bugnion, E. — Structure and Life-history of Encyrtus fusicollis Wash ANN, E. — International Relations of Lomechusa Verhoeff, C. — Facts concerning Sex and Reproduction in Hymenoptera . „ „ Use of Spines in Nymphs of Hymenoptera Linden, Maria von — Life-history of Phryganidse Muggenburg, F. H. — Proboscis of Diptera. pupipara 5. Araclmida. Mar x— Distribution of Spiders Thorell, T. — Malayan and Papuan Spiders Koenike, F. — Two new Hydrachnids from the Rhaetikon „ „ Hydrachnidae Piersig, R.— Freshwater Mites Schimkewitsch, W, — South American Pantopoda e. Crustacea. Alcock, A. — Habits of Gelasimus annulipes Bergh, R. S. — Germinal Area and Dorsal Organ of Gammarus pulex Frenzel, J. — Mid-gut of Artemia Groom, T. T. — Early Development of Cirripedia Vermes, o. Annelida. Cobi, C. J. — Anomalies of Segmentation in Annelids Horst, R. — Earthworms from the Malay Archipelago Friend, H. — British Tree- and Earth-worms Benham, W. B. — New English Genus of Aquatic Oligochseta .. .. Maier, B. L. — Eyes of Hirudinea Griffiths, A. B. — Blood-pigment of Gephyrea . . j3. Nemathelminthes. Rohde, E. — Muscle and Nerve of Nematodes „ „ Muscle and Nerve in Mermis and Amphioxus „ „ Holomyaria Charles, R. Havelock — Male of Filaria medinensis Magalhaes, P. S. de — Filaria Bancrofti and F. immitis Railliet, A., & A. Lucet — Heteralds Giles, G. M. J. — Nematodes of Indian Horses and Sheep y. Platyhelminthes. Dendy, A. — Geonemertes australiensis Benham, W. B. — Freshwater Nemertine in England Hallkz, P. — Classification of Triclada Dendy, A. — Land Planarians from Tasmania and South Australia .. „ „ Land Planarians from Queensland „ „ Victorian Land Planarians Brandes, G. — Revision of Monostomida Sekera, E. — Notes on Water- Vascular System of Mesostomidw .. Zschokke, F. — Rare Parasites of Man Linstow, ( ). v. — Taeniae of Birds Railliet, A. — Notes on Parasites Richard, J. — Cysticercoid in Freshwater Calanid Crety, C. — Structure of Solenophorus PACE 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 40 41 42 43 43 43 43 44 44 45 45 45 46 46 46 46 47 47 47 47 4 8. Incertse Sedis. page Anderson, H. H., & J. Shephard — Victorian Rotifers 48 Wierzejsky, A. — Asplanchna 48 Echinoderma. Loven, S. — Echinologica . 48 Bell, F. Jeffrey — Catalogue of British Echinoderms . . . 49 „ „ Echinoderms from West Coast of Ireland 50 Greenough, H. S. — Larvae of Echinoids 50 Field, G. W. — Larvae of Aster ias vulgaris 50 MacBride, E. W. — Development of Amphiura squamata 52 Perrier, E. — Morphology of Skeleton of Starfishes 53 Marenzeller, E. von — Holothurians collected by the ‘ Hirondelle * 53 Ccelentera. Haddon, A. C. — Larva of Euphyllia 53 Jourdan, E. — New Species of Epizoanthus from the Azores 54 Nagel, W. — Sense of Taste in Sea Anemones 54 Sluiter, C. Ph. — Historical Note as to Theories of Coral Reefs 54 Maas, O. — Structure and Development of Cunina Buds 54 Porifera Bidder, G. — Flask-shaped Ectoderm and Spongdblasts of one of the Keratosa . . . . 55 Protozoa. Chapman, F. — Foraminifera from Chalk of Taplow 56 Railliet, A., & A. Llcet — Notes on Csecidia 56 Bertram— Sarcosporidia and Parasitic Sacs in Body-cavity of Rotifers 56 BOTANY. A. GENERAL, including* the Anatomy and Physiology of the Phanerogamia. a. Anatomy. (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. Buscalioni, L. — Structure of the Cell-wall 57 Kras8ER, F. — Structure of the Resting Nucleus 58 Crato, E. — Physode, an Organ of the Cell 58 Loew, O. — Active Albumen in Plants 59 (2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions). Schunck, E. — Chemistry of Chlorophyll 59 Likiernik, A. — Vegetable Lecithin 59 Kraus, G. — Calcium oxalate in the Bark of Trees 59 (3) Structure of Tissues. Kruger, F. — Thickening of the Wall of Cambium-cells 60 Godfrin, J — Resin-canals of the Leaves of Abies pectinata 60 Rowlee, W. W. — Root-system of Mikania scandens 60 (.4) Structure of Organs. Reiche, C. — Resemblances in Habit between Plants belonging to different Genera .. 61 Biourge, P. — Structure of Pollen 61 Ewart, M. F. — Staminal Hairs of Thesium 61 Mattirolo, O., & L. Buscalioni — Structure of the Integument of the Seed of Pa- pilionaceae 62 Lubbock, Sir John — Seedlings 62 Morris, D. — Branching Palms 62 Frank, B., & others — Dimorphism of the Root-tubercles of the Pea 63 Heinricher, E. — Structure of Lathraea 63 5 / 3 . Physiology. (1) Reproduction and Embryology. fage Mann, G. — Embryo-sac of Myosurus . . . . 64 Schulz, A. — Sexual Organs of Flowers 65 Millardet, A., & S. A. Beach — Hybridization of the Vine 65 Rimpau, W.— Crossing of Cultivated Plants 66 Cobelli, R. — Pollination of the Primrose 66 (2) Nutrition and Growth (including Germination, and Movements of Fluids). Bonnier, G. — Effect of the Electric Light on Vegetation 66 Wiesner, J. — Influence of Position on the Form of Organs 66 Berthoud, E. L. — Dissemination of Plants by Buffaloes . . . . 67 Walker, E. — Dissemination of the Seeds of Oxalis stricta 67 Tschirch, A. — Physiology and Biology of Seeds 67 Arcangelt, G. — Parasitism of Cynomorium 67 Jost, L. — Growth in Thickness of Trees 67 Jentys, S. — Influence of an Excessive Proportion of Carbonic Acid on the Growth of Roots 68 Bokorny, T. — Assimilation of Carbon dioxide 68 Kossowitsch, P., & others — Mode of Absorption of Free Nitrogen by the Leguminosse 68 Frank, B. — Exchange of Gases in the Root-tubercles of Leguminosse 68 (3) Irritability. Claudel, L., & W. Pfeffer — Causes of Sensitive Movements 69 Hansgirg, A. — Nyctitropic, Gamotropic, and Carpotropic Movements .. .. >. (.9 Kothert, W. — Propagation of Heliotropic Irritability 70 Darwin, F., & Miss D. F. M. Pertz — Artificial Production of Rhythm in Plants.. 70 (4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). Sigmund, W. — Oil-splitting and Glycoside-splitting Ferments 71 y. General. Piccioli, L.— Relationship between Plants and Snails 71 B. CRYPTOGAMIA. Cryptogamia Vascularia. Farmer, J. B. — Embryology of Angiopteris 71 Algae. Bennett, A. W. — Vegetable Growths as Evidence of the Purity or Impurity of Water 72 Klebs, G. — Production of Zoospores 72 Rosenvinge, L. Kolderup — Growth of Cladophora and Chsetomorpha 72 Lagerheim, G. v. — Propagation of Prasiola 73 Klebs, G. — Reproduction of Vaucheria 73 Fungi. Lagerheim, G. v. — Mastigochytrium , a new genus of Chytridiacese 73 Voglino, P. — Mycele of Peronospora 74 Costantin, J., & E. Prillieux — Fungus-parasites on Mushrooms 74 Dangeard, P. A. — Fungus-parasites of Apples and Pears 74 Lindner, P — Discriminating and Photographing Yeasts 75 Kosutany, T. — Influence of different Wine Yeasts on the Character of the Wine .. 75 Boutroux — Fermentation of Bread 76 Soncini, G. — Influence of Yeast on the Smell of Wine .. 76 Hansen, E. C. — Influence of Tartaric Add on Brewer's Yeast 76 Roux, G., & G. Linossier —Morphology and Biology of the Thrush Fungus ( Oidium albicans ) 76 Wolff, M., & J. Israel — Pure Cultivations of Actinomycosis and its Transmissi- bility to Animals 77 Dietel, P. — Alternation of Generations in the Uredinese 78 6 PAGR Magnus, P. — Uredinex parasitic on Berberis 78 Prillieux, E., & others — Fungus-parasites of cultivated plants 78 Henschbl, G. — Mycorhiza of the Fir 79 Patovillakd, N., G. v. Lagerheim, & G. Massee— New Genera of Fungi .. .. 79 Hariot, P. — New Luminous Fungus 79 Mycetozoa. Viala, P., & C. Sauvageau — Plasmodiophora Vitis and californica 80 Protophyta. a. Schizophyceee. Castracane, F. — Biology of Diatoms 80 Edwards, A. M.— Species of Diatoms 80 Schmidt’s Atlas der Diatomeenkunde 80 /3. Schizomycetes. Buchner, H. — Influence of Light on Bacteria 80 Kirchner— Effect of Chloroform on Bacteria 81 Viron, L. — Soluble Pigments produced by Bacteria 81 Eijkmann, C. — New Phosphorescent Bacterium 82 Pasquale, B. — “ Mai Nero ” of the Vine 82 Schenk, S. L. — Micrococcus tetragenus concentricus 82 Sternberg, G. M. — Micrococcus pneumonix crouposx 82 Menge, K. — Micrococcus agilis citreus 82 Tubeuf, C. von — Disease of the Nun ( Liparis monacha ) 83 Ferran, J. — New Chemical Function of the Cholera Bacillus . . 83 Pick, A. — Influence of Wine on Development of Typhoid and Cholera Bacilli .. 84: Kerry, R., & S. Fraenkel — Action of Bacillus of Malignant (Edema on Carbo- hydrates and Lactic Acid 84 Peudrix, L. — Bacterium which ferments Starch and produces Amyl Alcohol .■ .. 84 Schreider, M. v. — Mixed Cultivations of Streptococci and Diphtheria Bacilli .. 84 D’Espine & Marignac — Streptococcus obtained from the Blood of a Scarlet Fever Patient 85 Lesage & Macaigne — Bacterium coli commune 85 Tavel, E. — Differential Characters of Bacterium coli commune and Bacillus typhosus 85 Rodet & Roux, & others — Relations of and Differences between Bacillus coli com- munis and Bacillus typhosus 86 Fischel, F. — Pathogenic Bacterium in Frogs' Livers 86 Behring — Streptococcus longus 87 Metschnikoff, E., & A. Looss — Phagocytes and Muscular Phagocytosis .. .. 87 Kanthack, A. A. — Spleen and Immunization 88 Dahmen, Max — Bacteriological Examination of Water 86 Karlinski, J. — Distribution of Water -bacteria in large Water Basins 89 Witte — Pyosalpinx and Bacteria 89 Szekely, A. von, & A. Szana — Changes in the Microbicidal Power of the Blood during and after the Infection of the Organism 89 Fraenkel & Pfeiffer’s Photomicrographic Atlas of Bacteria 90 Bibliography 91 MICKOSCOPY. a. Instruments, Accessories, &c. (1) Stands. Watson (W.) & Son’s No. 4 Van Eeurch Microscope (B) (Fig. 2) .. 93 „ „ Fine- Adjustment (Figs. 3 and 4) 93 Nelson, E. M. — Note on Watson's Edinburgh Student's Microscope .. .. .. .. 95 Nachet’s Hand- Microscope (Fig. 5) 97 „ Movable Stage (Fig. 6) 97 (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. Nachet’s Camera (Fig. 7) 98 ,, Camera Lvsida (Fig. 8) 99 „ Compressor (Fig. 9) 100 7 I’AO B Altmann, P. — New Microscope-Lamp as Safety Burner (Figs. 10 12) 100 Nelson, E. M. — An Improved Form of Dr. Edinger's Apparatus for Drawing Objects under Low Powers (Fig. 13) 101 (4) Photomicrography. Nachet’s large Photomicrographic Apparatus (Fig. 14) 103 Bousfield’s Photomicrography 103 Smith, T. F. — Podura Scale 105 (6) Miscellaneous. The late Sir Richard Owen , K.C.B., F.R.S 106 Bacteriological Department of King's College 107 /?. Technique. Behrens’ Introduction to Botanical Microscopy 109 Cl) Collecting- Objects, including- Culture Processes. Petri & Massen — Preparing Nutrient Bouillon for Bacteriological Purposes.. .. 110 Dahmen, M. — Degree of Alkalinity of Media for Cultivating Cholera Bacilli.. .. 110 Troppatj, P. — Method for Sowing Bacteria on Gelatin Plates and other Surface Media Ill MiQuel, P. — Culture of Diatoms Ill Macchiati, L.— Cultivation of Diatoms Ill Dahmen, M. — Preparing Litmus Tincture for Testing Reaction of Gelatin .. .. 112 Marchal, E. — Sterilizing Incoagulable Albumen . 112 Rouart, Geneste, & Herscher — sterilization of Water by Pressure 112 Altmann, P. — Thermo-Regulator for Petroleum Heating 113 Russell, Id. L. — Apparatus for Obtaining Samples of Deep Sea Water and from the Sea Bottom 113 Jolles, M. — Pur Has .Water Filter 113 Smith, T., & Y. A. Moore — Testing the Pasteur-Chamberland Filter 114 Wetland, J. — Method for Differentiating between Bacilli of Typhoid Fever and Water Bacteria closely resembling them 114 Bujwid, O. — New Biological Test for Cholera Bacteria 115 Pfeiffer — Bacteriological Diagnosis of Cholera 115 Bibliography 115 (2) Preparing- Objects. Dekhuysen, M. C. — Examination of Blood of Amphibia 116 Dendy, A. — Examination of Land Nemertines 116 Stiles, O. W. — Killing Nematodes for the Microtome 116 Mac Bride, E. W. — Methods of Studying Development of Amphiura squamata .. 117 Field, G. W. — Preparation of Larvae of Aster ias vulgaris 118 Maas, O. — Preserving Cunina 118 Moeller, H. — Preparing and Staining Yeast 118 Ilkewitsoh — Method for Discovering Tubercle Bacilli in Milk with the Centrifuge.. 119 (4) Staining- and Injecting-. Ketel, B. A. tan — Method for Staining Tubercle Bacilli 119 Mayer, P. — Staining Solutions made with Carmine , Cochineal, and Hsematin .. 120 Heim, L. — Demonstrating Cholera Vibrio 120 Schwarz, R. — Staining Flagella of the Tetanus Bacillus 121 Luksch, L. — Staining Flagella of Bacteria .. u. 121 Gabritschewsky — Examining Sputum in Sections 121 Letulle — Rapid Staining of Tubercle Bacilli preserved in Muller's Fluid .. .. 122 Bibliography 122 (5) Mounting-, including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. Krasser, F. — Preserving Fluid and Fixing Material 122 McClung, O. E. — Glycerin Mounting .. .. 122 Gage, S. H. — An Aqueous Solution of Hsematoxylin which does not readily deteriorate 124 Proceedings op the Society: — Conversazione, 30th Nov., 1892 126 Meeting, 21st Dec., 1892 128 Annual Meeting, 18th Jan., 1893 130 APERTURE TABLE, Corresponding Angle (2 u) for Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch. Illuminating Power. (02.) Pene- Numerical Aperture. (« sin u = a.) Air (n = 1-00). Water (n = 1-33). Homogeveous Immersion (7! =1*62). White Light. (A = 0*5269 g, Line E.) Monochromatic (Blue) Light. (A = 0*4861 g. Line F.) Photography. (A =0*4000 g, Near Line h.) trating, Power 0 1*52 180° G' 146,543 158,845 193,037 2*310 •658 1*51 166° 51' 145,579 157,800 191,767 2-280 •662 1-50 161° 23' 144,615 156,755 190,497 2-250 •667 1*49 157° 12' 143,651 155,710 189,227 2-220 •671 1-48 153° 39' 142,687 154,665 187,957 2-190 •676 1-47 150° 32' 141,723 153,620 186,687 2-161 •680 1-46 147° 42' 140,759 152,575 185,417 2*132 •685 1-45 145° 6' 139,795 151,530 184,147 2-103 •690 1*44 142° 39' 138,830 150,485 182,877 2-074 •694 1-43 140° 22' 137,866 149,440 181,607 2-045 •694 1-42 138° 12' 136,902 148,395 180,337 2-016 •709 1*41 136° 8' 135,938 147,350 179,067 1-988 •709 1 40 134° 10' 134,974 146,305 177,797 1-960 •714 1-39 132° 16' 134,010 145,260 176,527 1-932 •719 1-38 130° 26' 133,046 144,215 175,257 1-904 •725 1*37 128° 40' 132,082 143,170 173,987 1*877 •729 1*36 126° 58' 131,118 142,125 172,717 1*850 •735 1*35 125° 18' 130,154 141,080 171,447 1*823 •741 1-34 123° 40' 129,189 140,035 170,177 1*796 •746 1-33 180° 0' 122° 6' 128,225 138,989 168,907 1*769 •752 1-32 165° 56' 120° 33' 127,261 137,944 167,637 1-742 •758 1-30 155° 38' 117° 35' 125,333 135,854 165,097 1-690 •769 1-28 148° 42' 114° 44' 123,405 133,764 162,557 1-638 •781 1-26 142° 39' 111° 59' 121,477 131,674 160,017 1-588 •794 1-24 137° 36' 109° 20' 119,548 129,584 157,477 1-538 •806 1-22 133° 4' 106° 45' 117,620 127,494 154,937 1-488 •820 1-20 128° 55' 104° 15' 115,692 125,404 152,397 1-440 •833 118 125° 3' 101° 50' 113,764 123,314 149,857 1-392 •847 116 121° 26' 99° 29' 111,835 121,224 147,317 1*346 •862 114 118° 0' 97° 11' 109,907 119,134 144,777 1*300 •877 1 12 114° 44' 94° 55' 107,979 117,044 142,237 1*254 •893 110 111° 36' 92° 43' 106,051 114,954 139,698 1*210 •909 108 108° 36' 90° 34' 104,123 112,864 137,158 1166 •926 106 105° 42' 88° 27' 102,195 i 110,774 134,618 1*124 •943 104 102° 53' 86° 21' 100,266 108,684 132,078 1*082 •962 102 100° 10' 84° 18' 98,338 106,593 129,538 1*040 •980 100 180° O' 97° 31' 82° 17' 96,410 104,503 126,998 1*000 1*000 0*98 157° 2' 94° 56' 80° 17' 94,482 102,413 124,458 •960 1*020 0-96 147° 29' 92° 24' 78° 20' 92,554 100,323 121,918 •922 1-042 0-94 140° 6' 89° 56' 76° 24' 90,625 98,223 119,378 •884 1-064 0*92 133° 51' 87° 32' 74° 30' 88,697 96,143 116,838 •846 1-087 0-90 128° 19' 85° 10' 72° 36' 86,769 94,053 114,298 •810 1-111 0-88 123° 17' 82° 51' 70° 44' 84,841 91,963 111,758 •774 1136 0-86 118° 38' 80° 34' 68° 54' 82,913 89,873 109,218 •740 1*163 0-84 114° 17' 78° 20' 67° 6' 80,984 87,783 106,678 •706 1*190 0-82 110° 10' 76° 8' 65° 18' 79,056 85,693 104,138 •672 1*220 0-80 106° 16' 73° 58' 63° 31' 77,128 83,603 101,598 •640 1*250 0-78 102° 31' 71° 49' 61° 45' 75,200 81,513 99,058 •608 1*282 0-76 98° 56' 69° 42' 60° 0' 73,272 79,423 96,518 •578 1-316 0-74 95° 28' 67° 37' 58° 16' 71,343 77,333 93,979 •548 1*351 0-72 92° 6' 65° 32' 56° 32' 69,415 75,242 91,439 •518 1*389 0-70 88° 51' 63° 31' 54° 50' 67,487 73,152 88,899 •490 1-429 0-68 85° 41' 61° 30' 53° 9' 65,559 71,062 86,359 •462 1-471 0 66 82° 36' 59° 30' 51° 28' 63,631 68,972 83,819 •436 1-515 0-64 79° 36' 57° 31' 49° 48' 61,702 66,882 81,279 •410 1-562 0 62 76° 38' 55° 34' 48° 9' 59,774 64,792 78,739 •384 1-613 0*60 73° 44' 53° 38' 46° 30' 57,846 62,702 76,199 •360 1-667 0-58 70° 54' 51° 42' 44° 51' 55,918 60,612 73,659 •336 1-724 0-66 68° 6' 49° 48' 43° 14' 53,990 58,522 71,119 •314 1-786 0-54 65° 22' 47° 54' 41° 37' 52,061 56,432 68,579 •292 1-852 0 52 62° 40' 46° 2' 40° 0' 50,133 54,342 66,039 •270 1*923 0 50 60° 0' 44° 10' 38° 24' 48,205 52,252 63,499 •250 2-000 0-45 53° 30' 39° 33' 34° 27' 43,385 47,026 57,149 •203 2-222 0-40 47° 9' 35° 0' 30° 31' 38,564 41,801 50,799 •160 2-500 0 35 40° 58' 30° 30' 26° 38' 33,744 36,576 44,449 •123 2-857 0*30 34° 56' ! 26° 4' 22° 46' 28,923 31,351 38,099 •090 3-333 0-25 28° 58' 21° 40' 18° 56' 24,103 26,126 31,749 •063 4-000 0-20 23° 4' 17° 18' 15° 7' 19,282 20,901 25,400 •040 5-000 0 15 17° 14' I 12° 58' 11° 19' 14,462 15,676 19,050 •023 6-667 010 1 11° 29' I 8° 38' 7° 34' 9,641 10,450 12,700 •010 10*000 0 05 5° 44' 4° 18' 3° 46' 4,821 5,252 6,350 •003 20-000 Fahr. Centigr. j Fahr. i Centigr. Fahr. o o o o o 212 100 158 70 104 210*2 99 156*2 69 102*2 210 98*89 156 68*89 102 208*4 98 154*4 68 100*4 208 97*78 154 67*78 100 206*6 97 152*6 67 98*6 206 96*67 152 66*67 98 204*8 96 150*8 66 96*8 204 95*56 150 65*56 96 203 95 149 65 95 202 94*44 148 64*44 94 201*2 94 147*2 64 93*2 200 93*33 146 63*33 92 199*4 93 145*4 63 91*4 198 92*22 144 62*22 90 197*6 92 143*6 62 89*6 196 91*11 142 61*11 88 195*8 91 141*8 61 87*8 194 90 140 60 86 192*2 89 138*2 59 84*2 192 88*89 138 58*89 84 190*4 88 136*4 58 82*4 190 87*78 136 57*78 82 188*6 87 134*6 57 80*6 188 86*67 134 56*67 80 186*8 86 132*8 56 78*8 186 85*56 132 55*56 78 185 85 131 55 77 184 84*44 130 54*44 76 183*2 84 129*2 54 75*2 182 83*33 128 53*33 74 181*4 83 127*4 53 73*4 180 82*22 126 52*22 72 179*6 82 125*6 52 71*6 178 81*11 124 51*11 70 177*8 81 123*8 51 69*8 176 80 122 50 68*2 174*2 79 120*2 49 66 174 ’ 78*89 120 48*89 66*4 172*4 78 118*4 48 64 172 77*78 118 47*78 64*6 170*6 77 116*6 47 62 170 76*67 116 46*67 62*8 168*8 76 114*8 46 60 168 75*56 114 45*56 60 167 75 113 45 59 166 74*44 112 44*44 58 165*2 74 111*2 44 57*2 164 73*33 110 43*33 56 163*4 73 109*4 43 55*4 162 72*22 108 42*22 54 161*6 72 107*6 42 53*6 160 71*11 106 41*11 52 159*8 71 105*8 41 51*8 Centigr. Fahr. Centigr. Fahr. Centigr. o o o o o 40 50 10 - 4 - 20 39 48*2 9 - 5*8 - 21 38*89 48 8*89 - 6 - 21*1 38 46*4 8 - 7*6 - 22 37*78 46 7*78 - 8 - 22*2 37 44*6 7 - 9*4 - 23 36*67 44 6*67 - 10 - 23*3 36 42*8 6 - 11*2 - 24 35*56 42 5*56 - 12 - 24*4 35 41 5 - 13 - 25 34*44 40 4*44 - 14 - 25*5 34 39*2 4 - 14*8 - 26 33*33 38 3*33 - 16 - 26*6 33 37*4 3 - 16*6 - 27 32*22 36 2*22 - 18 - 27*7 32 35*6 2 - 18*4 - 28 31*11 34 1*11 - 20 - 28*8 31 33*8 1 - 20*2 - 29 30 32 0 - 22 - 30 29 30*2 - 1 - 23*8 - 31 28*89 30 - 1*11 - 24 - 31*1 28 28*4 - 2 - 25*6 - 32 27*78 28 - 2*22 - 26 - 32*5 27 26*6 - 3 . - 27*4 - 33 26*67 26 - 3*33 - 28 - 33*J 26 24*8 - 4 - 29*2 - 34 25*56 24 - 4*44 -30 - 34*- 25 23 - 5 - 31 — 35 24*44 22 1 - 5*56 - 32 — 35 24 21*2 - 6 - 32*8 - 36 23*33 20 - 6*67 - 34 - 36*1 23 19*4 - 7 - 34*6 - 37 22*22 18 - 7*78 - 36 - 37*' 22 17*6 - 8 - 36*4 - 38 21*11 16 - 8*89 - 38 - 38*: 21 15*8 - 9 - 38*2 - 39 20 14 - 10 -40 -40 19 12*2 - 11 - 41*80 - 41 18*89 12 - 11*11 - 42 - 41* 18 10*4 - 12 - 43*60 - 42 17*78 10 - 12*22 -44 - 42* 17 8*6 - 13 - 45*40 - 43 16*67 8 - 13*33 - 46 - 43* 16 6*8 - 14 - 47*20 - 44 15*56 6 - 14*44 - 48 - 44* 15 5 ! - 15 -49 - 45 14*44 4 | - 15*56 - 50 - 45* 14 3*2 - 16 - 50*80 - 46 13*33 2 | - 16*67 - 52 - 46* 13 1*4 - 17 - 52*60 - 47 12*22 0 ! - 17*78 -54 - 47* 12 - 0*4 - 18 - 54*40 - 48 11*11 - 2 S - 18*89 - 56 - 48* 11 - 2*2 - 19 - 56*20 - 58 - 49 - 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30' 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Centigrade 10 Dr. Henri van Heurcks Microscope FOR HIGH-POWER WORK AND PHOTOMICROGRAPHY, AS MADE BY W. WATSON & SONS TO THE SPECIFICATION OF Dr. VAN HEURCK OF ANTWERP. Pitted with Pine Adjustments of utmost sensitiveness and precision, not liable to derangement by wear. Has Hackwork Draw-tube to adjust Objec- tives to the thickness of Cover Glass. Can be used with either Continental or English Objectives. Pine adjustment to Substage. The Stand specially designed to give the utmost convenience for manipulation. As Figured (but without Center- ing Screws or Divisions to Stage), with 1 Eye-piece .. £18 10s. Also made with Continental form of loot .. .. £18 Without Rack work to Draw-tube £16 Full description of the above instrument, and Illustrated Catalogue of Microscopes and Appa- ratus, also classified list of 40,000 Micro- scopic Objects for- warded post free on application to W. Watson & Sons, 313 High Holborn, LONDON', w.c. !AND AT 78 Swanston Street, Melbourne, Australia. Sir- E S T A B 1 837. Awarded 28 GOLD and other Medals at the principal International Exhibitions of the World. JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. FEBRUARY 1893. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. I. — On an Endophytic Parasite of Diatoms . By Charles Haughton Gill, F.R.M.S., F.C.S. ( Read 18 th November , 1892.) Plate I. During the late autumn of 1891, while examining some large gatherings of diatoms from the New River, near London, in search of instances of conjugation, I observed several cases of what I at first took to be the formation of sporanges by Pleurosigma attenuatum itself. Further observation, however, makes it almost certain that the spore-sacs in question are the zoosporanges of a fungus similar to, if not identical with the Ectrogella bacillariacearum described and named by Zopf,* as infesting Synedra and Pinnularia. In general characters they agree with Zopfs description and figures of Ectrogella , except in the point hereinafter mentioned, and differ in form only as they might be expected to do when deve- loped within the shorter, wider shells of Pleurosigma , instead of the exceedingly long and narrow Synedra. These spore-sacs, as contained in Pleurosigma, , are sausage- shaped EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. Fig. 1. — Pleurosigma attenuatum with single sporange in early stage. X 300. j* 2. ,, ,, ,, two ,, „ x 300. ,, 3. „ „ „ single „ with beak on the point of bursting, x 300. „ 4. — Pleurosigma attenuatum with three sporanges, one discharging zoospores, x 300. „ 5. — A sporange separated from shell and discharging zoospores through beak. X 465. „ 6. — Cocconema lanceolatum with single sporange in early stage, x 300. „ 7. — A Nitzschia with two sporanges before appearance of discharge beaks. X 300. „ 8. — A Nitzschia with two sporanges with two discharge beaks, x 300. „ 9. — Nitzschia sigmoidea with single very elongated sporange. X 300. * Zopf, ‘ Zur Kenntniss der Phycomyceten,’ Nova Acta K. L. C. Deut. Akad., xlvii. No. 4, p. 145, partly translated by Mr. Karop in Journ. Quek. Club, 1887, p. 115. 1893. B 2 Transactions of the Society. bodies consisting of a firm envelope of cellulose (which is coloured purple by chlor-iodide of zinc), containing a greenish-brown endo- plasm which at first is very slightly granular, but which draws up into isolated particles having a sort of mulberry outline as maturity approaches. At this stage the cell-wall becomes tumid at one point, and forms a process, or beak, which forces its way out between the two shells of the diatom, gradually elongates, and then bursts at its extremity. Through this beak the contents of the sac are discharged, sometimes with great rapidity, into the surrounding water, in the form of a cloud of minute zoospores endowed with a great power of rapid motion. The beaks or discharging tubes are often of considerable length, say half that of the diatom itself. I have never seen more than one beak or discharging tube proceeding from any one sac out of the hundreds I have had under observation, though Zopf says of his Ectrogella, “ I have counted as many as ten, and the fact of many excretory ducts being formed in the larger sporangia is particularly characteris- tic of Ectrogella. The medium sized usually possess from three to five, but sometimes only two.” A single Pleurosigma may contain more than one sporange, and though one or two is the most common number, eleven have been counted in one shell. As a general rule each sac is quite simple, but I have observed several somewhat doubtful instances of their being bifurcated. Zopf says of the sporanges of his Ectrogella , “ They are never branched.” 1 have not as yet been able to trace the development of the zoo- spores after they have left the sac, as they speedily become mixed and confounded with the surrounding debris of all sorts accompanying the specimens. Though it is easy to separate a sac-bearing specimen and isolate it on a clean slide, the necessary manipulation seems to completely arrest its powers of further development, and no emission of zoospores has taken place in any one instance out of the many experiments made. Of w7hat particular organism these sacs are the zoosporanges can only be finally determined by getting their contained zoospores to develope under observation, and then tracing the resulting growth to its ultimate form. Hitherto, as noted above, 1 have failed to get any growth from them under conditions which render accurate observa- tion possible, though I have kept the sporanges under constant, or rather regular, observation for weeks at a time, while they were immersed in plain river water, or in culture fluids in which diatoms increase and multiply. Among other culture fluids tried was what might be called “diatom soup,” madeby boiling down a large quantity of fresh diatoms, and preserving the filtered extract in sterilized and sealed tubes. This should give a medium having all the necessary elements for the nutrition of these zoospores, whether they be those of the diatom itself or of an endophytic parasite. On an Endophytic Parasite of Diatoms. By G. Ilaugliton Gill. 3 The very high authority of Zopf as a cryptogamic botanist, gives the greatest possible weight to his opinion that the sacs which he observed were really the mycelial sacs of some species of Ancylista (a parasitic fungus), but as he too failed to get any growth from them or their contents, their exact nature is still open to some degree of doubt. It is, indeed, hard to understand how it should come about that a fungus which was present in such abundance, and in such an active state as to attack thousands of individuals of Pleurosigma, should not invade one of the almost equally numerous Nitschise , Pinnularise, or other diatoms which were confined in the same limited volume of water for weeks together. But such was the case. No trace of a mycelium from which such spore-sacs might arise could be discovered. The first gathering in which these bodies were observed (and I had been examining similar gatherings from the same spot, at short intervals throughout the spring and summer) was made in the beginning of November. It was kept in an open shallow dish and examined daily. At first only one or two specimens could be found even after long search, but in the course of a week or two examples became more numerous, among those diatoms which were still left alive. In the beginning of December many specimens could be found in each “dip,” but by the middle of the month the greater number of the sacs had put forth their beaks and discharged their contents. A fresh gathering was made from the same spot on Dec. 19. On examination no Pleurosigma with fully-formed sacs could be found. It was kept in an open dish and examined every few days, but it was not till the 2nd January that complete spore-sacs were observed. From this time the number rapidly increased up to the 22nd of the month, and then as rapidly decreased, till by the 31st there were hardly any but discharged and empty sacs to be found.* A third gathering made at the beginning of March, and kept under the same conditions as the other two, failed to give any specimens of Pleurosigma in this peculiar state. All through the succeeding spring and summer these sac-bearing Pleurosigma were sought — but not one specimen found. So far their occurrence appears to be seasonal. In October of this year (1892) I again found a few specimens, but up to the beginning of November only very few, and even in December they are scarce as compared with last year. The fact that in no case have more than a few scattered specimens been found in quite fresh-gathered (and therefore presumably healthy) material, but * Observations made in November and December 1892 and January 1893, have completely coincided with those ot' the previous year. Now, at the end of January, 1 am unable to fiud one Plentosiqma with a spore-sac. B 2 4 Transactions of the Society. that their number increased on keeping under relatively unhealthy conditions, argues strongly in favour of the conclusion that these sacs really are due to some parasitic fungus and are not proper to the healthy diatom. Though the gathering made in the beginning of March gave no sac-hearing specimens among the thousands of Pleurosigma present, it did contain large numbers of a Bacillaria (or small straight Nitzschia ) ■with very similar zoosporanges to those in Pleurosigma enclosed. No other diatoms were affected, though Pinnularia , Cocconema, Amphora , Surirella, Campylodiscus and Cymatopleura were abundant. If further observations should confirm the first and establish the fact that diatoms of different species hear these sporanges only at a season peculiar to each, it will be necessary to believe either that these spore-sacs are proper to the diatom itself, or that there are a number of distinct parasitic fungi, each of which has its own season for the development of sporanges, and each of which can only find an appropriate host in one particular species (or genus) of diatom. I am induced to bring forward these very incomplete results by the consideration that, as there is great uncertainty about finding the material for confirmatory observations and experiments, it is almost necessary that mot e than one pair of eyes and hands should be at work on the subject if it is to be carried to a satisfactory con- clusion. The literature bearing directly on the fungoid parasites of diatoms other than the paper of Zopf is almost nil. Cornu, in his monograph of the Saprolegnise in the 1 Annales des Sciences Naturelles ’ for 1872, describes under the name of Olpidiopsis several species of parasitic fungi infesting them. Some of these bear considerable resemblance in general characters and appearance to Zopf ’s Edrogella and especially to that form of it which is described in the present paper. Pringsheim, in Jahrb. wiss. Bot., i. p. 289, describes a Pythium as attacking diatoms. Carter (An. Nat. Hist., 2nd series, xvii. p. 101) describes a para- sitic fungus which attacks Spirogyra , and which somewhat resembles Edrogella, but which he expressly says is not found in diatoms. Henfrey (Tr. Mic. Soc. (n.s.), vii. p. 25) describes a parasitic fungus which seems to be identical with Carter’s. There are two papers, by Currey and llabenhorst respectively, on parasitic fungi attacking algae (Mic. Jn., v. p. 211, and Babenhorst, Alg., iii. p. 276) which I have been unable to consult in the original. A. Fischer in Pringsheim’s Jahrb., 1881-2, xiii. p. 286, extends and completes the description of the parasitic fungi treated of by Cornu (see supra) but does not note the occurrence of any of them in diatoms. 5 II. — The Chromatic Curves of Microscope Objectives . By E. M. Nelson, F.R.M.S. ( Read 15 th February , 1893.) The achromatism of the Microscope objective is a subject which has received comparatively little attention except from the practical con- structors of Microscope lenses. It is barely mentioned either in the text-books or in the journals of our Societies. The only work in our language, so far as I am aware, dealing with it at all at length is the English translation of Naegeli and Schwendener. The reason for this is not far to seek : excellent lenses often yield strongly coloured images, and lenses giving colourless images are usually defective in more important points. The presence or absence of colour is by itself no criterion of the excellence of either the Microscope or telescope objective. There are other points of greater importance which are liable to be overlooked. There is no question of colour correction in a reflecting telescope, its excellence depends on figure and centering, and these points are of equal importance in the dioptric telescope. Now, spherical aberration is much more obtrusive in Microscope than in telescope objectives, because their apertures are vastly greater. An aperture of *0625 N.A. is considered remarkable for a dioptric telescope, the usual aperture is half that amount. The new Greenwich telescope is to have ’0416 N.A., the greatest yet given to a large instrument. In achromatic days, as hinted above, objectives free from colour were as a rule to be avoided, because this freedom from colour was usually obtained at the expense of sharpness. There were two kinds of correction in vogue with achromatic lenses : one (A) left the image decidedly blue, and the other (B) red, and many excellent objectives were constructed on both these principles. The red kind of correction (B) must be divided into at least two, if not three, sub- divisions, for there was (B i) an orange red which was bad, as a successful example of a lens exhibiting that colour of image had not been seen ; all the fine glasses of the (B) type gave purple red (usually called claret) coloured images, and of these there were two groups, (B ii) the bluish purples, and (B iii) the reddish purples. Perhaps the finest glasses of old construction were those which gave images nearly resembling a solution of permanganate of potass and water, or the more homely damson-juice, in colour (B ii) and (B iii). In selecting an objective the great desiderata were sharp and brilliant images, and these desiderata were usually accompanied by violent colours. It will be said that these colours are those of the secondary spectrum due to the irrationality of ordinary crowns and flints, but I think you will agree with me that there is something more than this when you exnniine some of the curves presently. You will notice that I have employed the past tense when speaking about Ti'ansactions of the Society. Chromatic Curves of Microscope Objectives. By E. M. Nelson. 7 these lenses; my reasons for this are, first, the introduction of apochro- matics, and secondly, the use of Jena glass. The conditions which obtained before this no longer hold good, for lenses free from colour are among the most brilliant and sharp objectives, neither is an orange or brick-dust red any longer a bar to fine definition. But as in achromatic days we have seen that freedom from colour was not the most desirable end to be sought for in a Microscope lens, so too in these apochromatic times we must not reject a lens on account of the presence of colour. We may well ask, if the removal of colour is not the object in an apochromatic, what do we gain by it ? The answer is (a) an enlargement of the ratio of aperture to focus, ( b ) an increase of brilliancy with equal apertures. Taking (b) first, let us compare an ancient but well corrected 2/3 of ’3 N.A. with a modern apochro- matic of the same aperture and power. We shall find that the apochromatic will give us, first, a more brilliant image on account of the more perfect concentration of light, and secondly, a more beautiful image on account of the removal of false colour ; but will it show us anything more or define anything that we cannot see with the old lens?- Rigidly speaking the apochromatic might show the flagellum of a bacterium which the old achromatic would fail to do, but practically speaking little difference would be observed in this respect. Only a dilettante would search for the flagellum of a bacterium with a 2/3. Therefore we may say that the difference between the apochromatic and the achromatic is merely an aesthetic one, viz. that of beauty and brightness of image. With regard to (a) however, if we take an apochromatic 1/2 of ’65 N.A. where shall we find the old lens with which to compare it? The old 1/2 inches of 80° were over-powered by 25 to 50 per cent. — in fact they were 4/10 and 1/3, consequently they are out of court; but suppose we admit this largely diminished ratio in aperture, we shall find that a further reduction of 20° must be made in the aperture of the old lenses before the image is sufficiently cleared from fog to be suitable for comparison, assuming of course that full cones are employed in all cases. We have here something entirely distinct and new. The micro- scopic world had never until the introduction of the apochromatic seen such a ratio of aperture to power. The previous alleged examples were, as lawyers would say, first, not true in fact, and secondly, if true in fact were failures. Those observers who use the 1G mm. and 8 mm. apochromatics have a more aesthetically perfect lens than was formerly possible, but apart from this aestheticism and photography they have nothing that was not obtainable under the old conditions, but those who use the 24 mm. and 12 mm. apochromatics have entirely new conditions which were not before practical. Until Prof. Abbe invented the apochromatic principle there was no method of reducing the spherical aberration for more than one 8 Transactions of the Society. colour. Now as spherical aberration is greatly increased by reducing the focus while the aperture remains the same, objectives which had a high ratio of aperture to focus always gave images bathed in the coloured fog of the unreduced spherical aberration. The whole history of the progress of optics may be termed that of the increase of the ratio of the aperture to focus. Huyghens and Campani’s telescopes had a N.A. of *003, but the new equatorial at Greenwich will have •0416 N.A., the greatest yet accomplished in a large dioptric instrument. The great Dollond, however, made a small telescope of *069 N.A. In reflecting telescopes, as there is no spherical aberration to correct for dispersion, a very high ratio of aperture to focus has been reached. In Gregorians, an aperture as high as • 24 N.A. has been attained, and several of *164 N.A. have been made, which gave excellent results. Newtonians have been made of *083 N.A., and those of *0625 N.A. are quite common. We see, therefore, that a ratio of aperture to focus, which is not in the least out of the way in a reflector, is exceptional in a refractor. This digression with regard to tele- scopes is useful, because it emphasizes the fact that it is the unreduced spherical aberration owing to dispersion which has hitherto barred the way to the increase in the ratio of aperture to power, but which has been greatly lessened by Prof. Abbe’s apochromatic system. But to return to our subject. The statement that objects are seen with apochromatic lenses in their natural colours may become mis- leading, because the colours of microscopic objects depend largely on diffraction effects which are quite dissipated when magnifying power is used. The magnificent colour of a scale of a Morpho Menelaus quickly disappears with magnification, so does the colour of the resplendent diatom Actinocyclus Elirenbergii alter and become less as the power is increased, quite independently of the chromatic aberra- tion of the lens ; whereas some of the finest apochromatics impart faint rose or pale brown colours to colourless objects. We now come to the practical investigation of the chromatic aberration of Micro- scope lenses. The method employed by Messrs. Naegeli and Schwen- dener is the usual one of covering up half the aperture of the objective, the remaining half of the lens acting as a prism. They also refer to Prof. Abbe’s plan of passing oblique beams through the objective by means of stops placed at the back of the condenser. On experimenting with both these methods I find that half the objective plan is ineffectual, and the drawback with regard to the Abbe method was the great amount of spherical aberration in the condenser which prevented the central and marginal cones of light being focused on the object at the same instant. Far better results can, however, be now obtained by using Powell and Lealand’s fluorite apochromatic condenser, owing to its aplanatism. But the method for your investi- gation to-night differs from either of these. By means of my Chromatic Curves of Microscope Objectives. By E. M. Nelson. 9 monochromatic light apparatus * I am able to fill the back lens of the apochromatic condenser with any light I please of an approxi- mately uniform wave-length, and then by placing a delicate test object on the stage, and with a deep eye-piece, focal differences of rays of various wave-lengths can be directly determined ; the size of the illuminating cone can be altered at pleasure, and beams of various obliquities used. There are two methods of measuring the focal differences, (a) by means of the graduations of the fine-adjustment, (b) by receiving the image on a screen, and noting the differences in screen distance. When one focal difference is known, the other may be calculated. Thus let d be the difference of focus at the object side, or the move- ment by the fine-adjustment, and let D be the difference of focus at the image side, or difference of screen distance, and m the initial power of the objective, w being the screen distance, and assuming that w is large compared with D. Then t T>W d w1 , 2 D = = dm2 p and d = D/2 D w* I have measured the foci for the lines B, D, E, F, and G- of many various objectives both ancient and modern, and now submit for your inspection the curves of some of them which possess particular interest, drawn from those measurements (fig. 1). But before discussing these curves let me point out some important points which bear on practical microscopy in connection with monochromatic illumination. The ends in view with illumination by monochromatic light have been, speaking for myself — and I think it is also the generally received impression — ( a ) the increase of resolving power by means of illumina- tion of the object by light of a shorter wave-length than usually employed, and ( b ) the removal of the secondary spectrum in achromatic lenses. But there has been a certain mystery respecting the effect of monochromatic illumination, the solution of which has not been clear. As it is a most important subject, 1 hope you will pardon me if it is dealt with at some length. As stated previously,! the effect of shortening the wave-length was practically to add *1 N.A. to the aperture* of the objective mentioned. For if A, is the number of waves of light per inch, and N.A. the numerical aperture of the objective, then L the number of lines resolved per inch will be equal to 2 A (N.A.). As vision fails greatly in blue light, and glass is not transparent for very short waves, anything as high up as the Gr line is quite out of the question, so we must content ourselves with a wave-length lower down the spectrum. In practice, shortening the wave-length gives about * Journal R.M.S., 1892, pi. I. f Tom. cit., p. 341. X Tom. cit., p. 44G. 10 Transactions of the Society. 14 per cent, of increase of resolving power with medium and lower apertures, but with * 95 N. A. or over, the effect is greatly lessened (see Table). This being the case, why should monochromatic light be so serviceable, especially with wide-angled achromatics ? We have seen that the presence of colour in an achromatic is no bar to defini- tion and resolution. I have seen many old high-power achromatics which will show anything that apochromatics will. I believe Dr. Dallinger still has in his possession some old achromatics that will do so (the visibility of minute flagella, which probably depends on what we have termed the aestheticism of the image, should perhaps be excepted). It is the removal of the spherical aberration due to differences of colour caused by diffraction. This statement may not be very clear ; an example will perhaps explain it. Let us examine an ordinary P. angulatum with a cheap 1/7 of *8 N.A., the image will be what might have been expected ; but under monochromatic illumination, even when that is not of a short wave-length, we obtain what we should not have expected, viz. a wonderfully sharp image, a something more than the mere removal of the outstanding colour ; in brief, you would think that you were examining the object with a very wide-angled lens, but at the same time you would not notice any increase of resolving power. What I mean is that you would see none of the finer detail of the object which could only be resolved by a very wide angle, but the detail that you do see would appear as if it were being shown by a very wide-angled lens. These appearances are familiar to those who have worked with monochromatic light. Let us now consider the conditions we have when the object is seen with ordinary light, and say a rather small cone of illumination. With the lens of ' 8 N.A., the six green spectra of the P. angulatum would appear in the peripheral zone of the objective, and the white dioptric beam would be seen in the centre of the lens. Therefore, we have by means of diffraction practically a monochromatic illumi- nation in the outer peripheral zone of the lens (the red and orange being cut off at the edge of the lens, while the blue and green are left, but the blue is too weak to affect the image), and in the centre of the lens white light. Now the perfection of the image consists in the exact union of these outer spectral beams with the central beam. But this exact union probably does not take place, because the spherical aberration of the objective is very likely not corrected for these two colours, viz. the green in the peripheral zone and that which most strongly affects the eye, viz. tbe orange-yellow in the centre. The moment monochromatic light is used the centre is made of the same colour as the periphery, and if that colour for which the lens is corrected be chosen, a magnificent image is the result. Those objects which bring the first order spectra well within the grip of the lens are not so much affected by monochromatic light, but it is the finer detail, the spectra of which would be at the periphery of the lens, which is Chromatic Curves of Microscope Objectives. By E. M. Nelson . 1 1 sharpened up hy the use of monochromatic illumination. The P. angulatum in this respect forms an excellent example. Some lenses fail altogether with blue light because the optician’s aim has not been to correct the lens for the spherical aberration of the blue ray. The lens I am exhibiting to you this evening fails altogether with blue light. The apocliromatics do not go off like this in the blue, at the same time they do not yield the results that might be expected from them. We find therefore that the idea of the use of monochromatic light for shortening the wave-length, and by that means obtaining a greater resolving power, must not be pressed too far, especially when speaking of both apochromatic and achromatic lenses as they are at the present time. (In addition to this, account must be taken of the fact that the eye fails in the blue light, not to mention the pain caused by its prolongued use.) For visual purposes at least there are no expectations of any great advance with light of a wave-length much shorter than 1/50,000 in., or the blue green. What may be done photographically with a lens, made of material which is transparent to rays high up in the violet, and whose spherical aberration for those rays has been specially corrected, when used with plates made sensitive to such rays, we cannot say ; but under existing conditions we must not look for a great percentage of gain (only 7 per cent, with a wave-length of 1/50,000 in., and 14 per cent, in table with low and medium powers). This testing by means of monochromatic blue light shows directly the quality of an objective for photographic purposes. There are many lenses “ corrected for photomicrography ” which are all right so long as small cones are used, but directly any strain is placed upon the objective by a large cone the spherical aberration for the rays of short wave-length is instantly developed, It is here that a monochromatic yellow-green screen becomes of service because with specially prepared plates good photographs may be taken with almost any kind of lens.* Strictly speaking, the screen should be monochromatic for that special ray for which the optician has cor- rected the spherical aberration of the objective : this usually will be found to be the yellow green. I have been trying for some time past to find a monochromatic glass screen. With coloured gelatin films an excellent monochromatic screen may be obtained, but it is not so easy to match the gelatin in glass. I have however found two glasses t which answer the purpose very well, as you will be able to judge for yourselves by an examination of the image of the P. angulatum as shown with a cheap lens in the Microscope on the table. * It is of interest to note that the screen may be placed either between the lamp flame and the back lens of the condenser or over the eye-piece. It should be remembered that all Prof. Abbe’s diffraction experiments may he performed above the eye-piece, equally as well as at the hack of the objective. f Can be procured at Messrs. Baker’s. 12 Transactions of the Society. We will now pay our sole attention to the curves. They are drawn so as to represent the alteration in screen distance with light of different wave-lengths. The lenses are all focused with light E, the length of this vertical line to where the curve cuts it is supposed to he 10 in.* The curve for a non-achromatized lens would con- tinuously slope downwards from left to right. The curve of an objective perfectly corrected for all colours would therefore be repre- sented by a horizontal line, because the screen would remain at the same distance from the lens, viz. 10 in., with the other colours as with the green. This result is, you will observe, obtained with some of the apochromatics. The ideal curve for an achromatic lens corrected for two colours, say D and F, and focused with light E, would slope downwards from B to D, it would then slope less from D to E, it would then rise a similar amount to F, so that F and D would have the same focus, and then finally it would slope away at Gr. The reason for a small dip at E is owing to the irrationality of the spectrum. Except for a slight over-correction, No. 4 represents an ideal achromatic. The column marked O.I. indicates the ratio of aperture to power ; it is the N.A. of the objective multiplied by 1000 and divided by the initial magnifying power of the objective.! This shows the efficiency of the objective from solely an optical standpoint : it can therefore appropriately be called “ The Optical Index/’ or O.I. If a Microscope is required to show all that a keen eye is able to appreciate then *20 N.A. must be given to it for every 100 diameters of magnification.! If we limit the power of the eye-piece of such a Microscope to 10 then the objective must have *26 N.A. for each 10 diameters of initial magnifying power. The optical index therefore for a theoretically perfect Microscope objective will be 26 • 0. This gives a very convenient rule ; for dropping the odd decimal we get the following : — The limit of combined power for best definition with any objective of any given aperture may be found by multiplying its N.A. by 400. Example : — The limit of power for best definition with a 2/3 in. of ’3 N.A. is 120 diameters. The converse rule may be stated thus : — The ideal N.A. for any objective whose initial power is known can be found by multiplying *025 by that power. Ex- ample:— The ideal N.A. for a 1/2 of power 20 is *025 x 20 = #5N.A. This ratio has not only been attained, but is surpassed by that most * Note particularly not 'proportional. Thus in curve 2, line E, though actually 1 in., represents 10 in.; the line F, actually 1£ in., represents 1()£ in., not 12 in. which it would do if it were proportional. This remark applies to the whole diagram. f In discussions with regard to the Microscope it is better to consider this ratio as one of aperture to power , instead of the usual ratio of aperture to focus , which is employed when speaking of telescopes and photographic lenses. The reason for this is, that the foci both of telescopes and photographic lenses can be easily and accu- rately determined, whereas it is the power and not the focus which can be easily and accurately measured in a Microscope objective. % ‘Ratio of Aperture to Power,* by E. M. Nelson. English Mechanic, xxxviii. (1883) No. 979. Chromatic Curves of Microscope Objectives. By E. M. Nelson. 13 excellent apochromatic 12 mm. of Zeiss which has a N.A. of *66 or an optical index of 32*0. Keferring to fig. 1, we find that No. 1 has an optical index of 17 *7 ; it is an inch by Andrew Boss more than fifty years old. (Please note particularly that the curve of this lens as well as those of the next four is enlarged three times, and a 3/4 cone is employed throughout except in No. 23 where a full cone is used.) It shows over-correction in the red, but the focus for D is the same as for E, but as we proceed to Gr the under-correction increases rapidly. It is a good objective, correction (B ii). No. 2 is a modem American inch with the slightly larger optical index of 18*7 ; this has been better corrected for rays lower down the spectrum, but it is under-corrected in the violet ; this is also a (B ii) glass, and its per- formance is brilliant. No. 3 is a semi- ape chromatic, its power is somewhat less than an inch, but it has a higher optical index of 20 * 0. You will notice that it is very well corrected throughout the spectrum, its image is nearly colourless (B iii slight), it photographs well, and is an excellent object-glass. No. 4 is an old inch by J. H. Dallmeyer, consisting of two doublets ; it is the most achromatic of any old lens I have met' with (B ii slight), and it has the fairly high optical index of 20*6. No. 5 is an apochromatic as may be seen at once, there is a mere trifle of over-correction in the red, it is a splendid objective, with the high optical index of nearly 30. (The curves of the next six objectives are enlarged twice.) No. 6 is an English achromatic 2/3 (1875), it is well corrected for the lines B D and E, and is correspondingly under-corrected for F and G-. It has a bluish correction (A), and is a sharp lens, but will not photograph. No. 7 is a semi-apochromatic 2/3, and is a sharp lens, practically colourless, which will photograph ; its optical index is higher than that of the previous achromatic, being nearly 21. Nos. 8 and 9 are the same objective, the aperture of No. 9 being reduced by a stop. This lens is a 1/2 of 80° by Wenham, but in reality it is a 4/10 with the high optical index of nearly 26, correction (B iii). This lens has considerable spherical aberration, but when it is stopped down to 60° it performs admirably ; it will not photograph with full aperture, as it is slightly under-corrected for the F line. No. 10 is a splendid apochromatic 1/2 with the enormous optical index of 32 * 0 ; notwithstanding no alteration in focus can be detected throughout the spectrum. Mo. 11 is a fine semi-apochromatic 1/3; it exhibits a strong correction in the violet (B iii), and it will photo- graph. (All the curves are now the actual curves of the objectives.) No. 12 is a fine English achromatic 4/10 by Powell (1875) ; it has a triple front and back and a double middle ; its optical index is fairly high, viz. 20 * 0, and it is a well-corrected lens (B iii). It is typical of the best achievement in achromatic days. No. 13 is a very im- 14 Transactions of the Society. portant carve ; it will be seen at once that it is that of a well-corrected objective ; it is a semi-apochromatic 1 /4 with the high optical index of 18*6 (28*2 being the highest optical index of an apochromatic 1/4 as yet made) ; it is slightly over-corrected in the red, but is well corrected in the blue ; this lens will probably be a good photographer, visually it is very sharp (B iii). No. 14 is the curve of a very old 1/4 by Andrew Boss (1835), consisting of three doublets ; the optical index is only 9 * 5, correction (A slight). No. 15 is a 3 /4 by Powell, of 1842; the optical index is a trifle higher, and the correction (B iii). No. 16 is a 1/4 by Andrew Ross, 1847, which, like the preceding, has three doublets, and does not show much colour (B iii slight). No. 17 is a single- fronted 1/4, optical index still increasing. £\o. 18 a 1/4 by Powell (1875), triple front and back and double middle, optical index en- larged (B ii). No. 19 an early cheap Student’s English 1 /4, with single front and no correction collar ; it has a lower optical index, and a correction (B iii). No. 20, an American 1 /5, about eight years old, violently coloured (B ii), but otherwise well corrected, with a higher optical index. No. 21, a Tolies 1/4, really a 1/6; this is a curiously corrected objective, giving tolerably sharp definition, with a red colour (B i), optical index somewhat lower than the preceding. No. 22, a Hartnack 1/7 (1867), a blue lens (A). Nos. 23 and 24 are the curves of the same objective, viz. a cheap semi-apochromatic 1 /7 (B iii). No 23 is the curve with a full cone of illumination, and 24 that with a 3/4 cone. The optical index is low, being the same as that of the dry apochromatic 1 /8, but the images it yields are scarcely inferior to that lens. The curve of Powell’s very fine achromatic 1/4 is not given, because it is a straight line, and would therefore be only a repetition of No. 10 ; its optical index is 23*2. We will next observe the variations in the curves of an achromat, semi-apochromat, and apochromat owing to different corrections of the eye-piece. An achromatic 4/10 (No. 12, fig. 1) has the flattest curve, with the Huyghenian eye-piece. With an under-corrected eye-piece (single lens) the curve remains the same in the blue, but it is a trifle more bent in the red. With an over-corrected eye-piece (compensating) the steepness of the curve is slightly increased, both in the red and in blue and violet. A semi-apochromatic 1/3 (No. 11) has the flattest curve with the over-corrected compensating eye-piece; with a Huyghenian it is a trifle more bent, and with an under-corrected single lens it is a good deal more bent in the B and G lines. An apochromatic 1/2 (No. 10) shows no measurable difference between the compensating and the Huyghenian eye-pieces ; but when an under-corrected eye-piece is used, there is a slight under-correction noticeable throughout the spectrum. Most of the above differences are too slight to be represented by a drawn curve, unless much amplified. Chromatic Carves of Microscope Objectives. By E. M. Nelson. 15 As that part of the table on the fly-leaf of this Journal entitled “ Limit of Resolving Power ” is based on the assumption that the object is illuminated by a single beam of utmost obliquity in one azimuth, and as such illumination should only be used for the special resolution of very fine lines ruled on glass, such as Nobert’s or Fasoldt’s bands; further, as the resolution of a high number of lines with a single oblique beam in one azimuth is, as I have frequently pointed out, no criterion of the quality of an objective, because only the outer zone of the objective is utilized, the practical value of that part of the table is somewhat diminished. The following table is, however, constructed to meet the every-day wants of the practical microscopist. It gives the resolving power of first-class objectives with a 3/4 cone of direct illumination, both with white and blue light. For white light a line lower down the spectrum between D and E has been selected, because it more nearly represents the light which makes the strongest impression on the retina. For monochromatic light a line is taken a little higher up than F. It will be noticed that photography is also classed with this wave-length ; from practical experience I am convinced that, with ordinary photo- graphic methods, light near the line H has very little influence on a photomicrograph. Glass is not very transparent to rays of a short wave-length, and when we consider that the light has often to pass through, besides the slip, cover- glass, mounting medium, oil-immersion fluid, 19 lenses without counting the bull’s-eye (which I seldom use), it is not to he expected that an ultra-violet light should have much potency. The number of lines resolvable with a 3/4 cone of direct illumi- 3 \ nation can be calculated by the formula (N.A.), A being the number of waves per inch. If we take, therefore, a wave-length of 1/46,566 in. ( = 0*5443 f) for the white light, and of 1/53,333 in. ( = 0*4762 f) for the monochromatic blue light, 3 X / 2 will equal 70,000 and 80,000 respectively. All then we have to do is to multiply the (N.A.) by 70,000 for white light, and 80,000 for mono- chromatic blue light. Great accuracy is not needed in choosing the line, because the retina is not affected by a few hundred waves more or less, and pro- bably all persons are not influenced alike. It will be observed that the resolving powers for blue light are not carried on with apertures greater than 0 * 8 N.A. The reason for this is that its effect here ceases ; further, results obtained with higher apertures are hardly up to the values given under white light, even when blue-green light is used. In my former paper, already alluded to, the advantages derived from the use of monochromatic blue light were stated to be owing to the shortening of the wave-length ; this statement, although quite correct in theory, must not be pushed too far, especially with higher apertures. It makes a difference of about 14 per cent, in the case of low apertures, but beyond those of 0*9 N.A. its influence in increas- 1 6 transactions of the Society. in" resolution is so small as to be hardly worth taking into account. What it does effect is the sharpening and clearing of detail already resolved, as I have attempted to explain above. With all apertures it will be found that blue-green light yields the best results. We see, therefore, that blue-green monochromatic illumination with low and medium apertures both increases resolution and sharpens up the image, but with high apertures it merely sharpens the image. A great deal has been said with regard to resolution by photo- graphic methods, viz. that because photography utilizes rays of a very short wave-length, therefore a far greater amount of resolution is secured by its use, and that many objects have been discovered by photography that were invisible by ordinary vision. I cannot, endorse this statement that a greater amount of resolution is possible by photographic methods, for the reason stated above, viz. that the short blue waves are weakened in passing through the glass ; it is light of a longer wave-length that in reality impresses the image on the plate. In the writings on this subject a great deal of inexact language is made use of, such as “ monochromatic blue light,” for when you inquire how was this obtained ? you are told by means of an ammonio-sulphate of copper cell. As this cell passes some red and green light, it is inaccurate to term the light monochromatic.* In such a case it is the green or blue-green light which impresses the plate. It is quite out of the question that light as short as •4 yL l has any effect at all with wide angles. In practice on the most delicate diatom markings I have found scarcely any increase of resolution with wide apertures by photographic methods. Next, with regard to the discovery of objects by means of photography. These discoveries lie among such objects as flagella, which are visible solely on account of differences of light and shade. Photography accentuates this difference by “ time impression,” a case precisely analogous to the photography of very minute stars which are quite invisible with the telescope they were photographed with. “ Time impression ” means that with a photographic plate the effect of a very weak light is cumulative, whereas on the retina a very weak light either stimulates the retina or it does not, therefore accumulation goes for nothing. For example, a very fine jet of water may be issuing from an orifice ; a person with not very good sight might not be able to perceive the water, but let this tiny stream accumulate in a cistern for a week then he would be almost blind if he could not see it. This is the way flagella and such like objects are made visible by photography. The more unskilled the observer, and the more uncritical the method of his work, the more objects will he discover by photographic means. * An excellent test for monochromatic light is the examination of the brilliant spectrum at the back of an objective of medium power obtained by illuminating a coarse diatom such as a Pinnularia with an oblique beam. If an ammonio-sulphate of copper cell is interposed green and some red will still be seen, which proves that the illumination is not monochromatic. Chromatic Curves of Microscope Objectives. By E. M. Nelson. 17 It is more than probable that of all objects photographically discovered, there is not one which cannot be visually demonstrated with a far lower power when the Microscope is critically used. Table of Resolving Powers in Lines to an Inch with 3/4 Cone of Direct Illumination. N.A. White Light. Between lines D and E 46,666 waves per inch. Monochromatic Blue Light and Photography. Near line F 53,333 waves per inch. 0*1 7,000 8,000 0-2 14,000 16,000 03 21,000 24,000 0*4 28,000 32,000 0-5 35,000 40,000 0-6 42,000 48,000 0*7 49,000 56,000 0-8 56,000 64,000 0*9 63,000 10 70,000 The same as for 1*1 77,003 white light. 1*2 84,000 1*3 91,000 1*4 98,000 1-5 105,000 1*6 112,000 The above table agrees remarkably well with results actually obtained with the best lenses, and to show that this is so, the following table gives the actual resolutions made on diatoms in balsam with a 3/4 cone from a Powell fluorite apochromatic condenser (1/4 of 0*95 N.A.). Objective. O.I. N.A. White Light. Blue Light. Apochromatic 1 iD. .. 28*9 •32 22,000 25,000 1. Achromatic 4/10 (1875) 20-0 •64 40,000 strong 49,000 2. Apochromatic 1/2 32*0 •66 46,000 53,500 3. Semi-apochromatic 1/4 18-6 •71 53,500 60,000 barely Achromatic 1/4 (1875) 16*5 •79 53,000 barely 60 , 000 barely Semi-apochromatic 1/7 11*5 •86 60,000 65,000 4. Achromatic 1/5 .. 16-3 •88 60,000 65,000 barely Apochromatic 1/4 23*2 •95 65,000 — 5. Semi-apochromatic 1/12 9*7 1-26 90,000 barely — 6. Apochromatic 1/8 17-0 1-43 94,000 1. Would resolve probably 42,000 with white light (construction same as achro- matic 1 /4, viz. triple front and baok, double middle). 2. A very fine lens. 3. A little more than 3/4 cone used ; this lens is a very strong resolver, and stands blue light even better than some apochromatics. 4. A fine example of an achromatic by Gundlach. 5. Will not resolve the Nitzschia curvula 90,000. 6. Resolves Amphipleura pellucida 93,000-95,000. Less than 3/4 cone used. 1893. c IS SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia ), MICROSCOPY, &c., INCLUDING ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS FROM FELLOWS AND OTHERS* ZOOLOGY. A. VERTEBRATA Embryology, Histology, and General. a. Embryology. f Development of Elements of Nervous System.^— Prof. A. Kolliker gives, in consideration of the present discussion on this subject, a summary account of his own views : — (1) The first nerve-fibres which appear in the tail-fringe of Batrachian larvae are all non-nucleated, very fine, branched filaments. (2) In time there appear on the filaments first a few, widely separated nuclei, which in time increase in number ; these are, for various reasons, to be regarded as mesodermal cells deposited from the out- side. (3) In fine medullated fibres there appear at the points of constric- tion very fine, non-nucleated, branched fibrils which are branches of the axis-cylinder ; these in time form fresh rich ramifications which are nucleated at points ; this, perhaps, shows in the most striking way that nerve-fibres are not derived from rows of cells. (4) All the peripheral larger motor nerve-trunks of Birds and Mam- mals are formed of bundles of very fine non-medullated nerve-fibrils which have no nuclei or cells and of an investment of mesodermal cells which gradually grows inwards. Prof. Kolliker has lately shown that the same is true of the sensory cephalic nerves of young embryos. This fact, again, shows clearly that these elements are not formed by the concrescence of rows of cells. (5) Further, the central nerve-fibres first appear without nuclei or * The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial “ we,” and they do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually published , and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, &c., which are either new or have not been previously described in this country. f This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, and Reproduction, and allied subjects. j Verhandl. Anal. Gesell., 1892, pp. 76-8. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 19 cells on the surface of the spinal cord or brain, and in the interior of the latter ; it is only later that a nucleated and cell-containing tissue grows into the white substance. (6) As the central nerve-fibres have no nucleated sheaths it is clear that Schwann’s cells do not form the axis-cylinder and medulla. (7) The outgrowth of nerve-cells (neuroblasts) into the axis- cylinder has been seen, and is not difficult to demonstrate. (8) The method of Golgi shows that in young embryos the nervous processes are formed from cells, which belong partly to the medullary plate and the adjoining ectoderm, and partly to the peripheral ectoderm. (9) All the very fine peripherally distributed nerve-fibres such as those of the cornea and others have no nuclei, and show us that the axis-cylinder may innervate a wide area by simple longitudinal growth without any part being taken by foreign cells. The same is shown by Golgi’s so-called sensory cells of the second order. (10) Finally, the processes of nerve-regeneration show that this is effected solely by the axis-cylinder. (11) Prof. Kolliker now finds that the cells which he thought formed olfactory fibres are secondary and mesodermal structures. (12) He concludes that all nerve-fibres are direct processes of nerve- cells. Development of Optic Nerves of Vertebrates.* — Mr. K. Assheton points out that there are now two very distinct theories as to the origin of the optic nerve ; that which is generally held in this country is that which was thus expressed by Balfour : — “ The fibres of the optic nerves are derived from a differentiation of the epithelial cells of which the nerve is at first formed ; ” in Germany, however, His, W. Muller, Mihalkovics, and Kolliker agree that nerve-fibres are outgrowths from nerve-cells, and that sensory fibres of sense-organs grow inwards from the sensory epithelium of the sense-organ to the central nervous system. The author has studied the development of the optic nerve in the frog and in the chick, and he comes to the conclusion that the optic stalk takes no part in the formation of the nervous parts of the organ of sight. This optic stalk becomes broken down and the cells composing it are separated from one another, partly by the mechanical stretching due to the growth of the optic nerve, and partly by the growth in between the several cells of the nerve-fibres. The nerve-fibres of the optic lie along the posterior border of the stalk, and are at first entirely outside it ; but, on the breaking down of the stalk, some of the nerve- fibres grow in between the cells. The great majority of fibres forming the optic nerve arise as outgrowths from cells in the retina, and grow towards and into the brain. Cajal has discovered certain fibres which would seem to grow from the central nervous system to the retina, but these Mr. Assheton has not been able to find. The nerve-fibres pass over the ventral edge of the optic cup and thereby cause the formation of the choroidal fissure ; at this point there is no proliferation of cells. The author remarks that he has never seen the suggestion that the fissure represents a stage in the evolution of the eye, being, of course, ignorant at the time of writing that Prof. Biitschli was about to make a * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxxiv. (1892) pp. 85-104 (2 pis.). C 2 20 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO suggestion on the subject.* Whatever was the first origin of the eyes of Vertebrates it is clear that they were of myelonic origin and much more deeply placed than at present in adult Vertebrates, and the eye would not become a cup till the lens was formed. The passage of the nerve- fibres over one part of the edge of the area would prevent the growth of the edge at that point, and consequently a gap would be left ; this gap is the choroidal fissure, which was probably permanently open during a certain stage in the evolution of the Vertebrate eye, and which has only secondarily been used as a means of ingress for the mesoblastic tissues. Origin of Vascular Germs in the Chick.f — M. L. Vialleton brings evidence to show that the vascular germs of the Chick arise in the para- blast, independently of the mesoderm. To the objection that there may have been migration he answers that if the germs could thus migrate they would often be found outside the terminal sinus, whereas this is very rare, and he has only seen it once. Further, the migration of a relatively large mass in a plasmodium would not be easy ; if it is sug- gested that it was not effected across the parablast, but between it and the ectoderm, an explanation would have to be given of the spherical form of the germ. On the whole, then, the author is in favour of the para- blastic origin of the vascular germs, and he hopes that the presence of these germs outside the vascular area will do something to resolve the difficult question of their origin. Axial and Lateral Metamerism of the Head in Embryos of Birds.if — Herr N. Goronowitsch finds in bird embryos with six metameres the first rudiments of the so-called “ ganglionic ridges ” ( Ganglienleisten ). They are formed from lateral outgrowths of upright dorsal portions of the medullary plate, but perhaps ectoderm apart from the medullary plate helps. The ganglionic ridges are most marked in embryos with eight metameres, and in this (primary) state they belong to the region of thalamencephalon and mesencephalon. In embryos with nine meta- meres the ridges have begun to divide up into isolated cells. These become identified with cells of the axial mesoderm. They have nothing to do wTith the development of nerves or ganglia. The author proceeds to describe the origin of the secondary and tertiary ridges, which belong to the posterior region of the medulla oblongata. They are much weaker than the primary ridges. The fact that ectoderm shares in forming the mesoderm is emphasized. It has been believed that a dorsal outgrowth of the brain extends laterally from the axial mesoderm, reaches the ectoderm, and fuses with it (branchial sense-organs), but the outgrowth is genetically complex. The dorsal portion is formed from ectoderm and from the medullary plate, the middle part is a differentiation of axial mesoderm, the distal part is formed from the middle plate of mesoderm and from the mesoderm of ectodermic origin. The development of the tertiary ridges also shows that the lateral metameres are formed dorsally from the elements of the ridges, and distally from the elements of the axial mesoderm. The development of the trigeminus and its ganglion occurs without * See this Journal, 1892, pp. 775 and 6. f Anat. Anzeig., vii. (1892) pp. 624-7. % Tom. cit., pp. 454-64. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 21 any help from the so-called ganglionic ridge. In the development of a nerve two facts must be clearly distinguished : the development of tho tract of nerve-carrying tissue (which in the case of the bird’s trigeminus is purely mesodermic), and the proper development of the nerve which begins with the appearance of the neuroblasts. The author’s views may be generally expressed as a combination of those of Goette with those of His. Maturation of Amphibian Ova and Fertilization of Immature Ova of Triton.* * * § — Prof. G. Born has extended O. Schultze’s observations on the maturation of Amphibian ova. He chiefly studied Triton tseniatus. He finds that the peculiar coil of transverse threads in the ripening ovum arises directly from the chromatin framework, and describes the transformation in detail. This is difficult to follow without figures, which will be published in a future memoir. In the ripest ovarian ova the nuclear spindle of the first polar body was almost complete ; in the ova from the visceral cavity the spindle lay tangentially under the surface, and the chromosomata were dividing into loops ; in the oviducal ova with firm spherical envelopes the first polar body had been extruded ; in the uterine ova the second spindle was complete. The author proves that all the oviducal ova and even those from the visceral cavity are, under certain conditions, capable of being fertilized and of development. From a few of the visceral ova Born reared morulsB, from distal oviducal ova normal larvae. Fertilization of Axolotl Ovum.f — Herr R. Fick finds that the middle portion of the spermatozoon gives rise to an attraction-sphere. No attraction-sphere was observed in association with the female pronucleus, but the two attraction-spheres of the first segmentation spindle seem to arise from the division of that associated with the spermatozoon. Some- times as many as nine spermatozoa were found in the ovum. Development of Endothelium of Heart of Amphibia.^ — M. V. Roudnev has chiefly studied embryos of Bana temjporaria. He finds that, in the region of the pharynx, the endoderm forms a layer made up of cylindrical cells, which do not take any part in the formation of the heart. The vitelline mass, which has the character of a primitive endoderm, and which gives off whole layers in the region of the heart, at first nourishes the embryo directly, and next plays the part of a formative element of the blood. In the latter case it is a vitello-vascular layer, and it is from this last that there is formed the endothelium of the heart, of the veins, and of the aortic arches. The author thinks it is of im- portance to distinguish between the paired and unpaired types of formation of the Vertebrate heart. Multiple and Partial Development in Amphioxus.§ — Mr. E. B. Wilson finds that twin and double embryos can be produced in great numbers and with perfect ease by shaking apart the blastomeres of the two-celled stage. A normal blastula is formed by each, but of half the usual size, and so it is also with the gastrula. If the four blastomeres * Anat. Anzeig., vii. (1892) pp. 772-81 (1 fig.) and 803-11. f Tom. cit., pp. 818-21. t Congres Internat. de Zoologie, II. i. (1892) pp. 101-3. § Anat. Anzeig., vii. (1892) pp. 732-40 (11 figs.). 22 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO of the four-celled stage be completely isolated, each may give rise to a dwarf blastula, gastrula, and oval free-swimming embryo, of one-fourth the normal size. If the same stage fall into two pairs of cells, each pair forms an embryo of half the normal size. If the four blastomeres be imperfectly separated, three types of gastrulae arise : — double embryos, triple embryos (one twice the size of the other two), and quadruple embryos (each one-fourth of the normal size). It seems likely that the isolated blastomere of the eight-celled stage is incapable of producing a gastrula, and that this is due to qualitative rather than to quantitative limitations is suggested by the developmental vigour of these one-eighth embryos, and by the fact that under certain conditions (from two- or four-celled stages by fission or breakage of a blastomere) minute gastrulse are produced which are even less than one-eighth of the normal size. In the normal segmentation, the fourth cleavage is not strictly meri- dional and radial, as Hatschek described, but is either (1) bilaterally symmetrical with reference to the first cleavage-plane (and very like that of Ascidians), or rarely (2) approaches the radial form, or most rarely (3) is of the true spiral type found in Annelids and Molluscs. The cleavage of a completely isolated blastomere of the two-celled or four-celled stage is not a half-cleavage, but agrees essentially with that of a complete normal ovum. The development of the isolated unit is transformed from the beginning, and thus differs from that described by Roux for similar cases in the frog and by Driescli for the sea-urchin, for in both of these the development at first agrees with that of a normal embryo-half, and only later gives rise to a perfect embryo by a process which may be provisionally called “ regeneration.” Phytogeny of Mammalian Teeth.* — Dr. C. Rose notices that various investigators had hinted at his theory of the origin of Mammalian molars by fusion of simple conical teeth. Giebel (1856), Gaudry (1878), Magitot (1883), and Dybowsky (1889) are noted. He points out that the general idea is thus neither original to Kiikenthal nor to himself. In support of the coalescence theory he marshals numerous arguments, most of which are or have been noticed in this Journal in recording Rose’s concrete researches. History and Homologies of Human Molar Cusps.j — Prof. H. F. Osborn reviews the contributions of A. Fleischmann, J. Taeker, and C. Rose, and maintains the theory previously propounded by Cope and by himself. The primitive form of mammalian molar was a single cone, to which all the other cusps have been successively added. The proto- cone is invariably the anterior lateral (antero-external) cusp in the lower molars, and the anterior lingual (antero-internal) cusp in the upper molars. Beginning with a single-fanged conical reptilian tooth, such as persists in Cetacea, Osborn finds the first departure towards a develop- ment of lateral cusps in the Triassic Dromotherium , the second in the contemporary Microconodon , the third in the Jurassic Sjpalacotherium , the fourth in the Jurassic Ampliitherium, in which are seen the three cusps of the primitive triangle and the first cusp of the talon. In Miacis * Biol. Centralbl., xii. (1892) pp. 024-38. t Anat. Anzeig., vii. (1892) pp. 740-9 (3 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 23 of the lower Eocene the primitive anterior portion (trigonid) of the crown was reduced to the level of the posterior portion (talonid) while retaining all its cusps. The oldest monkey or Lemur known — Anapto- morphus — illustrates the loss of the antero-internal cusp or paraconid. This accounts for the history of all the cusps in the human lower molar. “ Thus, in the rich series of Mesozoic and lower Eocene mammals we can observe the actual rise, succession, and decline of all the six cusps, and do not require any new hypothesis to explain their appearance.” Rudiments of Teeth in Manis.* — Dr. 0. Rose has found, in study- ing Prof. Max Weber’s preparations of Manis embryos, a dental ridge (. Zahnleiste ) in the upper jaw, and even rudiments of teeth in the lower jaw. These rudiments are represented by a club-shaped swelling of the dental ridge and soon disappear. Dentition of Marsupials.! — Dr. C. Rose maintains that the develop- ment of the teeth in Marsupials is essentially like that in other Mammals. The first stage is a ridge of epithelium which grows into the mesoderm. On this appear the rudiments of the first set. In Didelphys these are the incisors, the canine, two premolars, and the first molar. These are constricted off from the ridge which grows inwards and backwards. The posterior molars arise, as Rose has described in man, by the lateral extension of the dental ridge. But while in man the supplementary ridge forms as many replacement teeth as there are of the first set, from that of Marsupials there usually arises only the last premolar. It is more than likely, however, that the last incisors of Perameles, Macropus, and Phalangista are formed from the replacement ridge, i. e. belong to the second set. The last premolar may slip into a gap in the first series (Didelphys, Perameles Doreganus, Belideus hidens , Phalangista Gookii, and Myrmecobius), or it may replace the last premolar of the first set (. Phalangista , Macropus lugens, M. giganteus, &c.). With the exception, then, of the last premolar, and possibly of the last upper incisor of some species, the teeth of Marsupials correspond to permanent milk- teeth. In the reduction of dental replacement the Marsupials seem almost to have overshot the mark. “ Sie haben sich in eine Sackgasse verirrt, aus der kein Ruckweg moglich ist.” Rose seeks to confirm his theory that premolars and molars arise from the fusion of several simple teeth. In the extinct Triacanthodon the premolars are quite like the molars ; the inferior premolar of Macropus lugens is still triconodont, the upper one is in transition to the trituber- cular type ; in M. giganteus the premolars are tritubercular ; and so on. Dental Ridge and “Egg-teeth” in Sauropsida.if — Dr. C. Rose finds in embryos of Sterna Wilsoni a distinct dental ridge ( Zahnleiste ), but no dental rudiments. A slight hint of papillae is due to a folding of the horny epithelium as the beak becomes curved ; and probably this is true also of the well-known papillae of certain parrots. In Chelone Midas the dental ridge was again found, but nothing more. The true “ egg-tooth ” found in reptiles with parchment-like egg-shells is a den- tine tooth situated on the premaxilla, and is quite distinct from the knob * Anat. Anzeig., vii. (1892) pp. 618-22 (4 figs.). f Tom. cit., pp. 639-50, 693-707 (23 figs.). X Tom. cit., pp. 748-58 (14 figs.). 24 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ( Eiscliwiele ) found in all birds, in crocodiles and tortoises, and in Trachy- dosaurus, for this is merely a horny epithelial organ. Life-history and Development of Food and other Fishes.* * * § — Prof. W. C. MTntosli gives us another series of his interesting contributions to this important subject. He begins with a number of details as to young Pleuronectids, and after describing an unknown post-larval form, proceeds to describe the eggs of the Halibut, which have hitherto escaped detection, when ripe ; they were obtained by Mr. Holt at Grimsby. A few unfertilized eggs of the Green Cod have been observed. The eggs of the Pollock and Torsk are next discussed, and they are followed by some notes on the development of Arnoglossus megastoma. Among the remaining subjects on which Prof. MTntosh has notes are the development of the Brill and the eggs of Lophius. Ovary and Intra-Ovarian Egg of Teleosteans.j — Mr. W. L. Calder- wood, who has examined the ovaries of eleven species of Teleosteans, has most complete series of sections of the ovaries of the common dab ( Pleuronecies limanda) and the hake ( Merluccius vulgaris). It would appear that, in all ripening ovaries, ova for three consecutive spawning periods are present, and the ova may, therefore, be spoken of as great, small, and minute. These are described in order. Eggs and Early Stages of Rhombus maximus.J — Mr. E. W. L. Holt has been able to make some observations on the early stages of the Turbot. The usual diameter of the egg is 1*01 mm., and the oil- globule is nearly always *21 mm. The yolk is colourless and homo- geneous ; the markings of the zone form an open network of no regular pattern. The few larvrn which were successfully hatched out lived but a few days ; there is a general tendency in the Turbot’s egg to sink sooner or later after fertilization, and it is prophesied that the suc- cessful culture of a pelagic ovum which assumes a demersal nature at an uncertain period will be difficult. The most peculiar feature of young turbot is the cephalic armature, and Mr. Holt points out the interest of a Pleuronectid passing through a stage in which its cephalic armature is as powerful as, and for the most part homologous with, that of a Percoid or Scorpsenoid. 0. Histology. Invisibility of Living Nuclear Structures. § — Prof. W. Flemming discusses several cases in which living cells and nuclei show almost no structure, though that becomes evident enough after death or after simple technique. Such are the spermatocytes of Amphibia, the nuclei of the so-called poison-glands of the skin of Urodela, the nuclei of the salivary cells of Chironomus plumosus, the germinal vesicles of the ovarian ova of Ascidians, and others. But as the invisible structure is readily made manifest when the elements are killed and treated with simple reagents, the constancy of the observed phenomena is surely an argument against regarding post-mortem appearances as artificial. * Tenth Ann. Rep. of the Fishery Board for Scotland, 1892, pp. 273-322 (4 pis.). t Journ. Marine Biol. Assoc., ii. (1892) pp. 298-312 (2 pis.). X Tom. cit., pp. 399-404. § Amit. Anzeig., vii. (1892) pp. 758 -G4. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 25 Chromatin of Sympathetic Ganglia.* — Dr. F. Vas finds that the chromatin of the sympathetic nerve-cells has a definite structure, that its development keeps pace with that of the organism as a whole and with that of the nerve-cells in particular, that the associated pigment expresses a specific property of individual species, and that in man the chromatin is partly destroyed in old age. The stimulated cell differs from the unstimulated in several features, especially in the enlargement of the nucleus and its movement towards the periphery. Blood of Amphibia. f — Herr M. C. Dekhuyzen finds five distinct kinds of cells in the blood-plasma. The distinctive characters of the adult cells appear only gradually, so that there are unexpectedly great differences between the youngest and the fully developed stages. In analogy with Lowit’s nomenclature he uses the ending “ blast ” for young forms, and “ cyt ” for those wrhich are adult. He distinguishes (1) haemoglobin-free erythroblasts, and erythrocytes or chromocytes, known by their nucleolus ; (2) thromboblasts and thrombocytes, as the “ spindles ” of Eberth and Schimmelbusch may be called ; they are known by their mitochrom ; (3) finely granular leucoblasts or leuco- cytes, known by their pseudopodia and by the tendency of the nucleus to polymorphism and polymerism : (4) eosinophilous leucoblasts (with /2-granulations) and leucocytes (with a-granulations), known by their granulations and the same nuclear characters as (3); (5) klasmatoblasts and klasmatocytes, known by their granules. The various characters of these cells are treated in detail, and it is urged that there is no evidence of any intermediate stages between the different kinds. Cerebro-Spinal Ganglia4 — According to Prof. A. Van Gehuchten the application of the new methods of treating nerve-cells has resulted in showing that the nerve-cells of the spinal ganglia of most Fishes are opposito-bipolar ; each pole is continuous with the cylinder-axis of a nerve-fibre, one of which passes to the medulla and the other to the periphery. The nerve-cells of the spinal ganglia of other Vertebrates are, in the adult, all unipolar ; the single prolongation bifurcates, at a vary- ing distance from the cell, into a central and a peripheral prolongation. In Cyclostomatous Fishes there are in the spinal ganglia of the adult not only both the above kinds of cells, but also others which are inter- mediate ; and this shows that a bipolar may be transformed into a unipolar cell. The same fact is observed in the embryos of Mammals, Birds, and Beptiles. At a certain period in development all the nerve-cells of the spinal ganglia are opposito-bipolar, as in Fishes ; in the course of deve- lopment the form of the cell is modified, and the bipolar cell becomes unipolar. The morphological difference, therefore, which exists between the spinal ganglia of Fishes and other Vertebrates is more apparent than real ; the lower forms retain permanently a condition which is transient in the higher. In all Vertebrates, then, the spinal ganglia have the same signifi- cance ; the cells which form them give rise, in one way or another, to two prolongations which become the cylinder-axes of two nerve-fibres. * Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xl. (1892) pp. 375-89 (1 pi.), t Verhandl. Anat. Gesell., 1892, pp. 90-103 (1 pi.). X Bull. Acad. Eoy. Belgique, lxii. (1892) pp. 117-54 (11 figs.). 26 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO In all Vertebrates one of tlie fibres is central and the other peripheral ; moreover, in a large number of cases the central prolongation is more delicate than the peripheral. The spinal ganglia of Vertebrates ought, then, to be considered as nuclei of real origin for the sensory part of all the spinal nerves, and for the central as well as for the peripheral parts. The researches of the last five years have shown that the fibres of the posterior roots of the spinal nerves, on arriving in the medulla, bifurcate there, and that the two branches of the bifurcation end in the grey matter by terminal ramifications. These fibres do not begin, but end in the medulla. With regard to some of the ganglia situated on the course of the cerebral nerves, it is clear that the ganglia of the fifth, of the glosso- pharyngeal and of the vagus are in all points comparable to the spinal ganglia ; the spiral ganglion of the auditory nerve is also comparable to a spinal ganglion, but the nerve- cells retain the bipolar form. Degeneration and Regeneration of Injured Peripheral Nerves.* — A. Freiherr von Notthafft has made one hundred experiments on dogs, guinea-pigs, and rabbits, in order to study the processes of degeneration and regeneration in injured peripheral nerves. After any injury (burning, crushing, or incision) which totally destroys the nerve-substance at any one spot, there is a degeneration of the whole peripheral portion and of a smaller central portion about 1 • 5 cm. in length. Beside the injured region there is a destruction of medullary and axial fibres as the direct result of the wound. The “ paralytic ” degeneration which follows after forty-eight hours is due to several causes : the loss of fluid narrows the axial fibres, their shrivelling separates the medulla into pieces, the con- traction of the pieces produces a transverse division of the axial cylinder, and so on. A division of nuclei and an increase of the protoplasm in Schwann’s sheath perhaps help in the progressive disruption. The degenerating medulla exudes into the lumen of the sheath a fluid which is gradually absorbed. The medullary sheath does not undergo fatty degeneration, though infiltration of fat may occur, nor does it undergo chemical modification after the manner supposed by Neumann and Eichhorst, nor do leucocytes help, nor is the proliferation of nuclei the sole cause of degeneration, as Ranvier maintains. The degeneration spreads very rapidly from centre to periphery. It is likely that the proliferating nuclei of Schwann’s sheath help both in degeneration and regeneration. With the origin of new axial filaments they have nothing to do. The new nerve-fibres always grow from the old central stumps, and the growth is continuous from centre to periphery. They appear about the eighth or ninth day, and begin to get a medullary sheath about the tenth or eleventh day. It seems likely that the new Schwann’s sheath is formed from the cells of the old one. The regene- ration of severed nerves is most likely if the ends be tied, or, when that is impossible, if another piece be interpolated by means of silk thread between the two ends. Free Intra-epidermic Nerve-endings.| — Prof. A. Van Gehuchten, applying the method of Golgi to the skin of rats and mice, finds that * Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., lv. (1892) pp. 134-88 (1 pi., 2 figs.). t Verhandl. Anat. Geselh, 1892, pp. 66-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 27 the subcutaneous nerve-plexus is a true plexus, and not a network ; the nerve-fibres which form it never anastomose with one another, though they interlace in a very complicated way. The number of fine nerve- fibrils which penetrate vertically into the epidermis is truly incalculable ; in good preparations a very forest of fine nervous branchlets may be seen penetrating the epidermis and conveying sensibility to all points of the skin. Golgi’s Method and the Distribution of Nerve-fibres.* — At the annual meeting of the German Anatomical Society, in June 1892, a discussion followed a paper by Dr. Retzius on the peripheral mode of termination of auditory nerves. Prof. Waldeyer thought it a matter for consideration whether Golgi’s method really showed the final termina- tions of the nerves ; Prof. Claus thought that there was no doubt that in Invertebrates there was passage between nerve-fibres and peripheral sensory cells ; Prof. Kolliker thought it possible that in lower animals nerve-fibres arose from epithelial cells, though it was not the case in higher forms. Prof. Merkel related the experience of a worker in his laboratory who used the methylen-blue method. Dr. Retzius remarked that the images of epithelial and sensory organs obtained by Golgi’s method were quite sharp and certain. Herr Zimmermann gave an account of the connection between sensory cells and nerves as shown by Ramon’s method. y. General. Survey of Fishing Grounds, West Coast of Ireland.f — Mr. E. W. L. Holt, in a report to which Prof. A. C. Haddon prefixes an introductory note,f gives a very valuable account of the marine fauna of the West Coast of Ireland. Echinoderms appear to be the chief food of the Piper, Haddock, and Common Dab, while they are largely eaten by others, and occasionally by Cods and Skate. Annelids are the chief food of the Lemon Dab, Pole Dab, and Common Sole ; Gephyreans are occa- sionally eaten by the Plaice and Common Sole ; Nemerteans are rarely eaten by the Cod. Of this last, as of some others, the chief food is- Crustaceans. Lamellibranchs form the chief food of the Plaice, and are largely eaten by the Spotted Ray. Gastropods and Cephalopods are less frequently eaten. Some fish live chiefly or almost altogether on other fish ; Sand-eels appear to be the most universally persecuted, and it is noted that the Dragonet and Weever are not infrequent victims, in spite of their formidable armature. Plankton of Plymouth.§ — Mr. E. J. Bles was engaged during the past summer in investigating the surface-fauna of the Plymouth waters. It appears, during that period, to have been exceptionally small, and it is possible that one may associate with this fact three others — the Plymouth mackerel fishery was a failure, dog-fishes were not obtainable during June and July, and Aurelia aurita , which in summer is usuallv common, was extremely scarce in the Sound and tidal waters of Plymouth. * Verhancll. Anat. Gesell., 1892, pp. 79-81. t Scientific Proc. R. Dublin Soc., vii. (1892) pp. 225-177. X Tom. cit., pp. 221-4. § Journ. Marine Biol. Assoc., ii. (1892) pp. 340-3. 28 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The Hydroid medusa Obelia lucifera was very plentiful throughout June; on adding a saturated solution of corrosive sublimate to the sea- water containing them the animals were stimulated to phosphorescence, and the position of each medusa was indicated by a small clear ring of blue light round the margin of the umbrella. There was an abundance, on July 4th, of the young of the Tunicate Oikopleura lophocerca. On the same day there was a great increase in the number of Dinoflagellates, and oceanic Radiolaria of Haeckel’s group Acantharia were also found. It seems that the surface-layers of the sea are, with their plankton, dis- placed through considerable distances by the prolonged or powerful action of the wind in one direction. The interesting Archiannelid Protodrilus leuckarti, not hitherto recorded from any locality other than the Mediterranean and the Black Sea, has been found. Marine Invertebrate Fauna of Plymouth.* — Mr. W. Garstang has some notes on the collecting operations undertaken by the Marine Biological Laboratory in 1892. The rare Leucosolenia lacunosa was dredged in 25 fms. ; this calcareous sponge was attached by its slender stalk to an old egg-case of Scyllium canicula , which was itself adhering to the stem of a Gorgonid. Tubiclava cornucopise, first dredged in the Shetlands, is represented by a colony of 90 to 100 polypes. Haliclystus octoradiatus has been discovered in hundreds. Of the Anthozoa the Eloactis Mazeli of Jourdain is an interesting addition to the British fauna, and, on the whole, the Actinians of Plymouth offer a valuable field for special investigation. The researches of Mr. Gamble show that there exists a Rhabdoccele fauna unparalleled in the number of its species. Of Annelids the dredge is constantly bringing up species whose presence has been hitherto unsuspected ; Myxicola has been added to the list of Plymouth Annelids, and Staurocephalus rubrovittatus has been found on several occasions. Phoronis is quite plentiful in certain parts of the Sound, and its beautiful larva has been a feature of tho autumn tow-nettings. Crisia denticulata , a Polyzoon which Mr. Harmer reported to be rare at Plymouth, has been found abundantly in the deeper waters a few miles outside the breakwater. The principal additions to the Gastropod fauna have been from among the Opisthobranchia. Ampliorina cserulea , a species which has not been met with on English coasts since the time of Montagu, was dredged on September the 12th. Perhaps the most interesting addition of all has been the rediscovery of D’Orbigny’s Stiliger bellula. A species of Amphipod which appears to be very locally distributed, Unciola crenatipalma , is found plentifully on a muddy bottom at a depth of twenty fathoms. The male of Anthura gracilis has been found and confirms the prediction of Norman and Stebbing concerning the secon- dary sexual characters of the male of this species. Of the Schizopod Crustaceans, Macromysis flexuosa has been very abundant during the past summer, countless myriads being found close to the water’s edge in the estuary of the Yealm. Gastrosaccus normani , which does not appear to have been seen on our coasts since 1871, was taken in the surface net on the night of September the 21st. Among the Decapoda Achseus Cranchi is a valuable addition. * Joum. Marine Biol. Assoc., ii. (1892) pp. 333-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 20 Excretory System of Animals.* — Prof. L. C. Cosmovici presented to tlie second International Congress of Zoology a report on “ What is meant by * aquiferous system, segmental organs, excretory organs, nephridia.’ ” The following are his conclusions : — In every animal organism there is performed the important physio- logical process of excretion, which is in most cases effected by glands which are more or less simple, more or less metameric, and either reduced to a pair of more or less twisted tubes, or consisting of paired renal or nephridial glands. We must expel from our scientific nomenclature the terms segmental and excretory, for in the first Williams comprehended the gonads and their efferent ducts, and by excretion most anatomists understand the evacuation of any product whatever. In most aquatic animals there is a more or less well organized aquiferous system, which is either connected with the circulatory apparatus, when it allows of the introduction into the interior of certain quantities of water necessary for the erection of locomotor organs (Echinoderms) ; or it is more or less in relation with the digestive apparatus (many Protozoa, Sponges, Rotifers). In animals which have no nephridia the products of dis- assimilation probably fall into the aquiferous system and are thus evacuated ; this fact does not authorize us in considering this system as homologous with that of the nephridia. We must not confuse the efferent ducts of the generative products with the segmental organs, as is so often done in Chsetopoda, for the latter appear first and often aid the gonads by allowing them to graft on to them their oviduct or sperm-ducts. The more or less vesicular tubes of the nephridia always terminate by more or less ampullseform extremities which are ciliated internally, and they never end by orifices, unless the generative ducts are connected with them. Studies in Developmental Mechanics.! — Dr. Hs. Driesch has pub- lished further investigations and reflections on this subject. Increase of temperature separates the two first segmentation cells in Sphser echinus , and there result two blastulac loosely connected, or separate from one another. The removal of one cell from the 4-cell stage of Echinus does not hinder the formation of a normal larva. Indeed, a single quarter can develope normally. Warmth may slightly alter the character of the segmentation, and yet a normal organism may result. The egg-membrane is unessential in segmentation. Segmenting ova abnormally altered by pressure may still form typical Plutei. Stages deformed to such an extent that they are two-layered plates with eight cells in each layer may still turn out normal Plutei — a fact against His’s theory of the specific importance of individual blastomeres. What should form one pole forms the two sides, and what should form the other pole forms both, — which is certainly a notable change. Without inhibiting de- velopment, portions may be removed from the segmenting ovum, but the portion left must not be less than about a quarter. All these facts point to the conclusion that the blastomeres of Echinidse must be very homogeneous. Ova which divide simultaneously into four are regarded by Fol and by the brothers Hertwig as doubly fertilized. Assuming this, Driesch notes that the whole rhythm of division is in these cases * Congres Internal, de Zoologie, II. i. (1892) pp. 16-40. t Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zoo!., lv. (1892) pp. 1-62 (3 pie.). See this Journal, 1892, p. 13. 30 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO twofold; thus, tlie 16-cell stage is a double 8-cell stage, but the gastrula stage is never reached. The rest of Driesch’s memoir is occupied with a discussion of general morphological and setiological questions on which his experiments shed light. B. INVERTEBBATA. Mollusca. y. Gastropoda. Repair of Shell of Helix aspersa.* — Prof. R. Moynier de Villepoix cut away from a young hibernating Helix aspersa several millimetres of the peristome and test, and left it under a bell-jar without food. On about the third day the denuded part of the mantle was seen to be covered with a greyish layer of calcareous matter, and the peristome was completely reformed. We see, then, that Helix is not only capable of repairing breaches in its shell, but it can, at any rate when it is young, completely reform the extreme edge, which then continues to grow normally. Growth and Structure of Shell in Yelates conoideus and other Neritidse-t — Mr. B. B. Woodward describes the remarkable mode of shell growth in Velates conoideus ( = Neritina schmideliana , = Nerita perversa ), and compares it with other Neritidse. He first discusses a series of Neritina species which exhibit stages in the degree of removal of the columella and inner walls of the whorls, and in the development of the septum. The genus Velates is represented by two species — V. conoideus Lamk. and V. equinus Bez. — which occur together in the lower and middle Eocene of the Paris basin. In V. equinus the shell growth is normal. So far as the myophore is concerned the shell of Velates conoideus offers in the growth of the individual a series of conditions which in the recent forms find their parallel in distinct species ; in its earlier stages the paries and the incipient septum go to form the myophore; in the later period the septum alone plays that part, as in Nerita crepidularia. “ Put in homely phraseology, the mode of enlarging the shell in Velates reminds one of nothing so much as of the Irishman who raised his roof by digging out the floor of his cabin.” The very hard periostracal layer consists in the main of calcium carbonate with a siliceous residue. The crystalline layer is peculiar in the arrangement of its plates ; the presence of aragonite in addition to calcite is highly probable. Slugs of Ireland.^ — Hr. R. F. Scharff has undertaken tho exami- nation of the Slugs of Ireland chiefly with a view of solving some of the difficulties regarding the distribution of terrestrial animals. Notwith- standing that the sea is deadly both to Slugs and their eggs, he finds that those of Ireland are closely related to, and are in most cases identical with those of the Continent of Europe. Of the thirteen species found in Ireland, twelve are identical with those of Great Britain. Under each species the author treats of the external characters, the * Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xvii. (1892) pp. 30-1. t Proc. Zool. Soc., 1892, pp. 528-40 (2 pis.). X Sci. Trans. R. Dublin Soc., iv. (1891) pp. 513-58 (2 pis.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 31 anatomy, reproduction, habitat, food, and general distribution, but the anatomical remarks have been cut rather short. Structure and Relationships of the Solenoconcha.* — Dr. L. H. Plate begins by describing the structure of Dentalium (_D. dentale , D. vulgare , D. rufescens) and of Siphonopoda ( Siphodentalium vitreum, Siphoentalis ciffinis, Cadulus subfusiformis ), and then discusses their systematic position. Gastropods they resemble in the radula, the jaw- plate, the unpaired shell, the retractor muscles, the unpaired gonads, and the buccal nervous system. Among Gastropods the Rhipidoglossa resemble Solenoconcha in bilateral symmetry, distinct head, oesophageal pouches, separate sexes, and perhaps even in the disposition of the mantle. The Solenoconcha resemble Chitonidae in their symmetry, in the sub-radular organ, and in the oesophageal glands. Still more does the Patella type resemble that of Dentalium. With Lamellibranchs Solenogastres Mollusc also, as Lacaze-Duthiers has urged, the Solenoconcha present affinities, e.g. symmetry, nervous system, nephridia, &c. But the conclusion to which Plate comes is this, that the Pro- Rhipidoglossa, ancestors of the Rhipidoglossa, are the roots whence the Solenoconcha and the Lamelli- branchs have sprung. With Grobben’s idea that the Solonoconcha are related to Cephalopods the author entirely disagrees. His views are expressed in the accompanying diagram. Molluscoida. a. Tunicata. Budding of Botryllus.f— Mr. A. Oka has made a study of the process of budding in Botryllus. His results point clearly to the meso- dermic nature of the peribranchial sac, which arises from the gut like the coelom pouches in Amphioxus. He believes that the peribranchial space is a secondary coelom. The vascular cavity is continuous with * Zool. Jahrb., v. (1892) pp. 301-86 (4 pis.). See this Journal, 1892, p. 465. t Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., liv. (1892) pp. 521-47 (3 pis.). 32 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the segmentation cavity and represents the primary coelom ; the peri- cardial cavity arises independently of the peribranchial cavity, but is probably analogous with it. The bud developes from two layers, ectodermic and endomesodermic. The mesoderm is separated by the formation of the lateral diverticula. From the ectoderm, the body-wall, the inhalent and the exhalent tubes, and the brain develope. From the endoderm, the gut, the branchial sac, the hypophysis, &c., develope. The mesoderm forms the peribranchial sac and the heart. In the wall of the peribranchial sac the reproductive cells occur, and give rise on the one hand to the ova, on the other hand to the endo-mesodermic portion of the bud. The thin ectodermic layer which shares in the bud secondarily acquires an embryonic character. / 3 . Bryozoa. Structure of Rhabdopleura.* — Dr. G. Herbert Fowler has a pre- liminary note on his observations on Rhabdopleura ; all the new anatomical features which he has been able to detect are in entire agreement with the structure of Cephalodiscus , and Rhabdopleura may be taken to form a third member of the order Hemichordata. The epistome is found to correspond to the proboscis of Balanoglossus and Cephalodiscus, and, as in them, it contains a portion of the coelom, completely shut off from the other portions. The collar region contains the central section of the coelom, divided into right and left halves by median septa ; each half communicates with the exterior by means of its own collar canals. On the posterior face of this cavity there is an ectodermal thickening, which corresponds in position with the nerve- plate of Cephalodiscus and the nerve-tube of Balanoglossus. There is a rod-like structure, apparently half cellular, half gelatinoid, which corresponds in origin, structure, and jmsition with the notochord of Cephalodiscus. The most notable part of the intestine is a short semi- circular diverticulum, which occurs also in the just-named form. The absence of a proboscis pore or pores, and the absence of gill-slits are two negative characters in which Rhabdopleura differs from the two known Hemichordata, but Dr. Fowler thinks the points of agreement are so striking that it is impossible to separate the three organisms. Arthropoda. Origin of Tracheae of Arthropoda from Setiparous Sacs.j — Mr. H. M. Bernard attempts to solve the following problem : — “ Certain Chaetopod Annelids migrated on to the land at an early geological period, and are now represented by the Tracheata, so called because of their breathing organs which are chitin-lined invaginations of the outer cuticle — whence came their respiratory organs ? ” He deduces the tracheae from setiparous glands, and urges that this harmonizes many of the anomalies presented by the tracheal systems of the Arthropoda. The diffuse arrangement of the tracheae of Peripatus is derived from the bristle-glands which were scattered over the surface of the body, while the regular metameric arrangement of the tracheae * Proc. Roy. Soc. Loud., lii. (1892) pp. 132-4 (3 figs.), f Zool. Jahrb. (Anat. u. Ontog.), v. (1892) pp. 511-24 (3 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. seen in the llexapoda is explained by referring them back to the acicular glands of vanished dorsal parapodia. Specialization of parts of the body explains the incompleteness of the metameric arrangement in the adult Hexapod. The only difficulty seen by the author is to be found in the arrangements exhibited by the Arachnida, for they possess coxal glands, with which apparently there is nothing to correspond in the Hexapoda. It is urged, however, that these glands may be left out of consideration without seriously affecting the derivation of tracheae from setiparous glands ; if, however, it can be shown that the coxal glands of the Arachnida are developments of Annelidan acicular or setiparous glands the arguments used in the present paper would be considerably strengthened. a. Insecta. Development of Melolontha vulgaris.* — M. Y. Raspail has some notes on the development of M. vulgaris , which like many Coleoptera, has a very long larval life ; it is remarkable, however, that the length of this larval life may be three years or four. This difference has been erroneously attributed to differences in temperature and food ; the author finds that it is really due to differences in humidity, for a genera- tion of four years has been found to correspond with a series of dry seasons, and the three-year form to two damp years. Structure and Life-history of Encyrtus fusicollis. f — Prof E. Bugnion gives an account of this small hymenopterous parasite. The eggs are laid in the second half of May when the larvae of Hyponomeuta (the host) are about a centimetre in length. By one puncture the female introduces a chain of 50-120 ova into the perivisceral cavity. Some- times the same larva is punctured by two or three individuals. The membranous tube enclosing the embryos seems to be a cuticular forma- tion of an internal epithelium which is derived from the fusion of the amniotic or serous envelopes of the embryos. The granular substance surrounding the embryos within the tube is probably vitelline, but it increases by osmosis from the lymph of the host. It nourishes the larvae until the 20th to 25th June, when they moult, rupture the tube, and begin to feed directly upon the lymph of their host. As the time of metamorphosis approaches, the larvae devour the viscera, and each becomes about the 7th July encapsuled in a chamber. The host dries up; the nymph period lasts about three weeks; the hatching occurs from 27th July to 2nd August. In one host the parasites are generally either male or female, the former probably the result of parthenogenetic development, the latter of early fertilization. Pairing occurs im- mediately after liberation and seems to last only for a few seconds. * Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xvi. (1891) pp. 271-5. f Bee. Zool. Suisse, v. (1890) pp. 435-70 (2 pis.), and 1892, pp. 471-534 (4 pis.). This final part of the ‘ Recueil Zoologique Suisse ’ (October 1892) contains the sad announcement, “ Le 13 mars 1892, M. le Professeur Hermann Fol, directeur du Bee. Zool. Suisse, s’embarquait au Havre, h bord du yacht V Aster arme en vue d’une campagne scientifique. . . . Plusieurs mois se sont ecoules depuis son depart et l’on est encore sans nouvelles du yacht et de ses passagers. Les recherches entreprises par le Ministere de l’lnstruction publique et par la famille de M. Fol sont restees infructueuses.” 1893. D 31 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO International Relations of Lomechusa.* — Herr E. Wasmann con- tinues his account of the way in which Lomechusa strumosa is received and treated by various ants. The beetle was transferred suddenly from a nest of Formica rufa to one of F. pratensis and was hospitably received. By F. exsecta the guest was received in friendly fashion, but with some curiosity ; it was not fed nor much licked. In independent colonies of F. fusca , the intruder was at first assaulted, but was soon being licked and fed. A similar story is told of F. rufibarbis and F. fusco-rujibarbis. When Lomechusa was introduced into a mixed colony of Polyergus rufescens and its helper F. fusca , the latter tended to attack the visitor, but soon became hospitable, while the master ants paid no heed. The large species Camponotus ligniperdus was far from hospitable ; the first Lomechusa introduced was speedily beheaded ; a second was treated less impatiently but was eventually killed ; and all subsequent attempts at introduction failed. To Lasius fuliginosus the visitor was not welcome, nor did it seem to feel at home among its far from fragrant hosts. So with L. niger and L. umbratus the reception was hostile or at best indifferent. An introduction also failed with Myrmica scabrinodis , M. ruginodis , M. Isevinodis , Tapinoma erraticum , Tetramorium csespitum , Leptothorax tuberum, Formicoxenus nitidulus. The international relations are perfect between Lomechum and all colonies of F. sanguinea , F. rufa , and F. pratensis . But as has been noticed above there are numerous cases in which a hostile reception soon gives place to hospitality. Herr Wasmann believes that the friendliness of F. sanguinea to Lomechusa is quite instinctive, but the recognition depends on the fact that the guest makes a pleasant appeal to the senses of its hosts. It is important to note its peculiar smell, its yellow secreting tuft, the aromatic secretion which the ants lick, and its initia- tive in approaching the ants and touching them with its antennae. Herr Wasmann gives a careful analysis of the whole matter, and promises an account of Atemeles and its international relations. Facts concerning Sex and Reproduction in Hymenoptera.f — Herr C. Verhoeff* describes under the name “Proterothesia” the remarkable fact that in the nest of Fossoria, Vesparia, and their parasites, the tenants of the anterior cells are male, those in the posterior cells female. This is the case with Crabro capitosus, C. sambucicola , Ehopalum clavipes , Trypoxylon figulus , Chevrieria unicolor , Prosopis brevicornis , and Osmia rubicola. No exceptional case is known to the author, but the nests may be wholly male or wholly female. Of these he gives eleven different cases. “ Proterocraty ” is another fact — the individuals which appear first among the males or among the females are stronger than those which come after them. The “ Proterandry ” described by W. H. Muller prevents pairing between the sexes of one nest. Proterothesia and proterandry are correlated facts ; in conjunction only are they of importance. It seems likely that the nutritive supply has much to do with the proterothesia and proterocraty. Another frequently observed fact is polyandry. There is not only a struggle between males, but the large number of males allows a selection of the fittest among the fit, and * Biol. Central!)!, xii. (1892) pp. 638-69. t Zool. Anzeig., xv. (1892) pp. 362-70. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 35 the strongest are first in the field. The author’s facts form an im- portant contribution to the biology of sex and reproduction. Use of Spines in Nymphs of Hymenoptera.* — Herr C. Verhoeff finds that the spines of Antliracine nymphs (Diptera) are used not only in boring but in locomotion, as in Cossidae among Lepidoptera, but in the fossorial and other Hymenoptera the spines and tubercles are not locomotor but help in the last larval moulting. This, which is probably the primitive function, the author terms “ helcodermatic.” Life-history of Phryganidse.f — Grafin Maria von Linden has some interesting notes on Phryganid larvae, apparently Leptocerinae. She describes the protective gelatinous envelope of the eggs, the manner in which the larvae escape, the formation of the larval case, and so on. Proboscis of Diptera pupipara.J — Herr F. H. Miiggenburg de- scribes in great detail the proboscis of Melophagus ovinus , and also of Lipoptena cervi, Hippobosca equina , Anapera pallida , Braula cseca , and Nycteribia Leachii. His results go to show that Hippoboscidae and Braulidae are nearly allied to Muscidae. This conclusion is based on anatomical and embryological facts, but is corroborated by the occur- rence of species of Musca with reproductive habits like the Pupipara, and by the apparently oviparous habit of Braula cseca. 5. Arachnida. Distribution of Spiders.§ — Dr. Marx finds that the Arctic Spider- fauna is composed of the ten families whose species constitute the main bulk of the entire Spider-fauna of the world ; they are cosmopolitans and are found almost everywhere where animal life is possible. The Arctic genera are, without exception, those which also occur in other regions of the world, and, as yet, no one genus has been found to be original to that zone of eternal ice and snow. This is a very remark- able fact, since in all other groups of Arthropods the polar fauna is distinguished by special and peculiar forms. Very many species occur which live in milder climates and under entirely different conditions and influences. The differences between the faunas of the eastern and western hemispheres are slight. Malayan and Papuan Spiders. || — Sig. T. Thorell describes (in Latin) 462 Indo-Malayan spiders, including 33 new genera — Euetria , Cnodalia , Milonia , Callinethis , Orsinome , Limoxera, Mitoscelis, Stethopoma , Perania , Badumna, Astratea, Urgulania , Libania , Boloihymus , Musseus , Narcseus , Hedana , Peltorhynchus, Micrccyllus , Zametopias, Nydia, Lycosella, Passiena , B,liomochirus, Tapinattus, Epocilla , Chrysilla, Gelotia, Oreevia , Bathippus , Carrhotus , Bindax, Nicylla. Two new Hydrachnids from the Rhaetikon.^— Herr F. Koenike describes Zsckokkea g. n., most nearly related to PLydropkanles and * Zool. Anzeig., xv. (1892) pp. 355-60 (5 figs.) t Biol. Centralbl., xii. (1892) pp. 523-7. X Arch. Naturgeschichte, lviii. (1892) pp. 287-332 (2 pis.). § Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash., ii. pp. 186-200. See Amer. Natural., xxvi. (1892) pp. 968 and 9. || Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, xi. (1891-2) pp. 1-491. f Zool. Anzeig, xv. (1892) pp. 320-6 (4 figs.). D 2 36 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Brachjpates , with Z. oblonga as the species ; and Feltria g. n., with F. minuta as the species. Hydra chnidae.* * * § — Herr F. Koenike has some criticisms to make on Piersig’s recent papers on Hydrachnids. These criticisms refer to the specific characters of Arrenurus bisulcicodulus Piersig, to Piersig’s account of the nymph stages of Brachypoda ( Axona ) versicolor , and other forms, and to various questions of purely systematic interest. Freshwater Mites.f — Herr R. Piersig describes the larvae of Midea orbiculata Bruz, Mideopsis depressa Neum., and has notes on Axona versicolor , Pachygaster tau insignatus, Marica musculus, Hydrodroma , and others. South American Pantopoda.J — Hr. W. Sehimkewitsch has described the Pantopoda collected on the ‘ Yettor Pisani ’ expedition. They include the following new species : — Tanystylum Bohrnii , T. calicirostre , T. Chierchise, Ammothea Wilsoni, besides Pallenopsis flnminensis Kr., Phoxichilidium longicolle Ph., Phoxichilus charybdseus Dohrn, and Nymphon gracile Leach. A useful table of the species of Tanystylum is given. €. Crustacea. Habits of Gelasimus annulipes.§ — Dr. A. Alcock finds that the enormously developed chela of the male of this common Indian crab is two and a half times the greatest length, and one and a half times the greatest breadth of the whole body ; it is forty per cent, of the entire weight of the animal, and is of a beautiful cherry-red colour which fades to rose-pink. Whether this chela serves as a stopper to the mouth of the burrow or as a nuptial support, it is certainly, in this species, used as a club in the contests of the rival males and is a signal to charm and allure the females. If a female (the number of females in the cold weather is much less than that of the males) approaches the burrow of a male, the latter displays the greatest excitement, raising itself on its hindmost legs, dancing and stamping, and frantically waving its beauti- fully coloured big claw. When used as a club, these little crabs make savage backhanded sweeps at each other with their chelae, which appear to serve also as a shears. Germinal Area and Dorsal Organ of Gammarus pulex.|| — Prof. R. S. Bergh points out that in very young stages the germinal streak of Gammarus pulex lies transversely across one half of the egg, and that it gradually twists round, through a right angle, until its longitudinal axis is in a line with that of the ovum. The dorsal organ, regarded as originally asymmetrical in position, is not really so. From the first it lies on the middle of the back. The germinal streak changes its position ; the dorsal organ does not. * Zool. Anzeig., xv. (1892) pp. 263-8 (2 figs.). t Tom. eit., pp. 338-43 (7 figs.). X Atti (Mem.) R. Accad. Lincei Roma, vi. (1890) pp. 329-47 (1 pi.). § Administr. Rep. Marine Survey of India, 1891-2. See Ann. and Mag., x. (1892) pp. 415-6. U Zool. Anjzeig., xv. (1892) pp. 268-71. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 37 Mid-gut of Artemia.* — Prof. J. Frenzel describes the lining epithe- lium and the process of secretion in Artemia salina , and in an Argentine species. Special attention is directed to the hair-fringe of the cells. This the author supposes to have a protective function, and suggests that it may be saturated with an anti-enzyme. The cells show a longitudinal striation which the author interprets as significant of a mechanical supporting framework. Towards the hind region of the gut the lining cells show minute crystalline needles of a red colour. Frenzel believes in two kinds of secretory epithelium, that in which the cells persist as permanent glands, and that in which they perish in secreting and are regenerated. In Artemia a vesicle forms in the secretory cell, the cell increases in size, the hair-fringe is lost, the nucleus disappears, and the cell bursts. Sometimes, however, in the anterior part of the mid-gut, cells are set free without any vesicle-formation ; they burst into fine granules. As to absorption, it is maintained that this may occur in Artemia and in other Arthropods, &c., at any part of the food-canal, but there is at the same time division of labour, for the fore-part of the mid- gut is more secretory, the hind-part more absorptive. The author adds a note on the mid-gut cells of caterpillars during pupation. The cylinder-cells have more or less red contents (in Sphinx, Helias, CEceticus, &c.). Before and during pupation these red cells are extruded, as if secretion continued although the gut is empty. Early Development of Cirripedia.f— Mr. T. T. Groom publishes an abstract of observations made at Naples and Plymouth. The size of the ovum has much more relation to that of the nauplius than to that of the adult. Fertilization takes place in the mantle-cavity before the cir- cumvitelline membrane is formed. After fertilization the egg diminishes in size, and commences to undergo rhythmical contractions, which do not cease till the protoplasmic and yolk-portions are completely sepa- rated ; the former generally collects at the anterior or larger pole, and the latter at the posterior or smaller. When the nucleus divides one daughter-nucleus remains in the protoplasm, and the other passes into the yolk, the elements of which it has the power of transforming into protoplasm. The yolk becomes gradually covered by the successive emergence of fresh cells, and this process is accompanied by the division of the cells cut off from it. The yolk, indeed, may be regarded as having the value of a single cell (macromere), which gives off a suc- cession of blastomeres (micromeres). The point where the blastoderm last covers the yolk nearly always represents the blastopore, and the nucleus which gives rise to both endoderm and mesoderm arises at or close to the same spot. After separation of the epiblast the yolk-cell or macromere still remains as a cell with a single nucleus ; it represents both mesoblast and hypoblast ; it immediately divides into two cells each of which contains mesoblastic and hypoblastic elements. The mesoblast is formed by the cutting off in succession of segments from each of the two meso-hypoblast cells, and these form a plug of rapidly dividing cells just in front of the closed blastopore. When all the mesoblastic cells are cut off the two volk-cells remain as the first two hypoblast cells. These last become divided into smaller cells equiva- * Zool. Jahrb., v. (1892) pp. 248-70 (1 pi.). f Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond., lii. (1892) pp. 158-62. 38 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO lent to tlie secondary yolk-pyramids of Decapods. Each yolk-pyramid is, later on, converted into an endoderm cell by radial contraction in a centrifugal direction ; the archenteric cavity arises by the separation thus caused of the central portions of the pyramids from one another. The appendages are marked out first by two transverse furrows which do not extend on to the ventral surface ; the antennules, antennas, and mandibles are probably serially homologous, and all may represent primitively postoral appendages. The body-cavity of the nauplius arises as a mixed blastocoele and schizoccele, and soon forms a cavity continuous from end to end of the body. The nervous system shows from the first a complex structure, especially in the Balanids, where it is most specialized in the Balaninae. It seems from the first to include the ganglia supplying the antennules, as well as the represen! ative of the archi-cerebrum. The antennae and mandibles are respectively in close relation with the circum-cesophageal connections and subcesophageal ganglion. There is a most remarkable agreement between the nauplii of the different species in the general structure of the carapace, labrum, &c., and as this extends to the minutest detail in the case of the appendages it is clear that the features in question have been inherited from some stage of the common ancestor. On the other hand there are nearly always such differences in the new-laid ova as to allow of the separation of genera or even of species. The agreement in the development of Balanus and Lepas , stage by stage, shows that the ancestor of the Thoracica underwent a metamor- phosis similar to that of the present members of the group, and that, therefore, the Nauplius- and Cypris-stages were not evolved within it. Where variations occur, the variable features are the same in all the species ; the most conspicuous of them are those which affect the processes of cell-division. The size, shape, and colour of the ova and embryos of a species vary not inconsiderably, and though the nauplii differ somewhat in size and shape no conspicuous variations occur in structure. Vermes. a. Annelida- Anomalies of Segmentation in Annelids.* — Dr. C. J. Cori describes an abnormality in Lunibricus terrestris , one of the median segments being divided into two on the right side. He found similar intercalated segments in Hermodice carunculata, Lumbriconereis , Halla parthenopeia , and Diopatra neapolitana , and is inclined to refer the abnormality to very favourable developmental conditions which resulted in unusually rapid growth and consequent “ slips ” in segmentation. Possibly these cases may be of interest in connection with the theory of metamerism, for instance, in bridging the gulf between the irregular segmentation occurring in Nemerteans and the regular segmentation of Annelids. Earthworms from the Malay Archipelago. t — Dr. R. Horst gives an account of the earthworms collected during his travels in the Malay Archipelago, by Prof. Weber. In all twenty-one species were collected, * Zeitschr. f, Wiss. Zool.. liv. (1892) pp. 509-78 (1 pi.) t Zoolog. Ergebn. einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Iudien, ed. by M. Weber, ii. (1892) pp. 28-77 (3 pis.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 39 eight of which are new ; it has been found necessary to establish two new genera which are called Glyphidrilus ( G . weberi sp. n.) and Amodri- lus (A. quadrangulus sp. n.), both of which belong to the Geoscolecidae. Species of Acanthodrilidas, all belonging to the genus Benhamia , are now for the first time described from the Indo-Malayan region. The presence of Desmogaster in Sumatra is a new point of agreement between the earthworm-fauna of the Indian continent and that of the Malay Archipelago. A number of anatomical details are given, and there are critical notes on the work of cotemporaneous observers; with regard to the theory that the caudal zone of Protoscolex is a zone of growth, Dr. Horst thinks that there is not sufficient ground for accepting it. The largest specimen of Perichseta musica collected measured 440 mm. in length. Six species of Perionyx are enumerated and a key is given by which they may be distinguished. British Tree- and Earth-Worms.* — The Rev. H. Friend remarks that no attention has been given in this country to the study of tree-worms, whose chief service consists in reducing useless timber to vegetable mould. Thanks, however, to the works of Eisen, Rosa, and Levinsen, he has been able to determine all the tree-worms which have as yet been detected in this country. He has found Allolobophora ( Dendrobsena ) celtica Rosa, A. ( D .) Boeckii Eisen, A. (D.) subrubicunda F. ; this last is known to anglers as the Cockspur or Gilt-tail ; A. ( D .) constricta R., A. (D.) arborea E., and A. (D.) Eiseni Levinsen. A tabular view is given of these six species. The author next describes a new British species of Lumbricus , which he calls L. rubescens ,f which has been found in York- shire, Middlesex, Sussex, and elsewhere. A. revision follows of the genus Lumbricus , of which four species are recognized, — L. terrestris L., Ij. rubescens F., L. rubellus Hoffm., and L. purpureus Eisen ; a revised synonymy and a tabular view of the species is given. New English Genus of Aquatic Oligochseta.J — Dr. W. B. Benham has discovered at Goring-on-Thames a new form of aquatic Oligochsete, which he calls SparganopJiilus ( S . tamesis ) and which belongs to his family Rhinodrilidae. All the specimens were found among the roots and the lower parts of the leaves of the bur -reed ( Sparganium ramosum ) ; it seems probable that, like Criodrilus, the new worm spends the greater part of the year at the bottom and only comes to the banks during August and September for the purposes of reproduction. S. tamesis is a delicate, pinkish worm, three to four inches long ; the surface of the body exhibits a lovely violet to peacock-blue iridescence ; at the anterior end the pink tint deepens, owing to the large hearts -which are found there. The worm is very strong and active, and feels wiry and firm, almost like a Nematode. The author gives a detailed account of the anatomy, and points out that Sparganophilus is a Rhinodrilid which, having become aquatic in habit, has undergone certain modifications, which give it at first sight a resemblance to Criodrilus , an aquatic Lumbricid. It has lost its gizzard ; * Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., xxiv. (1892) pp. 292-315 (1 pi.). See also Nature, xlvi. (1892) pp. 621-3, where no complete reference to the J. Linn. Soc. is given. t Mr. C. H. Hurst, Nature, xlvii. p. 31, thinks this is Lumbricus festivus Savigny. J Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxxiv. (1892) pp. 155-79 (2 pis.). 40 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the nephridia have disappeared from the anterior somites ; the coelomic epithelial cells surrounding the nephridia are vesicular in character ; a vascular network on the gut has broken down to form a sinus ; and there are no dorsal pores. As the home of the Rhinodrilidae is America, the occurrence in England of a member of the family is very striking, but the Thames is visited by all sorts of traffic, and the cocoons may have been brought over with timber, or among the roots of some water-plants, such as Anacharis alsinastrum which has increased in our rivers. One point in which Sparganophilus is very remarkable is the super- ficial position of the sperm-duct, which becomes subepidermic ; such a position for the duct is unknown in any Oligochaete. Dr. Benham suggests that this is an archaic feature, the primitive sperm-duct having opened externally in the segment following the funnel, and a groove having appeared to carry the spermatozoa further back ; later on this groove sunk into the epidermis, became a canal, and so gave rise to the long duct so usual among earthworms. Eyes of Hirudinea.* — Herr B. L. Maier describes the minute struc- ture of the eyes in Hirudo, Aidostomum , Nephelis , Clepsine, and Piscicola. He is convinced that they are eyes. They consist essentially of a cellular pigment layer and a retina of large strongly refracting cells. Within the latter there is a capsule of modified plasma which is usually invaginated as a knob or ridge. This capsule is probably homologous with the rod-structures of the cells which are sensitive to light in other eyes. Each cell is connected with a fibre from the optic nerve. In Nephelis, Clepsine , and Piscicola the nerve enters the eye from in front ; in Hirudo and Aulostomum the main branch enters the posterior wall and extends axially through the eye, while a second branch unites ante- riorly and ventrally with the foremost cells. Blood-pigment of Gephyrea-t — Dr. A. B. Griffiths has a note on the red pigment with respiratory properties which is found in the blood of Sipunculus and Phascolosoma. and was called hmmerythrin by Krukenberg. He finds that the empirical formula is C'427H761Nlg5EeS20153 ; the pigment exists in an oxidized and a reduced condition. This is the fourth respiratory pigment found in Invertebrates which contains iron. B ■ Nemathelminth.es. Muscle and Nerve of Nematodes.! — Dr. E. Rohde reports some observations on the histology of Ascaris megalocephala and A. lumbri - coides. The cortical portion of the coelomyarian muscle-cell is divisible into two different substances, the specially contractile muscular columns and the interfibrillar mass. The former are bands, generally of homo- geneous appearance, which are set radially in the cortex of the cell, and alternate regularly with the interfibrillar mass. This latter is the con- tinuation of the central medullary substance, and consists of a homo- geneous hyaloplasm and a spongioplasm formed of a complicated plexus of fibrils and very greedy of colouring matters. The muscle cell of the * Zool. Jalirb., v. (1892) pp. 552-80 (1 pi.). t Comptes Rendus, cxv. (1892) pp. 669 and 70. X SB. K. Akad. Berlin, 1892, pp. 515-26. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 41 Hirudinea differs from that of Nematodes only in the fact that the con- tractile substance completely surrounds the medullary mass, so that the cell has not the form of a groove, but a closed tubule, which grows narrower at each end. Both kinds of cells show a great resemblance to the striated muscular fibres of Arthropods and Vertebrates in so far that in all the muscular columns are surrounded by the sarcoplasm ; but there is this difference, that in Nematodes and Hirudinea the columns appear in the cortex, while in Arthropods and Vertebrates the whole thickness of the fibre is equally developed ; to this last rule there are, however, exceptions. With regard to Chastopods, their muscular cells are formed on the same type as that of the Hirudinea, and the same is true of Molluscs. The nerve-fibres are, as a rule, tubes of the same thickness for their whole length, but they exhibit extraordinary varia- tions in thickness ; in all cases an axis-cylinder and a sheath can be distinguished ; the former consists of a finely fibrillar spongioplasm with a homogeneous hyaloplasm imbedded in it. The ganglionic cells, which generally belong to the bipolar or multipolar type, have a coarse fibrillar spongioplasm. The nerves of Nematodes are essentially dis- tinguished from those of the higher Worms by the absence of dotted substance. The innervation of the muscle-cell is effected by its medullary sub- stance, the presence of which forms an integral part of it. But the nerves and muscles are not only closely connected with one another, but also with the subcuticle. This layer has not a cellular structure, but forms a continuous protoplasmic mass in which nuclei appear to be regularly distributed. Fibrils are to be seen in the mass, where they form a close- meshed plexus or form parallel bands, circular, longitudinal, or radial in direction. In the Ohsetopoda and Hirudinea the fibrous tissue of the subcuticle and the spongioplasm of the nervous system are also closely connected ; in them, as in Nematodes, the sheaths of the nerve-fibres are only a product of the close plexuses of the fibrous system of the subcuticle, with which they are often in close connection ; in Nematodes, indeed, the passage of spongioplasm into axis- cylinder is so gradual, that it is not possible to make a separation between them. Nerve, muscle, and subcuticle are found to be in unbroken connection by means of their spongioplasm, and the last is seen to play a part in innervation ; its thick radial fibres, which stain very intensely, extend from the cuticle directly to the inner margin of the median line, where they unite into a very complicated network, and are thus brought into relation with the muscular processes. With regard to the connection between sensory and motor nerve- endings, it is suggested that the stimulus exerted from without on the papilla is conveyed directly to the bursal ganglionic cell, whence it is conveyed by a second process to the bursal nerves ; this, again, is a direct continuation of the motor ventral nerves ; and it conveys the stimulus to the dorsal median nerve by means of numerous connecting fibres which lie in the subcuticle. Muscle and Nerve in Mermis and Amphioxus.* — Dr. E. Rohde gives a short account of the relations of muscle and nerve in each of * SB. K. Akad. Berlin, 1892, pp. 659-64. 42 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO these animals, and, on comparing them, sees a distinct resemblance between them. In both, the musculature consists of plate-like structures set in regular series ; in one there is a central space filled by sarco- plasm, and of the value of a muscle-cell, and in the other it appears to be solid and surrounded by sarcoplasm. In both a number of the mus- cular columns that form the plates have the character of motor-fibres and pass transversely inwards to a sharply circumscribed cord, which extends to the nervous system. In both Amphioxus and Mermis the motor-fibres of either side do not arise simultaneously, but a certain distance behind one another to the right and left of the nervous system ; in Mermis , however, there is not the same regular metamerism as in Amphioxus. In both the motor-fibres are accompanied by sarcoplasm which, in Mermis , distinctly forms the element that admits of innerva- tion, while in Amphioxus it probably is, but cannot be with certainty asserted to be so. Holomyaria.* — Dr. E. Rohde asks a question, which has been asked before, Are there any holomyarian Nematodes ? Schneider, when form- ing the group, took Gordius as its chief representative, but Grenacher and Biitschli have contended that the musculature of that worm is formed of cells of the ccelomyarian type seen in Ascaris. Dr. Rohde does not deny that such coelomyarian cells exist, but there are, he says, in G. tolosanus others of quite a different structure. They differ from the others in that they are completely open, not only on the inner, but also on the outer margin, and they are, consequently, formed essentially of two parallel plates, which are connected by the central medullary substance. Fur- ther, in the coelomyarian cell the contractile margin extends as far as the inner boundary of the musculature, where there is but little medullary substance ; in the others the plates extend hardly further than the middle of the muscular layer, but have on their inner side a well-developed medullary substance, in which numerous nuclei are contained. These two kinds of cells are not only found together, but at their boundaries pass gradually into one another. Between the cells of both types there are olten thin band-like masses of protoplasm, which have exactly the same appearance as the medullary substance of the cells. There can be no doubt that we have here to do with the first develop- mental stages of the muscle-cells, and it further seems clear to the author that the cells of the second type are cells in a young stage. The histogenesis of the muscle-cell of Gordius would appear, therefore, to be this. The young cell consisting only of protoplasm, and probably connected with the subcuticle, as is the case in many cells of Ascaris (see above), commences its further development by becoming differentiated into muscular columns on the part which is turned towards the sub- cuticle. These columns become arranged in plates, gradually reach the inner boundary of the muscular layer, till at last the cell is cut off from the subcuticle, while at the same time the primitive protoplasm becomes almost completely used up. The development of the muscle-cell may go still further, for in some the contractile margin grows together on the inner side, and then, as in all Hirudinea, encloses the medullary sub- stance. Gordius preslii presents quite a different structure of the musculature ♦ SB. K. Akad. Berlin, 1892, pp. 665-7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 43 from that of G. tolosanus ; it here consists of cells which are generally very flat, and widen out somewhat in their inner portion, where the medullary substance and nucleus can be distinctly recognized. They are chiefly remarkable for the fact that, while of the coelomyarian type, they are open on the side opposite to that which is open in Ascaris , that is towards the subcuticle. As Grenacher and Schneider examined different species, it is not to be wondered at that they were led to discuss each other’s results. Male of Filaria medinensis.* * * § — Dr. R. Havelock Charles reports that specimens taken from near the attached portion of the mesentery in the vicinity of the ileo-cmcal valve of humxn subjects are found to be double ; the smaller specimen may be drawn out from a small opening near the middle of the body of the larger, and the author thinks that it is the long-sought-for male of the Guinea Worm. Dr. Charles thinks that the sexes are separate when set free in the stomach of the host, that the male is gradually used up in fertilizing the female, and by the time the latter reaches the surface of the body of the host its mate is dead. Filaria Bancrofti and F. immitis.f — Prof. P. S. de Magalhaes points out the differences between these two Nematodes. The most important specific difference lies in the form of the tail ; this part is, in F. immitis, rolled up into several coils which are more numerous than in F. Bancrofti ; the papillm in the former are not broader at their base than at their tip as they are in the latter. In F. Bancrofti the two spicula are so set as to appear to be single. Heterakis i— MM. A. Railliet and A. Lucet report the results of some observations on HeteraMs perspicillum and H. papillosa ; the former has been discovered in the small intestine of Numida meleagris, and the authors made some feeding experiments with it on a fowl, but the parasite failed to be developed. Phasianus veneratus , Ceriornis satyra, and Anser domesticus may be added to the list of already recorded hosts of H . papillosa. Nematodes of Indian Horses and Sheep. §— Dr. G. M. J. Giles reports some observations on the life-history of Sclerostomum tetra - canthum, as bearing on sclerostomiasis in equine animals ; a new species || found in mules, and called S. robustum, is said to be a vicious bloodsucker. Dr. Giles % has discovered in sheep in India the parasite (Esophagoetoma columbianum recently described by Dr. Curtice in the United States, and he points out that he has brought together evidence to show that the damage to live stock wrought by parasites is much greater than has hitherto been suspected. Two new parasites ** found in sheep are called Strongylus colubriformis and Trichosomum verru - cosum. * Scient. Mem. Medic. Officers Army of India, vii. (1892) pp. 51-6 (1 pi.). t Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 511-4 (4 figs.). X Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xvii. (1892) pp. 117-20. § Scient. Mem. Medic. Officers Army of India, vii. (1892) pp. 1-24 (1 pi ). || Tom. cit., pp. 25-30 (1 pi.). If Tom. cit., pp. 31-44 (1 pi.). ** Tom. cit., pp. 45-9 (1 pi.). 44 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO y. Platyhelminth.es. Geonemertes australiensis.* — Dr. A. Dendy gives an account of this, the fourth known species of Land Nemertine ; its minute anatomy is found, on comparison with Burger’s researches on the marine Nemertea, to agree very closely with the marine forms, and especially with the Enopla. The circulatory system, however, appears to be merely a specialized portion of the excretory system. This last exhibits the most striking and important differences, for it consists of a system of intracellular tubules terminating in flame-cells. There is this objection to considering the network of tubules as excretory, that the author was unable to find any opening whatever to the exterior ; it is possible, however, that it has been missed among the numerous genital apertures with which this animal is provided. The flame-like undu- lating structure connected with the tubules was, fortunately, seen in a crushed preparation of a living worm ; its movements were extremely beautiful and characteristic, consisting of a series of undulations passing from base to apex in rapid succession, and causing the “ flame ” to exhibit alternate light and dark bands, and to give, at first, the impression of bubbles of gas escaping from the end of a tube under water. The flame appears to be made up of a bundle of long cilia, for faint indi- cations of longitudinal striation were visible in it. With the possible exception of Tetrastemma aquarum dulcium, described by Silliman in 1885, this is the first time that flame-cells have been observed in Nemertines. The present form differs from the three other known Land Nemertines in the presence of a large and indefinite number of eyes, the others having four or six. In G. australiensis there may be as many as thirty or forty, and there are indications that they may have arisen by the subdivision of four eyes ; these eyes are sometimes dumb-bell-shaped, which is an indication that they multiply by division. Burger is in error in stating that all Land Nemertines are herma- phrodite, for this is not correct of either known species of Tetrastemma or of this new species. In it the females appear to be much commoner than males. The ova communicate with the exterior by narrow ducts which open along the sides of the body, and appear to allow of the entrance of spermatozoa, for which there are, in the male, numerous ducts. Both ovaries and testes are extremely numerous, and occur thickly scattered along the sides of the body. G. australiensis is about 40 mm. long and 2' 5 mm. broad when crawling. It is chiefly yellow in colour ; the skin contains no rod- like bodies, but irregularly oval calcareous bodies lie in the deeper tissues. Freshwater Nemertine in England, f — Dr. W. B. Benham has found in the river Cherwell, close to Oxford, a single specimen of a freshwater Nemertine, which may be Tetrastemma aquarum dulcium , but differs in some points from the description given by Silliman of that worm. * Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 1891 (1892) pp. 85-122 (4 pis.), t Nature, xlvi. (1892) pp. 611 and 12. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 45 Classification of Triclada.*— M. P. Hallez has a preliminary notice of his classification of Triclad Turbellaria. He divides the Turbellaria thus : — Turbellaria -p. • ill ,• ( Rhabdoccelida Graff. Diploblastica j Triclada LJg_ Triploblastica Polyclada Lang. The order of the Triclads is divided into three tribes ; Maricola, Paludicola, and Terricola. The order is defined in the following terms : Diploblastic Turbellaria, with an intestinal apparatus formed of three principal branches, of which the anterior is unpaired, and the two posterior paired and recurrent ; pharynx situated at the point of junction of the three branches. Numerous follicular testicles, rarely reduced to one pair. Follicular vitelline glands, rarely ( Otoplana ) comp>act. Buccal orifice generally behind the middle of the body. Body more or less plano-convex. A genital cloaca and a uterus. Genital pores (both male and female) always behind the mouth. The Maricola, or forms of marine habitat, have the intestinal branches lobed, or branching but little. Mouth in the second half of the body (except Bdellura ). Body depressed. Uterus behind the genital orifice (except ? Otoplana). The families Otoplanida and Procerodida are free, but the Bdellurida are ectoparasitic. The Paludicola live in fresh water, have the intestinal branches much ramified, the mouth in the second half of the body. Body depressed ; uterus between pharynx and penis, with a dorsal uterine canal. In the Planarida and Anocelida the head is not formed for fixation, and the edges of the body are not undulated in a state of repose ; the opposite obtains in the Dendrocelida. The Terricola are terrestrial Triclads, with the branches of the intestine generally simply lobed. The mouth varies in position. Body variable in form. Uterus rudimentary. Ventral muscular system well developed. In the Limacopsidae the dorsal surface is very convex, and the mouth is in the anterior third of the body. In the Geoplanida the body is subcylindrical, and the mouth almost median (except in Micro- plana ), while in the family Polycladida the body is depressed and the mouth is in the posterior third of the body. Land Planarians from Tasmania and South Australia.f — Dr. A. Dendy remarks that the only Tasmanian Land Planarian hitherto described is Geoplana Tasmaniana, which was collected by Darwin during the voyage of the £ Beagle.’ The few specimens which the author and his wife were able to collect near Hobart go to show that the Land Planarians of Tasmania are very similar to those of Victoria. G. alba , G. adse , and G. walhallse have been collected, while there is a single specimen of a species allied to G. quadrangulata and G. ventro- punctata. From Adelaide, Dr. Dendy has received G. fletcheri , a Victorian form, and a variety of it which he calls var. adelaidensis. Land Planarians from Queensland. J — Dr. A. Dendy describes the land Planarians collected by Prof. Spencer in his expedition to Southern * Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xvii. (1892) pp. 106-9. f Australasian Assoc. Advanc. Sci., 1892, Section D, 6 pp. (separate copy). j Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 1891 (1892) pp. 123-9 (1 pi.). 4(3 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Queensland ; they belong to six species — four of Geoplana, and one of Bipalium and one of JRhynchodesmus ; only two are new to science, but of these Geoplana regina is a remarkably handsome worm. The widely spread Bipalium Kewense was, Prof. Spencer thinks, introduced by the agency of man to the locality (Gympie, Mary River) where he found it. Dr. Dendy thinks that the remarkable development of the head of Bipalium is a most marked and important character, and of great value for the purposes of classification ; for it has a certain normal shape, to which it constantly returns. Victorian Land Planarians.*— Dr. A. Dendy has a further descriptive paper on the land Planarians of Victoria, twenty-two species of which are now known ; it is probable that they may be found at all times of the year by diligent searching, but they are more abundant in spring and autumn than in the drought of summer or the excessive moisture of winter. The present memoir contains systematic observations on twenty species of Geoplana. Revision of Monostomida.f — Dr. G. Brandes does not agree with Dr. Monticelli in thinking that the Monostomida should be so defined as to include Didymozoon ; speaking generally, the Monostomidae are those digenetic Trematodes which have only one sucker, but it is to be understood that a truly Holostomid form like Hemistomum cordatum is to be regarded as a Monostomid. M. liguloideum is shown to be an Amphiline ; M. Squamula is a Bistomum ; M. echinostomum is a synonym of D. planicolle , and M. hystrix of D. endolobum. M. spirale is also a Distomid, while M. cochleariforme appears to be a Gastrostomum , and it is not possible to be certain about M. cornu . M. mutabile , M. flavum , M. arcuatum, M. Tringse, and M. ellipticum may be certainly regarded as good species, and the first four are allied to one another ; similarly M. verrucosum , M. alveatum , M. trigonocephalum, and M. Hippocrepis seem to form a group of allies. About twenty-four good species of the genus appear to have been described. Notes on Water-Vascular System of Mesostomidae4 — Dr. E. Sekera finds some exceptions to Graff’s generalization that the oral and water- vascular orifices are always combined in this family. In Mesostoma rostratum the double excretory branches open by two excretory pores below the genital orifice ; similar remarks may be made as to M. cyathus , M. hirudo , and M. Hallezianum. There are certain points of interest in Castrada , and in Bothrioplana , on which further information is promised. Rare Parasites of Man.§ — Prof. F. Zschokke has some notes on Tsenia ( Hymenolepis ) diminuta, which has been five times recorded from the human intestine. An example of Cysticercus cellulosee was found lying under the skin of a man thirty-nine years old. Another may be added to the three cases of the presence in Man of Bistomum lanceolatum ; twelve specimens were observed in a corpse in the Arabian Hospital at Alexandria. * Trans. Koy. Soc. Viet., 1891 (1892) pp. 25-41 (1 p].) t Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 504-11. X Zool. Anzeig., xv. (1892) pp. 387 and 8. § Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 497-500. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 47 Taeniae of Birds.* * * § — Dr. 0. v. Linstow lias a few notes on Taenia malleus , a Taenia without copulatory organs, and two new Oysticerci ; the last belong respectively to the Taenia setigera of the Goose, and T. brachycephala of Machetes pugnax ; the Cysticercus of the former lives in Cyclops brevicaudatus, and that of the latter in C. crassicornis. Notes on Parasites.f — Prof. A. Railliet first calls attention to a specimen of Cysticercus pisiformis with six suckers, a rare occurrence, of which but few examples have been noted. This arrangement is coincident with a trihedral form of the chain of the adult Taenia. From the small intestine of a rabbit he has lately taken a tapeworm which was remarkable for the slate colour of the greater part of the body ; though reduced by immersion in alcohol, the coloration was still very distinct ; the worm appears to be an example of Anoplocephala cuni- culi. The coloration is due to tine pigment granulations which are almost uniformly distributed in the parenchyma, and it is probable that it is due to the absorption and decomposition of haemoglobin, for the rabbit was suffering from a number of small ulcers due to stron- gyles. Four specimens of Dipylidium caninum showed not fenestrations, as in the cases recently described by Neumann, but one or two lateral hollows, the cause of which remains quite obscure. Three joints of this tapeworm have been observed by the author in the anal glands of the Dog. Cysticercus tenuicollis has been found in a Kid from four to six weeks old ; the case is of interest, not only from the youth of the host, but from the advanced stage of development reached by the parasite in the liver and lungs. The same species, which is known to infest various Ruminants, is now recorded from Oryx beisa. In noting the occurrence of Taenia tenuirostris, which has been found in various wild Ducks and other birds, in the domestic Goose Prof. Railliet takes occasion to form two new genera ; Drepanidotaenia is for those of the type of Taenia lanceolata , of which the rostrum is armed with a simple crown of uniform hooks, of which one part is much longer than the other, while Dicranotaenia is for those of the type of T. coronula , in which the uniform hooks, which are arranged in a simple crown, have the two halves equal or subequal. Cysticercoid in Freshwater Calanid.J — Dr. J. Richard detected in Eurytemora lacinulata a cysticercoid which appears to be identical with the one found by Mrazek in Cyclops agilis ; this is the first time that a cysticercoid has been reported from a freshwater Calanid. Structure of Solenophorus.§ — Dr. C. Crety has given a detailed account of Solenophorus megacephalus Creplin, describing the two strata of the cuticle, the subcuticula, the parenchyma, the muscular system, the calcareous bodies, and the nervous system. Regarding an anterior commissure and two main lateral nerves as the primitive type of nervous system in Cestodes, the author contrasts the simple forms like Amphiline with more differentiated forms like Solenophorus. * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., pp. 501-4 (1 fig.). t Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xvii. (1892) pp. 110-7. X Tom. cit., pp. 17 and 18. § Atti (Mem.) R. Accad, Lincei Roma, vi. (1890) pp. 384-413 (2 pis.). 48 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 5. Incertae Sedis. Victorian Rotifers.* — Messrs. H. H. Anderson and J. Shephard enumerate six species of Floscularia , one of which, F. evansoni , appears to be new ; it was found at Oakleigh, Victoria. Eleven known species of Melicertidaa are recorded, and Melicerta r ingens is said to be common everywhere, and to be sometimes very large. New forms of this family are (Ecistes wilsoni , Lacinularia reticulata, and species allied to if not the same as Limnias granulosus , and a new variety of CEc. intermedius. Four Philadinidte have been found at the Botanical Gardens of Melbourne. Asplanchna brightwelli has for two years been found at the same spot at Brighton, Victoria, and Asplanchnopus myrmeleo has been found at all times of the year. Two Synchetidae and two Triarthridae are recorded. Hydatina senta was on one occasion found by hundreds. Four Notom- matidae, one Rattulid, one Dinocharid, two Salpinidae, and one Euchlanis are enumerated. Of the three Cathypnidse, Cathypna sp. (allied to C. luna') and Distyla ichthyoura are new. Of the Coluridm Metopidia ovalis is new, as is Fterodina trilobata of the two Pterodinidae. Of the three Brachionidae named, B. rubens is common. In addition to the two determined Anureidae there are probably some undescribed species. Messrs. Hudson and Gosse’s book is evidently very useful to Australian workers at Rotifers. Asplanchna. | — Prof. A. Wierzejski describes Asplanchna Eerrickii de Guerne. It is most nearly related to A. priodonta, but has different “jaws,” and a peculiar glandular organ composed of two large cells and opening above the cloaca. This gland Herrick erroneously regarded as testis ; it is more like a cement-gland. The author also describes A. Girodi, and maintains that A. helvetica Imhof and Zacharias and A. Krameri de Guerne are, as v. Daday also believes, synonymous with A. priodonta. Two other Galician species are noted, A. Ebbesbornii Hudson and A. Briyhtwellii Gosse. Echino derma. Echinologica.j; — Under this title Prof. S. Loven gives us some of the results of his life-long researches on Echinoderms. Treating of the early stages of the body of regular Echinoids, he tells us that the form of the body is discoidai or lenticular, with five primitive locomotor suckers, solitary and provisional. The interior of the body communicates with the surrounding medium by a single large water-pore. The alimentary canal is closed at both ends and its possessor is endotrophic, taking in no food from without. In this way it represents a pupal or nymphal condition, intermediate between the pluteus and the adult. At this time there are being fashioned prehensile and masticatory organs, and a new endoskeleton is being built up within the envelope of the body ; in this last there are two constituents — the calycinal system originating round the dorsal centre and formed of definite parts, and the coronal system ; the latter arises from around the ventral centre, grows upwards, and is * Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, iv. (1892) pp. 69-80 (2 pis.). t Zool. Auzeig., xv. (1892) pp. 345-9. X Bihang Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Hdlgr., xviii. IV. No. 1, 73 pp. (12 pis. and figs, in text). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 49 itself a combination of two heterogeneous sets of plates — the ambulacral, which are binary from the beginning, and the secondary perisomatic interradia, which commence singly and then become binary. The origin and history of the buccal membrane is thus described ; the massive teeth and jaws “ in the act of forming require an abundant supply of organized calcareous substance, and in the future imago they will demand, powerful instruments as they are of prehension and dimi- nution, the greatest possible facility of motion. For their sake, it will seem to me, in order to prepare for them pliant surroundings, the currents of development are at last turned, and calcareous matter, just deposited in duly formed skeletal constituents, is reabsorbed, remodelling in the Cidaridae and Echinothuriidte, all but dissolving in the other groups.” The structure of the dental apparatus is considered in great detail, and it is suggested that further researches will tend to show that of the tooth-bearing Echinoids the Regularia are predacious, and perhaps mainly carnivorous animals, while the Irregularia are rather omnivorous. We have been able to draw attention to some only of the points of interest in this memoir. Catalogue of British Echinoderms.* — Prof. F. Jeffrey Bell has prepared a catalogue of the British Echinoderms in the collection of the British Museum (Natural History). The term British area is recognized as denoting an artificial region, and that accepted extends from the Faeroe Channel to the Channel Islands, while all forms are included which do not belong to essentially abyssal groups, such as Elasipods or Stalked Crinoids. One hundred and thirty-two species, some of which are very imperfectly known, are enumerated, compared with the fifty- five of Forbes’s well-known works, but eight of these latter are not now regarded as good species. After an introduction, in which there is given a sketch of Echino- derms and of their development, an account is given of the classification of the higher groups, in which the arrangement proposed by the author in 1891 is followed. The special part deals first with a description of the genera and species, to both of which “ keys ” are given by which a collected specimen may be quickly hunted down to his proper place ; the diagnoses are drawn up as briefly as possible, and from what is said in the introduction it is clear that Prof. Bell has a holy horror of any- thing like verbosity or padding. The last part of the work is occupied by an account of the distri- bution of the species, arranged in five tables. The first gives an account of the horizontal distribution of British Echinoderma beyond the “ British Area,” and in the same line the range in depth of each species is noted. Twenty-four species are not known beyond this artificial area, and these are (1) littoral and rare or very local, of which there are only three, (2) incompletely known — five, and (3) deep-water forms ; many of the sixteen of these last are known from single specimens or have been only lately described. Only one species is not known beyond ten fathoms, whereas twenty-four have been dredged from more than * ‘Catalogue of the British Echinoderms in the British Museum (Natural History), by F. Jeffrey Bell, M.A. London, printed by order of the Trustees,’ 1892, 8vo, xv. and 202 pp., 16 plates (2 colrd.) and 5 woodcuts. 1893. E 50 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 750 fathoms. Three are not known above 1000 fathoms. Special attention is directed to the extension into deep water of what are commonly regarded as characteristically shore-forms, and it is pointed out that more discoveries of this kind are to be expected. The fifth table of distribution deals with divisions of the “ British Area,” of which there are nine taken — Faeroe Channel, W. Scotland, S. and W. Ireland, Irish Sea, St. George’s Channel, English Channel, North Sea, Shetland and Channel Islands. A word of praise is due to the plates, the first six of which will be more particularly interesting to the microscopist, as they are devoted to the spicules of Holothurians ; no connected series of the spicules of British Holothurians have ever been before published, although it is now some years since the author called the attention of the Society to the necessity of this.* * * § In conclusion, we may congratulate the author on having, even so late in the day, discovered the proper form of the technical name of the group with which he has been concerned. He, here, very properly speaks of Echinoderma instead of Echinodermata, and if he should ever write a Catalogue of British Zoophytes and Anemones it is to be hoped he will call them Coelentera and not Coelenterata. Echinoderms from Y^est Coast of Ireland.^— Prof. F. Jeffrey Bell has a report on the Echinoderms collected off the West Coast of Ireland under the auspices of the Royal Dublin Society. The most interesting material was collected at 500 fathoms off county Mayo. Special attention is drawn to the great amount of variation exhibited by Asthe- nosoma hystrix and by a new species of Astropecten — A. sphenoplax. A recently described form, Asterias murrayi , only known hitherto from the West Coast of Scotland, was obtained. Sir Wyville Thomson dis- tinguished two species of Asthenosoma — A. liystrix and A. fenestratum, but it is now shown that the amount of calcification of the plates of the test is a point in which individuals living together may differ among themselves. The differences in the size of the genital pores is, it is suggested, not a specific but a sexual character. Larvae of Echinoids4 — M. H. S. Greenough has investigated larvae by means of an apparatus which allows of rapid rotation around a horizontal axis under the Microscope ; this permits of the determination of the form of a disturbed or isolated object and the relations of its different parts better than the ordinary method. In a living larva, about twenty-four hours old and stained with Bismarck-brown, a cap of the subspherical surface bounding the segmental cavity budded off mesoblastic cells ; a large free mesoblastic cell was also observed. In a living larva, a day older, the hypoblast of which was already flattened but not yet invaginated, this layer was lined by two mesoblastic bands quite recognizable though little differentiated. Larva of Asterias vulgaris.§— Mr. G. W. Field has been able to examine a large number of the larvae of this star -fish, which are * See this Journal, 1883, pp. 481-4. f Sci. Proc. R. Dublin Soc., vii. (1892) pp. 520-9 (3 pis.). X Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xvii. (1891) p. 239. § Quart. Journ, Micr. Sci., xxxiv. (1892) pp. 105-28 (3 pis.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 51 abundant at Wood’s Holl in June, July, and August. The sperm mother-cell gives rise to four very small cells, each of which is, without further division, directly changed into the form characteristic of the spermatozoon. There seem to be no traces of the residual corpuscles which are supposed to be the homologues of the polar bodies. No special cell could be detected to which the origin of the mesen- chyme could be referred. The first traces of this tissue appear as soon as the ciliated coeloblastula becomes free-swimming ; in the region of the future endoderm, one and then more cells push out into the segmentation cavity and become amoeboid mesenchyme-cells. It appears to be certain that the development of Echinoderms is characterized by the absence of two bilaterally symmetrical primitive mesenchyme-cells. Asterias vulgaris seems to differ from Astropecten in that mesenchyme formation precedes and continues throughout the progress of invagi- nation. As in most other Echinoderms the mesoderm of Asterias originates partly as a mesenchyme formation and partly as an enterocoel formation, though there is not in this case a sharp morphological dis- tinction between them. Too much importance has been attached to the time of complete separation of the enterocoels, for it is subject to much individual variation. A right and a left water-pore appear, and, though some investigators have regarded this as pathological, there is reason to believe that it is a true ontogenetic character, and of very considerable phylogenetic significance. With regard to the significance of the larval form of Echinoderms it is well known that two very divergent views are held ; some regard it as having been cenogenetically acquired, others look on it as ancestral in character. Mr. Field points out that the ceno- genetic modifications are of little importance when compared with those which appear to be ancestral. The total and very nearly equal cleavage, and the ciliated blastula offer both simple ancestral conditions and means for wide distribution; the mode of mesenchyme formation is probably more primitive than the formation of the third germinal layer in the form of mesoblastic bands ; the derivation of this middle layer from any part whatever of the endoderm is antecedent to that condition where it is restricted to two special cells, the mesoblasts. The formation of enterocoels by archenteric diverticula is characteristic of ancestral forms, and in this larva are found the simplest conditions of complete enterocoels and archenteron, passing directly into corresponding parts of the adult. The bilaterally symmetrical water -pores cannot be supposed to be newly acquired characters, while the disappearance of the right pore may be explained by the subsequent connection between the two enterocoels by fusion in the preoral lobe. The Echinoderm larva is a form which has developed along the phylogenetic line, and is in many ways differentiated and capable of free existence : cenogenetic additions are transparency as a protective adaptation, and the formation of long arms for protection, but primarily as a means of increased locomotor power. The greatest of the cenogenetic modifications is that whereby the typical larva acquires the different forms characteristic of the various groups, but these have, since the time of Johannes Muller, been known to be all modifications of a single typical form. E 2 52 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO It seems pretty certain tliat the radial symmetry of Echinoderms has been derived from bilateral symmetry, through the influence of a sedentary mode of life. The metamorphosis we now see is an expression of the course of phylogeny, subjected to exceedingly great distortion. The author inclines, therefore, to the view that the ancestral Echinoderm arose by the adaptive modification of a more primitive free-swimming form rather than the one that a larval form has been acquired for the purpose of distribution. Of the present groups of Echinoderms the earliest arising were the Synaptidae, then the ancestors of other Holothurians, later the ancestors of Grinoids, and latest the ancestors of Echinids, Ophiuroids, and Asteroids. The intermediate forms between each group probably persisted but a very short time, and the corresponding stages have, for the most part, been eliminated from the ontogeny. Most of the existing unstalked forms have been cenogenetically modified for a creeping life, the original excretory system assuming the locomotor in addition to the more early acquired sensory and respiratory functions. The early appearance of radial symmetry in the free swimming larva, shown by the radial outpushings of the hydrocoel wall at that stage of the ontogeny which is generally spoken of as the beginning of metamorphosis, may be regarded as precocious formation for the purpose of abbreviation of development. This last is carried to an extreme by the so-called viviparous Echinoderms. Development of Amphinra squamata.*— Mr. E. W. MacBride, who has already published a preliminary notice of the results of his investi- gations,! states that the following are the principal results to which he has been led. The primitive germinal cells are peritoneal, and from a portion of the rudiment which gives rise to them there is developed the ovoid gland, which is a solid organ. The axial and aboral sinuses are involutions of the coelom, and have no connection with the ampulla of the stone- canal or each other. The genital rachis is an outgrowth from the ovoid gland into the aboral sinus ; both kinds of cell, germinal and interstitial, which are found in the genital rachis, are formed in the ovoid gland. The germinal cells are formed from peritoneal cells directly, and there is no evidence of the transformation of the special cells of the ovoid gland into primitive germ-cells. From these observations it follows that Echinoderms agree with other Coelomata in the origin of their genital cells ; these have at first an unsymmetrical position in Echinoderms, and afterwards take on a radially symmetrical disposition in correspondence with the secondarily acquired radial form of the body ; this is in agreement with the classi- fications proposed by Prof. Jeffrey Bell |8in which the Echinoderma are divided into the two groups of Anactinogonidiata and Actinogonidiata. The origin of the genital cells adjacent to the stone-canal suggests a comparison of the origin of the same kind of cells near the nephridia of Annelids, though the author allows that the homology of the stone-canal with a nephridium has yet to be proved. With regard to the haemal system described by Prof. Ludwig, * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxxiv. (1892) pp. 129-53 (3 pis.), t See this Journal, 1892, p. 621. I Op. cit., 1891, p. 662. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 53 Mr. MacBride denies its existence ; he points out that what looks like a blood-vessel is limited by no cell-layer from tho nerve-fibres below, and its boundary towards them is often jagged and uneven, while the angles of the outline run out into vertical fibres, and convey the impression that the so-called blood-vessel is merely composed of the cell-plasma of two or three rather larger dorsal ganglion-cells which are prolonged into these fibres. As to the so-called branches of the haemal system which go to the alimentary canal, they appear to be nothing more than mesenteric bridles. Morphology of Skeleton of Starfishes.* — Prof. E. Perrier finds that the arm of Hymenodiscus has its skeletal parts so reduced as to make it impossible as a point of departure. He starts, therefore, with the arms of Brisinga and Odinia ; in Labidiaster there is further complication ; the author recognizes adambulacral plates connected with one another by five longitudinal rows of small plates ; the third and fifth plate of each have a spiral form, and may be called the ventral marginal and dorso-marginal, while the seventh plate, which occupies the medio- dorsal line of the arms may be called the carinal. Here we have the fundamental parts of the arms of Starfishes. The term ventro-lateral is applied to the piece between the adambulacral and the ventral marginal ; intercalary to those which unite the ventral and dorsal marginals; dorsolateral to those which unite the latter with the carinals ; and reticu- lar to the pieces set in longitudinal or oblique rows which pass from one arch to another. All the modifications of form seen in Starfishes depend solely on the relative development and numerical relations of their different systems of plates. When the ventral and dorsal arches are formed in the same way from the base to the tip of the arms, these, which are cylindrical or conical, are sharply distinguished from the disk, which is circular. When the ventral and dorsal arches are more developed at the base than at the tip, there is a tendency for the disk to take on a pentagonal form. Prof. Perrier thinks it is permissible to regard the arms of Starfishes as primitively formed of successive segments, and that the relationship so often noticed between Echinoderms and Vertebrates receives support from this view. Holothurians collected by the ‘ Hirondelle.’f — Dr. E. von Maren- zeller has a preliminary notice on the Holothurians collected by the Prince of Monaco during the voyages of the ‘ Hirondelle.’ The new species are Holothuria lentiginosa , Benthodytes janthina, Peniagone azorica , and Chiridota abyssicola. The ranges of some new species are increased, the southern Cucumaria dbyssorum having been found in the Atlantic, and the littoral Synapta digitata taken at a depth of 2870 metres. Coelentera. Larva of Euphyllia.J — Prof. A. C. Haddon gives an account of a newly hatched larva of Euphyllia rugosa which he observed in the Torres Straits. The only differences in the mesenteries between this larva and * Comptes Rendus, cxv. (1892) pp. 670-3. f Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xvii. (1892) pp. 64-6. % Scientific Proc. R. Dublin Soc., vii. (1892) pp. 127-36 (1 pi.). 54 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO tlie corresponding stage of many Actiniae is that the sulcular directives, although they reach the oesophagus, are devoid of mesenterial filaments. Alternating with the mesenteries are large ridge-like vesicular out- growths from the endoderm, into which the endoderm of the mesenteries passes gradually. At the angles between the mesenteries and the ridges there are numerous Zooxanthellae. It is these Algae that give rise to the twelve pairs of dark longitudinal lines which are so conspicuous in the living larvae. The mesogloea is an apparently homogeneous jelly- like substance, which is mainly, if not altogether, endodermal in origin. The ectoderm of the body- wall forms at the aboral end of the body a disk-like patch of deep closely-set cells, and forms the seat of attach- ment of the sessile larva ; in the column there is, in addition to and beneath the ordinary narrow cells, a deeper granular or “ nervous ” layer, and there is an immense number of thread-cells. At the oral apex the granular layer becomes so much thickened as to practically constitute the whole of the ectoderm. It seems probable that the mesenterial filaments are derived from the ectoderm of the oesophagus. In the first pair of mesenteries the ectoderm of the stomatodseum applies itself directly to the body-wall, and, pushing aside the endoderm, comes into contact with the basement membrane of the ectoderm of the column. The succeeding mesenteries, on the other hand, first project from the body- wall, come into contact with the stomatodseum from above downward, and push before them a portion of the reflected ectoderm which has grown round the free end of the stomatodseum and up its coelenterio surface. New Species of Epizoanthus from the Azores.* — Dr. E. Jourdan describes an Epizoanthus , remarkable for its size, which he calls E. Hirondellei ; it is most nearly allied to E. paguriphilus. The polyp may measure 0*05 cm. by 0*03 cm. Eight polyps unite to form a colony, and are completely imbedded in the coenenchym. It was taken at a depth of 1266 metres near the Azores, and the inhabitant of the shell was Pagurus pilosimanus or the species which lives with E. paguriphilus. Sense of Taste in Sea Anemones.! — Dr. W. Nagel has shown by numerous experiments that species of Adamsia , Actinia , Aiptasia , Heliactis , Anemonia , and Cerianthus have a sense of taste in the tentacles. These organs are also sensitive to influences of touch and temperature, and are therefore what the author calls Wechselsinnesorgane. Historical Note as to Theories of Coral Reefs. :J — Dr. C. Ph. Sluiter points out that the essay on coral islands contained in Kotzebue’s book of travels and usually credited to Chamisso was the work of Eschscholtz, while Chamisso’s own views were entirely different, and not of any value. Structure and Development of Cunina Buds.§ — Dr. O. Maas begins with an account of the varied opinions which have been held in regard to the nature and relations of Cunina. He proceeds to describe a stock * Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xvi. (1892) pp. 269-71. t Zool. Anzeig., xv. (1892) pp. 334-8. J Tom. cit., pp. 326-7. § Zool. Jahrb., v. (1892) pp. 271-300 (2 pis.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 55 which he obtained from the stomach cavity of Geryonia ( Carmarina ) hastata . The stock was bifurcated, and covered with Medusa-buds of various ages. Some of these were liberated, and swam about in the characteristic Narcomedusa fashion. The stock consists of an axial part and the medusae which bud from it. The axis is not a simple tube, but exhibits irregular ramifications. F. E. Schulze’s observations on the minute structure were confirmed. Individual buds at different stages were carefully disposed and sectioned, and a series is described. It is difficult to refer the form to any of Haeckel’s families. In the absence of an annular canal, it is like one of the Solmaridae, but is distinguished by the Horspangen and other features. In other ways it approaches the Cunanthidte, but among these it seems almost to require a new genus. It is difficult to explain the relative simplicity of this form as the result of degeneration, for the gastro-vascular system is from the first a simple stomach, and of circular canal and radial canals there is not a hint. The position of the tentacles, which arise at some distance from the margin, developing along with and between the lappets, is another remarkable peculiarity. The author inclines strongly to the interpre- tation that a planula, sexually produced, settles down in the tissue of the Geryonia , and forms a stock which produces Medusae by budding ; in short, that there is a simple alternation of generations. A further con- sideration of this alternation of generations leads Dr. Maas to the view that the relations of the Narcomedusae to the other Craspedota are less close than has been hitherto supposed ; in fact, that Narcomedusae and the other Craspedota are only connected by a common root. Porifera. Flask-shaped Ectoderm and Spongoblasts of one of the Keratosa * — Mr. G. Bidder describes the ectodermal cells of what is apparently Cacospongia scalaris as having a flask-shaped form ; treatment with dilute osmic acid, followed by nitrate of potash and nitrate of silver, shows that the cells open on the surface in the centre of the silver areas ; the only nucleus connected with the silver area is the one lying in the base of the pendent cell-body. This completely justifies the inability of Schulze and other trustworthy investigators to find nuclei at a more superficial level, where the “ flat epithelium ” was usually supposed to exist. The spongoblasts of this sponge form a continuous tissue with the ectoderm cells, which they resemble in form and character. The appearance seen suggests that the apex of a conulus is a locus of attraction for ectoderm cells, and that the fibre is nothing more than the concentrated cuticle of a large number of such cells poured out round an intrusive foreign object. After a short discussion of Mr. Minchin’s recent observations Mr. Bidder states that it seems to be an established fact that in all groups of Sponges the flask-shaped epithelium does occur ; it, and not a flat epithelium such as lines the canals, is the structure most commonly to be met with. * Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond., lii. (1892) pp. 134-9 (3 figs.). 56 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Protozoa. Foraminifera from Chalk of Taplow.* — In a report on the Microzoa from the Phosphatic Chalk of Taplow, Mr. F. Chapman enumerates ninety-eight species of Foraminifera, five of which are new to science, while thirty are new to the Chalk fauna ; of these last two were hither- to known only from recent deposits. Notes on Coccidia-t — MM. A. Bailliet and A. Lucet have been engaged in the study of the Coccidia of some of the domestic animals. Coccidium perforans appears to be almost confined to the intestine of Man and the Babbit ; C. tenellum sp. n. is found in the Chicken, and probably also in the Pigeon, Goose, and Duck, and seems to be limited to the intestine. C. truncatum sp. n. has been found in the kidneys of the domestic Goose, where it is expelled into the urine. G. bigeminum , lately described by Stiles, but detected many years before by Finck, exists under three, if not four, varieties. Sarcosporidia and Parasitic Sacs in Body-cavity of Rotifers.:]: — Dr. Bertram describes Sarcocystis platydactili sp. n. in the muscle-fibres of the Gecko, S. miescJieri Bay Lankester, S. tenella Baill, and Balbiania gigantea Baill. He also describes microscopic parasites found (in September and October) within the body-cavity of three species of Brachionus. They appear to resemble zoosporangia of Chytridium. * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., xlviii. (1892) pp. 514-8 (1 pi.), f Bull. Soc. France, xvi. (1891) pp. 248-50. j Zool. Jahrb., v. (1892) pp. 581-604 (3 pis.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 57 BOTANY. A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology of the Phanerogamia. a. Anatomy. (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. Structured the Cell-wall.* — Dr. L. Buscalioni has studied the structure and mode of growth of the cell-wall, especially in the endo- sperm and suspensor of Phaseolus multijlorus , and in the seeds of Corydalis cava. Before fertilization, the wall of the embryo-sac of Phaseolus displays at certain spots, slight thickenings and fringe-like projections into the sac, and the young cells of the suspensor have similar internal projections ; at these spots the protoplasm becomes denser, and ex- hibits, after a time, the reactions of lignin. While this change in the protoplasm is proceeding, the cell-wall becomes gradually thicker, and both it and fine granulations which appear on its surface are stained blue by chlor-zinc-iodide, and the sharp distinction between the cell- membrane and the protoplasm disappears ; the microsomes formed at the spots where the new cell-walls are to appear are gradually converted into cellulose. Bows of cellulose-granules now make their way further into the cell-cavity, and gradually assume the form of branching anasto- mosing rodlets, which are still to be made out in the fully formed cell- wall. Besides these rodlets, crescent-shaped lumps and free granules of cellulose are formed. The increase in thickness and surface of the cell-wall is brought about neither by intussusception nor by apposition, but by transforma- tion from protoplasm in contact with the membrane ; it can take place only when there is contact with already formed cellulose. The micro- somes are transformed directly into grains of cellulose ; the hyaloplasm into the uniting substance which causes the striation and lamination. It is not uncommon for portions of protoplasm to become enclosed within the masses of cellulose. The structure of the ovule of Corydalis cava is described in detail at the time when it is ready for impregnation. Its coat at this period consists of an epiderm, a layer of cubical cells, and a layer of cells elongated tangentially, and there is also a large aril. In the process of cell-division in these layers, the phenomena correspond in all essential points to those witnessed in the embryo-sac of Phaseolus. The micro- somes of protoplasm, which are arranged in rows along the inner surface of the cell-walls, are gradually transformed into cellulose-grains, begin- ning from the centre ; and these grains are converted, in their turn, into rodlets, or into new layers of cell-wall superposed on those already in existence. The author believes that the purpose of these rodlets is to give strength to the cells in which they are formed. Malpighia, vi. (1892) pp. 3-40, 217-28 (3 pis.). 58 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Structure of the Resting Nucleus.* — Dr. F. Krasser has investi- gated the structure of the resting cell-nucleus in a number of flowering plants (Monocotyledons and Dicotyledons), and in Pteris serrulata and Spirogyra, both in the living state and with the use of various fixing and staining reagents. He finds it to be always composed of granular elements ; in the cases observed the granules were always distinct, and usually arranged in short stellate rows. They were most easily detected in the interior, with greater difficulty in the membrane of the nucleus and in the nucleole ; in the two latter cases there was not always a distinct differentiation of granules. The nuclear sap is present only in those resting nuclei which, like some of those of Pliajus , have a wide- meshed staining framework. The granules belonging to the nuclear sap are revealed by staining with cyanin. Some of the granules appear to be identical with Pfitzner’s chromatin-granules. With double- staining the granules, as a rule, take up only one of the two stains, so that they may be distinguished as erythrophilous and cyanophilous. In two cases staining showed the nuclear membrane to be composed of two lamellas. Physode, an Organ of the Cell.| — Under the term physode, Herr E. Crato describes a structure which he finds especially in the cells of Chsetopteris plumosa , an alga belonging to the Pheeosporese. The physodes are vesicular bodies occurring within the protoplasm-filaments, which they distend more or less ; they consist of a protoplasmic envelope and of strongly refractive fluid contents. In the cells towards the apex of a shoot the protoplasm is differentiated into a parietal utricle, and into flakes and threads, the latter of which permeate the cell somewhat uniformly, forming a network of hexagonal meshes. The threads of this mesh are from 0*33 to 0 * 5 /x thick ; and these meshes are again per- meated by other finer or coarser threads ; these may be not more than 0-1 /x thick. Chromatophores and physodes occur in both kinds of thread, the former being found especially in the neighbourhood of the cell- wall, the physodes more towards the interior, and chiefly near the nucleus, which is often concealed by physodes and chromatophores. The physodes are usually of a round or elliptical form, and vary in size from that of the chromatophores to almost invisible refractive particles. They never leave the protoplasm-filaments, and have been hitherto included under the microsomes, of which they form the largest portion. The physodes are endowed with a characteristic amoeboid movement, which is sometimes of a pulsating nature. They are constantly shifting their position within the filaments, sometimes returning again to the same place, sometimes moving even into another mesh. This is due to a power of motion of their own, and not simply to the streaming of the protoplasm. They are not unfrequently branched, the branches being still always enclosed within very fine threads of protoplasm. The physodes do not multiply by division, but are formed fresh within the protoplasm-threads by the separation of drops of a strongly refractive substance. In the formation of the zoospores of Chsetopteris their contents are mostly used up, and fresh ones are formed as the * SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, ci. (1892) pp. 560-83. t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., x. (1892) pp. 295-302 (1 pi.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 59 zoospores escape. They are but little affected by external agencies. The author has found these structures not only in the Plueosporcae, but in all other brown or green algae and flowering plants examined. Active Albumen in Plants.* — Herr 0. Loew sums up the arguments in favour of the existence of an active albumen in the living cell. The living protoplasm is, he states, composed of proteids entirely different from the ordinary soluble proteids, as well as from the proteids of dead protoplasm. This is shown by the property of respiration possessed by the living cell. On treating living plant-cells with dilute solutions of ammonia or organic bases or their salts, remarkable changes are observed, consisting either in the formation of numerous minute granules, as is the case on the application of most of the bases, or in the production of small globules flowing together to make relatively large drops of a substance of high refractive power, as happens on the application of weak bases like caffein or antipyrin ; these latter are the proteosomes. They give the principal reactions of albuminous bodies, but contain in most cases an admixture of small quantities of lecithin and tannin. On the other hand, bases do not act upon the albumen of dead cells, nor upon ordinary dissolved albumen. The proteosomes have the property of reducing dilute silver solutions in the absence of light, but lose this property on the action of acids. Soon after the death of the protoplasm, the proteosomes lose their characteristic properties, becoming hollow and turbid. C2) Other Cell-contents (including: Secretions). Chemistry of Chlorophyll.! — Dr. E. Schunck gives a resume of researches into the nature and constitution of chlorophyll since 1889. Gautier’s “ crystallized chlorophyll ” he regards as a product of decom- position formed during the process. Tschirch’s “ phyllocyanic acid ” is merely impure phyllocyanin. The “ phylloxanthin ” of Fremy is a mixture of several colouring matters ; true phylloxanthin resembles phyllocyanin so closely in its properties that they are probably isomeric substances. Pringsheim’s “ hypochlorin ” appears to be identical with phylloxanthin. Vegetable Lecithin.^ — Herr A. Likiernik finds, in the seeds of vetches and lupins, a substance identical in its properties, and in its products of decomposition, with the lecithin found in animal organisms. It was accompanied by lupeol and phaseol, bodies analogous to the cholesterins. Lupeol consists partly of a substance which, with the same amount of carbon, contains two atoms less of hydrogen than cholesterin ; in the lupin it appears to replace the cholesterin of other Leguminosze. Calcium oxalate in the Bark of Trees.§— According to Herr G. Kraus, the calcium oxalate which is contained in large quantities in the bark of various trees is a reserve deposit, and not an excretion ; it is redissolved in the spring and summer, passing into the cell-sap. * Nature, xlvi. (1892) pp. 491-2. f Ann. Bot., vi. (1892) pp. 231-44. Cf. this Journal, 1892, p. 381. t ‘Ueb. d. pflanzliche Lecithin u.s.w.,’ Zurich, 1891. See Bot. Centralbl. lii (1892) p. 19 ; and Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiv. (1891) pp. 71-4. § Ann. Agron., xviii. pp. 271-2. See Journ. Chem. Soc., 1892, Abstr., p. 1370 GO SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO (3) Structure of Tissues. Thickening of the Wall of Cambium-cells.* — Herr F. Kruger has made a series of observations on this subject, chiefly on Sambucus nigra , though the results were essentially the same in all cases, whether with Dicotyledons, Monocotyledons, or Gymnosperms, woody, herbaceous, succulent, or annual plants, aerial organs or roots. The thickenings, which appear lens-shaped in tangential sections, are bands on the radial walls ; they are separated from one another by roundish pits which do not include the whole breadth of the wall, and correspond to the thin spots on the tangential section. Though less con- spicuous than in the winter, they are present also in the summer. These thickenings occur not only in the closed cambium-layer, but also in the cambium-plate of the still isolated bundles, and can be followed back into the procambial bundles. They are to be met with also in the whole of the young growth, and in the bast-parenchyme. In the cells of this tissue there is a differentiation between the outer and inner portion of the thickenings, due to the formation of mucilage, and intercellular spaces may arise. The sieve-plates and the sieve-plate system of the longitudinal walls are derived directly from the thin spots of the cambium. Both simple and bordered pits appear on the radial walls of the vessels, tracheids, and prosenchymatous xylem-cells, as also directly from the thin spots of the cambium. On the other hand the sieve-plate system of the tangen- tial walls of the sieve-tubes, and the simple and bordered pits on the tangential walls of the prosenchymatous xylem-cells, tracheids, and vessels, are secondary phenomena, and have no direct connection with the thickenings of the cambium. Resin-canals of the Leaves of Abies pectinata.f — According to M. J. Godfrin there are always, in the branches of Abies pectinata , eight longitudinal secreting canals situated in the cortex, and belonging to the stem ; these he calls the cauline canals. In their lower part these canals branch abundantly. In the very young spring-branches, or at the summit of those which are of a greater age, the canal-system of the leaf is separated from that of the stem ; but later, without its being possible to indicate any exact time, the foliar canals unite with those of the stem by means of ramifications proceeding from the latter. The author regards the foliar canals of Abies pectinata as homologues of the resinous glands of the Cupressineae. Root-system of Mikania scandens4 — Mr. W. W. Rowlee describes a peculiar structure in the root of this plant. In sections are seen four modified cells, two of which belong to the endoderm, and two to the row of cells just outside. These cells always lie in contact with the phloem- cells, and are so arranged as to enclose a rectangular intercellular space of considerable size and definite shape. They have large nuclei, which are always on the side of the cell next to the intercellular space ; and these spaces extend to very near the growing-point of the root, thus ♦ Bot. Ztg., 1. 0892) pp. 633-40, 649-57, 665-73, 681-8, 702-8 (1 fig.). t Bull. Soc. Bot, France, xxxix. (1892) pp. 196-9. \ Bot. Gazette, xvii. (1892) pp. 276-7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 61 forming long tubes. The whole appears to be a contrivance for the promotion of aeration. C4) Structure of Organs. Resemblances in Habit between Plants belonging to different Genera.* — Dr. C. Reiche points out the frequent occurrence of a close resemblance in external appearance between (1) two species belonging to different genera of the same order, (2) two species belonging to widely separated genera. This resemblance must be largely due to the influence of external conditions, and is not an example of mimicry in the true sense of the word ; and the author suggests the need of caution in explaining similar resemblances in the animal kingdom as necessarily the result of mimicry. Structure of Pollen.t — Dr. P. Biourge has investigated the structure of pollen-grains obtained from a large number of plants — Dicotyledons, Monocotyledons, and Gymnosperms — especially in relation to their chemical constitution. He finds that pollen-grains always have two coats, an extine and an intine. Among Dicotyledons they present two general types, — (1) Spherical, with numerous pores and no furrows ; (2) ellipsoidal, with three pores ; the ellipsoid may be flattened or elongated, and the pores vary from the rounded to the elongated form, or may pass into furrows, often reaching the poles. In Monocotyledons simple grains have usually only one furrow ; the primitive form is that of a quarter of an orange. In both groups compound grains occur. The extine is composed of one or two layers, the outer of which is usually sculptured ; the number of pores and furrows varies, sometimes even in the same species. The intine is always continuous ; if there are pores, it is composed of several layers, of which one is always closed ; between the pores there are frequently thickenings. The wall of the pollen-tube is always formed by a drawing out of the intine ; it may be simple or composed of several layers. The extine is rarely composed entirely of cellulose, and is usually cutinized ; while the intine is composed of pure cellulose, or of pectic substances, or of a mixture of the two ; there are often special layers of callose. The wall of the pollen-tube is generally composed of cellulose. The wall of the pollen-mother-cells is thickened by the apposition of secondary layers before the division into tetrads ; and the same takes place in each daughter-cell. The extine appears before the intine ; the inner- most layer of the latter frequently only a short time before dehiscence. Staminal Hairs of Thesium.J — Miss M. F. Ewart describes the hairs which are found attached to the perianth-tube behind the stamens in various species of Thesium and in other allied genera of Santalaceae. These hairs are of two kinds — those which are comparatively short and thick, and directed downwards towards the base of the style, and those which are long and slender, and directed upwards towards the top of the anther. The hairs are unicellular, and contain a yellowish-green semi-fluid secretion which gives the microchemical reactions of a balsam ; they have also a basal cushion and a small rounded terminal cap. They * Yerhandl. Deutsch. Wiss. Yer. Santiago, ii. (1892) pp. 243-5 (1 pi.), f La Cellule, viii. (1892) pp. 45-76 (2 pis.), t Ann. Bot., vi. (1892) pp. 271-90 (1 pi.). 62 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO appear to be modified cells of the epiderm of tbe perianth, which have become enormously elongated. Their function appears to be undoubtedly connected with pollination. They serve either to collect the pollen- grains or to prevent the visiting insect from passing behind the stamens, and thus missing the stigma. A proposed classification is appended of the species of Thesium, according to the structure of the flower. Structure of the Integument of the Seed of Papilionaceae.* — Sigg. 0. Mattirolo and L. Buscalioni have examined the structure of the testa of the seed in a number of species of Papilionaceae, that of Phaseolus being described in detail. The testa consists of three layers — the layer of Malpighian cells (wax, clothing layer, or “ linea lucida the layer of columnar cells, and a lower layer. The outermost layer does not correspond to the cuticle, but to the clothing-layer of the intercellular spaces. Between the deeper layer of the testa and the endosperm is a separating layer, the cells of which are united by strings of protoplasm ; sieve-tubes were found in the vascular bundle of the funicle. In the chilary layer of the seed is a small pit, bounded by two motile lip-shaped structures, which the authors call the chilarinm. The hygroscopic separation of these structures causes the rupture of the testa. The purpose of the “ linea lucida ” appears to be the regulation of the absorption of water. The so-called “ twin tubercles ” of the seed appear to exercise a pressure on the vascular bundle which runs beneath them, especially on its phloem- portion, and thus prevent an excessive flow of nutrient material for the seed. The micropyle facilitates the entrance of fluids and gases into the interior of the seed. Seedlings.t — Sir John Lubbock gives in these volumes an account of a long series of experiments on the growth and development of seed- lings, principally of Dicotyledones, especially in relation to the con- nection between the form and structure of the cotyledons and that of the permanent leaves. After a general introduction, the phenomena connected with the germination of a very large number of species, arranged in their natural orders, are described. The various forces which influence the growing plant are discussed, and the author arrives at the general conclusion that, in the great majority of cases, it is the form of the fruit that governs that of the seed, and the form of the seed that determines that of the cotyledons. Branching Palms4 — Mr. D. Morris enumerates the tribes and genera of palms in which branched or forked stems occur. Branching is habitual in some species, and occasional in other species, of Hyphsene , and is also occasional in certain species of Bhopalostylis, Areca, Dictyo- sperma, Oreodoxa, Leopoldinia, Phoenix , Nannorhops, Borassus , and Cocos. The branching is frequently the result of injury to, or destruction of, the terminal bud, causing the development of adventitious or axillary buds below the apex, which produce branches. In some species it is * Mem. It. Accad. Sci. Torino, xlii. (1892) 186 pp. and 5 pis. See Bot. Ztg., 1. (1892) p. 694. Cf. this Journal, 1890, p. 625. t ‘ A Contribution to our Knowledge of Seedlings,’ London, 8vo, 1892, 2 vols., 608 and 646 pp. and 684 figs. X Journ. Linn. Soc. (Bot.), xxix. (1892) pp. 281 -98 (7 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 63 caused by the replacement of flower-buds by branch-buds ; the branches are then usually short, and are arranged alternately along the stem ; the terminal bud is apparently neither injured nor destroyed. Palms that usually produce suckers at the base are rarely branched at or near the apex. In no instance has a branched stem been recorded in a monocarpic palm. Dimorphism of the Root-tubercles of the Pea.* — Herr B. Frank states that there are on the roots of Pisum sativum two different kinds of tubercle. The ordinary kind are small, nearly hemispherical, usually unbranched, and not more than from 1-2 mm. in diameter ; these are mostly situated on the lower part of the tap-root and on the lateral roots. They contain the ordinary bacteroids. In addition there occur, chiefly on the upper part of the tap-root, but also on the lateral roots, much larger much branched or lobed tubercles, united into large coral- like masses as much as 1 • 5 cm. in diameter. The chief distinction between these and the ordinary tubercles is in the nature of their contents, a peculiar kind of bacteroid, composed not of proteids, but of amylodextrin, as is shown by the greater refrangibility and by micro-chemical reactions. The author proposes to term the two kinds albuminoid- and amylo-dextrin-tubercles. While the former contain nearly 7 per cent., the latter contain not quite 5 per cent, of nitrogen. The anatomical structure and the function of the two kinds of tubercle appear to be identical. Herr H. Moeller f denies that the two kinds of tubercle, which occur also in Trifolium , are in any way essentially distinct from one another. The larger kind are simply older tubercles of the ordinary kind in which fatty degeneration of the proteids has taken place. He further states his conviction that the “ filaments ” of Frank and Praz- mowski are much-branched arms of an invading zooglcea of bacteria, which become enclosed as a foreign substance by a cellulose-membrane, in consequence of the irritation of the protoplasm. It is the plant that forms this membrane, and thus endeavours to protect itself against the invading parasite. In reply Herr Frank J points out that Muller’s objection applies not to Pisum , but to Trifolium , in which the two kinds of tubercle do not exist. He now states that the granular contents of the bacteroids which are stained reddish-brown by iodine are not confined, as he before supposed, to the tubercles of Pisum , but occur also in those of other Papilionaceee. In Pisum they are confined to one kind of tubercle. In a further communication § Herr Moeller states that he finds the same results with Pisum as with Trifolium. Structure of Lathr8ea.|| — Dr. E. Heinricher has examined several points in the structure of this genus, especially in L. squamaria and clandestina. The capsule of L. clandestina is a “sling-fruit,” opening with con- siderable force to expel the seeds, which are reduced to not more than four in number. The wall of the capsule is composed of two layers, one * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., x. (1892) pp. 170-8 (1 p].). f Tom. cit., pp. 242-9. X Tom. cit., pp. 390-5. § Tom. cit., pp. 568-70. || SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, ei. (1892) pp. 423-77 (2 pis. and 2 figs.). 04 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO of which is a swelling, the other a resisting tissue. The force for bursting the capsule resides in the turgor of the cells of the former layer, assisted by the remarkable extensibility of its cell-walls. This tissue has no intercellular spaces. L. squamaria has also a “ sling- fruit,” but the mechanism for its bursting is different. When the fruit is ripe the epidermal cells of the placenta entirely lose their epidermal character, and become changed, some of them into thin-walled, others into spirally thickened cells, which assist in the detaching of the ripe seeds from the placenta. In all the species of Lathrsea , all the underground organs, both rhizomes and scale-leaves, are provided with stomates ; in L. clandestina there are no stomates on the aerial organs ; in L. squamaria they occur in the bracts, sepals, and carpels, but are for the most part functionless. Crystalloids occur both within and outside the cell-nucleus in L. squa- maria, but the two kinds are never found in the same cell ; the latter in the epidermal cells of the corolla. In the interior of the corolla of L. clandestina is found a ring of stiff unbranched septated hairs which still contain protoplasm although their walls are thickened in an annular or spiral manner. £. Physiology. (.1} Reproduction and Embryology. Embryo-sac of Myosuras.* — Mr. G. Mann has studied in great detail the development and structure of the embryo-sac of Myosurus minimus. Among a great variety of observations recorded, the following are the more important. Division of the archespore into four cells appears to be the rule ; though in ovules which are formed at a later period the number is only three. The gelatinous swelling of the walls of these cells is in every respect analogous to that which takes place in the sporocyte- walls of other sporanges, e. g. in the pollen-sacs of Angiosperms, in Selaginella, &c. Of several original archespores only one performs its function of giving rise to a number of sporocytes, and of these sporocytes only one completes its function of giving rise to spores. The physiological sporocyte or embryo-sac-cell is at first of the same size as the non-physiological sporocytes, but is soon greatly enlarged. At a later period food-material appears to pass, through the breaking down of cells, to the cells lying at the micropylar end of the embryo- sac, i. e. to the oosphere and synergids. The author regards the contents of the mature embryo-sac as consisting of eight sexual (female) cells. Of these only one, the oosphere, is physiologically sexual ; two, arising from different spores, the micropylar and antipodal primordial cells, conjugate, and give rise to the primary endosperm-cell; the remaining five undergo no further development. The embryo-sac, therefore, is not a megaspore ; but its contents divide into four mega- spores, two situated at the micropylar, and two at the antipodal end, and these again divide into the above-named eight female cells. Although the two synergids as a rule undergo no further development, yet they may, under special circumstances, perform the physiological function of oospheres. The eight female cells derived from the embryo-sac corre- Trana. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh, 1892, pp. 351-428 (2 pis.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 65 spond to the eight male reproductive cells which develope from one pol- len-mother-cell. The primary endosperm-cell must be regarded as a true embryo resulting from the union of two sexual cells, but destined as a storehouse of food-material for the impregnated oosphere. The structure of the nucleus and nucleoles of the oosphere is described in detail, and the stages in the formation of the endosperm cell, including the amoeboid movements of the cell-plasms of the two primordial cells, which lead to their conjugation. The directing spheres or tinoleucites play only an indirect part in the actual process of im- pregnation. The concluding portion of the paper is occupied by a discussion of the various theories of fertilization, and by a comparison of the pheno- mena in the animal and vegetable kingdoms. Sexual Organs of Flowers.* — Herr A. Schulz publishes a number of observations on the flowers of plants usually regarded as unisexual. In Alnus glutinosa hermaphrodite flowers or transitional forms are to be found at the base of all the male catkins. Hermaphrodite flowers also occur in the birch, though less frequently ; very rarely in the hazel ; in the oak there are frequently ovaries at the base of the male catkins, and rudiments of stamens in the female flowers. In the ash we have all kinds of condition — male, female, and hermaphrodite flowers, and monoecious, dioecious, and polygamous individuals. This tree is pro- bably on the road to becoming completely dioecious. Hybridization of the Vine.t— M. A. Millardet gives detailed prac- tical instructions for the hybridization of the vine and the culture of the hybrids, preceded by some general remarks. The so-called hybrid vines which are cultivated in Europe are not true hybrids, i. e. results of the crossing of distinct species, but spring from the crossing of different races of the same species, Vitis vinifera. In the native state, both V. vinifera and other species of the genus have two kinds of flower, hermaphrodite and male, the female organ being subject to all degrees of abortion in the latter. There is a re- markable difference in the stamens of the two kinds of flower : in the former the filaments are short and curved backwards, so as to remove the anther as far as possible from the stigma ; in the latter they are long and erect. In the cultivated varieties, however, all of which have only hermaphrodite flowers, the filaments are long and erect, as in the male flowers of the wild plant. The pollen-grains from the short curved stamens will not germinate in a solution of sugar ; but the author states that they will germinate on the stigma. In the wild state the vine is anemophilous, though the flowers have a powerful odour, the purpose of which is obscure. In the cultivated state two small Coleoptera, Dasytes griseus and Scraptia fusca , were observed abundantly on the flowers, and they may also probably take some part in the pollination. The author states that it is beyond question that in the vine it is the male parent that exercises the preponderating influence on the hybrid. Mr. S. A. Beach J enumerates eight American species of vine, and their hybrids and crosses, in which he has observed self-pollination. * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., x. (1892) pp. 303-13, 395-409. t Mem. Soc. Sci. Phys. et Nat. Bordeaux, ii. (1891) pp. 301-38 (6 figs.). t Bot. Gazette, xvii. (1892) p. 282. 1893. F 66 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Crossing of Cultivated Plants.* * * § — Herr W. Rimpau has experi- mented on the crossing of some of our most common agricultural plants. If a new form exhibits great variability in its descendants, it is pro- bably a hybrid ; while if its descendants maintain great constancy, it may be regarded as a spontaneous variety. Of wheat the author de- scribes ten artificial and nine natural hybrids; he obtained a fertile hybrid between wheat and rye. Of barley, two artificial and six natural hybrids are described ; in no case could a two-rowed form be fertilized by the pollen of barley with a larger number of rows. Of oats five natural, but no artificial hybrids were obtained. Peas produce very few natural hybrids; with the beet crossing is much easier. Pollination of the Primrose. f — Dr. R. Cobelli gives some measure- ments of the length of the corolla-tube and other points in the long- and short-styled forms of the primrose. He believes that, whether cross- fertilized or self-fertilized, pollination cannot take place without the agency of insects, and that these are chiefly TJirips and small Coleoptera ; Goniopteris Rhamni is also efficacious in effecting cross-pollination. (2) Nutrition and G-rowth (including- Germination, and Movements of Fluids). Effect of the Electric Light on Vegetation.} — M. G. Bonnier has made experiments on the effect of the electric light on the growth of a number of herbaceous plants, the illumination being kept up continu- ously for a period of seven months. He finds that, under glass, the electric light greatly accelerates the growth of herbaceous plants, pro- ducing an intense green. The structure of the organs is at first strongly differentiated ; but if the light is intense and prolonged for months, the new organs formed in the plant present remarkable modifications of structure in their various tissues, and are less differentiated, but always rich in chlorophyll. The direct electric light is, by its ultra-violet rays, injurious to the normal development of tissue, even where the lamps are at a distance of more than three metres. When trees ( Pinus austriaca , P. sylvestris , beech, oak, birch) are ex- posed to a strong electric light, without interruption, by day and night, the plant appears to become exhausted by the continuous respiration, and the development of the tissues is feebler. Intervals of bright electric light and of darkness produce a similar effect, though not so marked. Influence of Position on the Form of Organs.§ — Prof. J. Wiesner distinguishes between anisotropy, or a change in the direction of growth due to external forces, and anisomorphy, or a change in the form of an organ caused by its position in relation to the horizon, or to its mother- axis. One of the most common illustrations of anisomorphic organs is anisophyllous leaves. With regard to the direction of growth, organs may be either orthotropous (vertical), hemiorthotropous, or clinotropous. The author further defines the following kinds of unequal growth : epitrophy , when the growth of the cortex or wood is greater on the upper * ‘ Kreuzungsproducte landwirthschaftlicher Cultur - pflanzen,’ Berlin, 1891, 14 pis. See Bot. Centralbl., li. (1892) p. 359. f SB. K. K. Zool.-Bot. Gesell. Wien, xlii. (1892) pp. 73-8. % Comptes Kendus, cxv. (1892) pp. 447-50, 475-8. § SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, ci. (1892) pp. 657-705. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 67 sido of the organ, or of buds or slioots on tho upper side; hypotrophy , when the reverse is the case ; amphitrophy , when the growth is greatest on the shoots and buds on the sides of the mother-shoot. This is a con- trivance for obtaining greater light by the leaves of very leafy trees, or of shrubs growing in the shade. Dissemination of Plants by Buffaloes.* * * § — Mr. E. L. Berthoud calls attention to the facility with which seeds, and even roots, of plants may have been carried from one part of North America to another in the hairy “ pads ” on the front of the buffalo during its annual migrations. He attributes to this, and not to the survival of an Arctic flora, the occurrence of many plants, such as species of Cactus , in the vicinity of Lake Winnipeg. Dissemination of the Seeds of Oxalis stricta.|— - Mr. E. Walker describes the mechanism by which the seeds of this plant are violently thrown out of the capsule when ripe, frequently to a distance of three feet. The erect capsule becomes flaccid on maturity, and the active agent in the propulsion is the outer coat of the seed itself, which consists of a translucent, shining, membranous envelope stretched tightly over the seed. When it bursts, it suddenly and elastically turns inside out, and projects the seed by doubling back against the axis of the capsule. Physiology and Biology of Seeds.J — According to Prof. A. Tschircli, the main purpose of the hard sclereid-layer of the testa of seeds is a protective one, while that of the mucilaginous epiderm of certain seeds is to fix them in the soil while germinating. The testa of all seeds has, in addition, in the young state, a layer of parenchymatous cells, which, in almost all cases, disappears on maturity. This layer is a transitory receptacle for food-materials. Cell-nuclei are present in all such recep- tacles, whether in the endosperm or the perisperm. There is always a means of conduction of the reserve-materials from the endosperm or perisperm to the embryo, varying according to the structure of the seed. When seeds of Dicotyledons germinate on the surface of the soil, the aleurone is dissolved, and its place is taken by chromatophores, which divide actively. In Lupinus chlorophyll is stored up in large quantities in the cotyledons even of unripe seeds ; this disappears almost entirely when the seed is ripe, and is again formed during germination. Parasitism of Cynomorium.§ — Prof. G. Arcangeli has carried on a further series of experiments with regard to the parasitism of Cyno- morium coccineum , especially on Atriplex nummularia. He failed to find any true intramatrical thallus corresponding to that of the Rafflesiacese and Balanophoraceae. A good development of the Cynomorium was also obtained on a number of other plants belonging to a variety of natural orders. Growth in Thickness of Trees. |j — In reply to Prof. R. Hartig, Herr L. Jost adduces further arguments in favour of his view as to the * Bot. Gazette, xvii. (1892) pp. 321-6. f Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1892, p. 288. % Verhaudl. Schweiz. Naturf. Gesell. Davos, Ixxiii. (1892) pp. 260-6. Cf. this Journal, 1892, p. 233. § Bull. Soc. Bot. Itah, i. (1892) pp. 345-7. Cf. this Journal, 1892, p. 391. II Bot. Ztg, 1. (1892) pp. 489-95, 505-10. Cf. this Journal, 1892, p. 499. F 2 68 SUMMARY or CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO mode of increase in thickness, and the formation of annual rings in dicotyledonous trees. Influence of an Excessive Proportion of Carbonic Acid on the Growth of Roots.* — M. S. Jentys finds, from a series of experiments carried on chiefly on wheat and rye, that a condensation of carbon dioxide in the soil, even to the extent of from 4 to 12 per cent., has not such an injurious effect on the growth of roots as the experiments of Bohm seemed to indicate. The results, however, varied somewhat with different plants. Assimilation of Carbon dioxide.j* — By treating specimens of Spiro- gyra from which the starch had been entirely removed with substances which readily break up into simpler constituents, of which formic aldehyde is one, Herr T. Bokorny showed that these plants have the power of separating formic aldehyde from the nutrient solution, and then converting it into starch. This appears to furnish an argument in favour of the view that formic aldehyde is the substance first formed in the production of carbo-hydrates from the carbon dioxide of the atmosphere. Mode of Absorption of free Nitrogen by the Leguminosae +— Herr P. Kossowitsch describes in detail a series of experiments under- taken for the purpose of determining through what organs it is that the Leguminosae have the power of absorbing free nitrogen from the atmo- sphere. The plant experimented on was Pisum sativum , and the modus operandi consisted in the substitution of hydrogen for nitrogen in the surrounding air. The result arrived at was that in all probability, the root is the organ where the free nitrogen passes into the combined condition. Sigg. V. Alpe and A. Menozzi § confirm Frank’s observations of the absorption of free nitrogen by plants, with the assistance of microbes, especially by the root-tubercles of Leguminosae. Exchange of Gases in the Root-tubercles of Leguminosae. || — Herr B. Frank describes the root-tubercles of the Leguminosae ( Vida Faba ) as being enclosed in several layers of suberized cells permeated by inter- cellular passages, which penetrate the cortical tissue of the tubercle (but not the meristematic tissue which completely surrounds the “ bacteroid- tissue ”) as a perfectly closed envelope. The “ bacteroid-tissue ” is again itself permeated in all directions by intercellular spaces which are not in communication with those of the cortical layer, while these latter are so with the external air. The air in the “ bacteroid tissue ” must be derived from its own cells. When the tubercles are isolated they give off abun- dance of nitrogen gas after a time, especially the “ albuminoid- tubercles ” ; but this appears to be the result of the commencement of decay, and not to be a normal phenomenon. The mode in which * Anzeig. Akad. Wiss. Krakau, 1892, pp. 306-10. See Bot. Centralbl., lii. (1892) p. 93. f Biol. CentralbL, xii. (1892) pp. 481-4. x Bot. Ztg., 1. (1892) pp. 697-702, 713-23, 729-38, 745-56, 771-4 (1 pi. and 6 figs.). $ Bull. Notiz. Agrar. del Ministero d’ Agricoltura, 1892, 32 pp. See Bot. Centralbl., li. (1892) p. 337. U Ber. Deutsch. But. Gesell., x. (1892) pp. 271-81. ^ Cf. supra, p. 63. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. G9 the “ bacteroid-tissue ” gives up its nitrogenous constituents for the nourishment of the plant is still obscure. (3) Irritability. Causes of Sensitive Movements.* * * § — M. L. Claudel regards the movements of certain organs in Astericus maritimus, Carlina acanthifolia , and Anastatica hierochuntica as hygroscopic. Ceteris paribus , the cells or fibres contract under the influence of desiccation in proportion to the thickness of their walls ; and the longest fibres are those which contract least in their longest dimension. Herr W. Pfeifer f considers that the movements of the stamens of the Cynareae cannot be explained by imbibition or the elasticity of the cell- walls ; they are rather due to the exosmose of soluble substances, or to the formation of substances of a smaller osmotic power in the active cells. Nyctitropic, Gamotropic, and Carpotropic Movements.! — Prof. A. Hansgirg gives the results of observations on a very large number of species with respect to the various kinds of movement observed in the stalks of buds, flowers, and fruits. Nyctitropic movements — i. e. daily changes of position of the stalk, recurring during the whole period of flowering, which cause the bud or flower to bend downwards during the night or in rainy weather, and to stand erect, exposed to the sun, and visible to visiting insects during the daytime — were observed in many species belonging to many different orders. These movements are always most considerable during the early period of blossoming. Far more common than these are other movements which occur only once, before or after the opening of the flower, or during the ripening of the fruit : — Gamotropic for the purpose of making the flower visible to insects from a distance, and facilitating pollination ; and carpotropic for assisting the dissemination of the seeds. The very numerous examples of these movements are referred to six distinct types, repre- sented by the genera Oxalis , Primula , Veronica, Aloe, Frag aria, and Aquilegia. Similar “ hydrocarpic ” movements occur in some aquatic plants. The phenomena in question are almost invariably the result of a combination of three factors, viz. of geotropic, heliotropic, and spon- taneous curvatures, or of only two of these. The heliotropic and geotropic curvatures may be either positive or negative, and examples are given of all these various combinations. In another communication, § Prof. Hansgirg distinguishes seven types of carpotropic curvature, viz. those of Oxalis , Primula, Coronilla, Veronica, Aloe, Fragaria, and Aquilegia. The same author || gives also lists of plants which display the follow- ing phenomena : — Periodic curvatures of flower-stalks ; Periodic opening * ‘ Observ. s. le mouvement de quelques plantes hygrometriques,’ Marseille, 10 pp. and 1 pi. See Bonnier’s Rev. Gen. de Bot., iv. (1892) p. 366. f Abhandl. K. Sachs. Gesell. Wiss., xvi. (1891) pp. 325-37. j Biol. Centralbl., xi. (1892) pp. 449-64. Cf. this Journal, 1891, p. 372. § Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., x. (1892) pp. 485-94. |j Bot. Centralbl., lii. (1892) pp. 385-93. 70 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO and closing of flowers and inflorescences ; Plants with ephemeral flowers ; Plants with agamotropic flowers ; Nyctitropic movements of leaves ; Paraheliotropic movements of leaves ; Irritability of leaves ; Irritability of stamens ; Xerochastic curvatures. Propagation of Heliotropic Irritability.* — Herr W. Rothert has investigated this subject, with a view of deciding between the conflicting theories of Darwin and Wiesner. The objects specially observed were cotyledons of Avena sativa and PJialaris canariensis , which display re- markable heliotropic curvatures, seedlings of Panicum sanguinale and miliaceum and Setaria viridis, young plants of Brassica Napus , Tropseolum minus , &c. ; in all cases the results were very similar. The author finds the capacity for the propagation of heliotropic irritation to be widely distributed, though the intensity varies, and in many cases it is difficult to detect. In heliotropic seedlings it is very usual, though not universal, for the direct heliotropic sensibility — i. e. the sensitiveness of the protoplasm to illumination from one side — to vary in the different parts of an organ, and the greater degree of sensi- tiveness is limited to a comparatively small apical region ; but direct heliotropic sensitiveness is never confined entirely to the apex. When this sensitiveness is not uniform, the variation is one of the factors in determining heliotropic curvature. A distinction must be drawn between direct and indirect heliotropic sensitiveness ; the two together make up the entire heliotropic sensitiveness of an organ or part of an organ. Growth and heliotropic sensitiveness are entirely independent of one another ; not only can growth take place without this sensitiveness, but there are organs, like the cotyledons of PaniceaB and the internodes of Galium , which are heliotropically sensitive after their growth has com- pletely ceased. The power of heliotropic curvature of an organ is, ceteris paribus, a function of its intensity of growth and of its entire heliotropic sensitiveness ; it disappears when either of these functions is reduced to zero ; but there may be organs, like the hypocotyl of the Paniceee, which curve heliotropically although they have no direct heliotropic sensitiveness. Experiments on the removal of the head from growing seedlings showed that the head acts in two different ways : — in diminishing the intensity of growth, and in completely arresting heliotropic and geo- tropic sensitiveness. But both these results are only temporary ; after a time the rapidity of growth and both kinds of sensitiveness again increase ; and, after about twenty-four hours, the normal condition is again attained. Artificial Production of Rhythm in Plants.! —Prof. F. Darwin and Miss D. F. M. Pertz find that, by the use of an intermittent klinostat, they can produce a rhythmic movement, i. e. a regular succession of nutations in different directions, in young growing plants (valerian, dandelion, canary-grass), due to the action of opposite and alternate stimuli of a geotropic and heliotropic character. The period of each rhythm was, in all cases, almost exactly half an hour. The rhythm continues after the conditions which have built it up have ceased to act ; * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., x. (1892) pp. 374-90. f Ann. Bot., vi. (1892) pp. 245-64 (6 figs.). ZOOLOGY A.ND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 71 and, in this and other respects, the phenomena thus brought about artificially are compared to the nyctitropic movements of leaves. The authors consider that the results of these experiments confirm Charles Darwin’s theory that all growth curvatures are developments or exaggerations of circumuutation. (4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). Oil-splitting and Glycoside-splitting Ferments.* — A further inves- tigation of the action of these two kinds of ferment in the plant leads Dr. W. Sigmund to the conclusion that no sharp line can be drawn between them, some of the ferments hitherto regarded as belonging to one of these two classes being able, in certain cases, to perform the function usually attributed to the other. 7. General. Relationship between Plants and Snails. f — Sig. L. Piccioli enu- merates the various protective structures in plants to prevent destruction by snails. One of the most important of these is tannic acid, which occurs in large quantities in the leaves of many leguminous plants, in many plants belonging to the section Cynarocephalae of Composite, in several genera of Rosaceae, in several species of Sambucus , in Humulus Lupulus , Cannabis sativa , Ac. The latex of many Composita3, &c., is also protective, also the essential oil contained in the glands on the leaves of Labiatae, of Juglans regia , Eucalyptus globulus , &c., and the raphides in the cells of Arum maculatum , species of Cactus , and many others. The author believes the Gastropoda to be endowed with a distinct sense of smell. Purely mechanical defences, such as a weft of hairs, spines, Ac., occur in many plants, but are of less importance than the chemical. B. CRYPTOGAMIA. Cryptogamia Vascularia. Embryology of Angiopteris.j;— Prof. J. B. Farmer has studied the development of the embryo of Angiopteris evecta. The prothallium resembles the thallus of Anthoceros rather than the prothallium of most ferns, but is somewhat larger, and orbicular in shape. The antherid is formed from a superficial cell of the pro thallium, which divides, by a wall parallel to the surface, into an outer shallow and an inner cubical cell. The former gives rise to the cover-cells by walls at right angles to the free surface, while the inner one originates the antherozoid mother-cells by successive bipartitions. The antherozoids are large, and are formed from the nucleus of the mother-cell. The antherids are distributed irregularly on both surfaces of the prothallium ; the arche- gones occur on the lower surface only. The basal wall of the fertilized oosperm is formed, as in Isoetes and Equisetum, at right angles to the axis of the archegone ; the further cell- * SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, ci. (1892) pp. 549-59. Cf. this Journal, 1891 p. 221. t Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital., i. (1892) pp. 338-45. Cf. this Journal, 1891, p. 499. I Ann. Bot., vi. (1892) pp. 265-70 (1 pi); and Proc. Roy. Soc., li. (1892) pp. 471-4. SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO division is irregular. The two anterior epibasal contents together give rise to the cotyledon ; and the apex of the stem is formed, not as in the leptosporangiate ferns, from one octant only, hut from hoth of the posterior epibasal octants ; the foot originates from the posterior pair of hypobasal octants beneath the stem ; the root is formed from an anterior hypobasal octant. The root-apex in the embryo contains a group of meristematic cells, instead of the single apical cell characteristic of leptosporangiate ferns. There is also no single apical cell from which all the later stem-tissue is derived. When the embryo has reached a certain size it bursts through the pro thallium, the root boring through below, while the cotyledon and stem grow through the upper surface. In this process Angiopteris is peculiar among those ferns whose embryogeny is known. The stipular structures characteristic of Marattiacese are absent from the first two leaves; the leaf-stalks are covered with hairs which contain a large quantity of tannin. Algse. Vegetable Growths as Evidence of the Purity or Impurity of Water * — Mr. A. W. Bennett discusses the value of the presence of vegetable growths in running streams as evidence of the purity or impurity of the water. His conclusion is that, in by far the greater number of cases, green living aquatic plants, whether phanerogamic Or cryptogamic, can have nothing but a favourable influence on the purity of the water by promoting its oxygenation. This is especially the case with the Cladophoraceae and the Conjugate. An exception occurs in the case of certain blue-green Algae or Proto phyta, Oscillaria, Anabsena , Rivularia , &c., which contain no chlorophyll in the ordinary sense of the word, and, in their decay, give out noxious and foetid gases, which render the water unfit for domestic purposes. Production of Zoospores. f — According to Prof. G. Klebs, the two phenomena of general growth and of non-sexual propagation in Algae are antagonistic to one another ; the same cell cannot perform the two functions at the same time. The production of zoospores is promoted, not by any single condition, but by the concurrence of a number ; and, under favourable conditions of light, temperature, moisture, and the chemical constitution of the medium, the production of zoospores may be brought about even in very young cells. Growth of Cladophora and Chaetomorpha.J — Herr L. Kolderup Rosenviuge states that the so-called coalescence of growth which frequently takes place between a main filament and its branch in these algae is not a true coalescence ; it originates from a gradual increase in length of the portion of the wall beneath the angle of the branch, which is common to the main axis and the branch. A very similar phenomenon occurs in Polysiphonia. A secondary coalescence of parts originally distinct may, however, take place. The prolification of cells of Clado- * St. Thom. Hosp. Reports, xx. (1892) pp. 51-8. Cf. this Journal, 1890, p. 489. t Arch. Sci. Phys. et Nat., xxviii. (1892) pp. 376-9. X Bot. Tidskr., xviii. (1892) pp. 29-58 (23 figs.). See Bot. Centralbl., li. (1892) p. 409. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 73 phora and Clisetomorpha is also described ; it appears to be a mechanical contrivance for resisting traction. Propagation of Prasiola.* — Prof. G. v. Lagerheim describes two modes of propagation in a new variety of Prasiola mexicana. In ono mode certain cells become detached from the margin of the tballus, after the conversion of the intermediate membrane into mucilage, round themselves off, and directly reproduce the thallus. In the other mode the single layer of cells becomes divided by horizontal and vertical walls into one or two layers of four-celled sporanges. These four cells become free by the conversion into mucilage of the membrane of the mother- cell, and are motionless spores of irregular roundish, ovoid, rectangular, or triangular form. The second mode of reproduction presents strong analogies with the formation of tetraspores, and the author regards it as an argument in favour of the alliance of Prasiola with the Bangiacese, which he con- siders as directly derived from the Chlorophyeeae. He has observed pyrenoids with distinct crystalloids in the vegetative cells of Prasiola. Reproduction of Vaucheria.| — Prof. G. Klebs has investigated the various modes of sexual and non-sexual reproduction in Vaucheria sessilis. He finds that the zoospores themselves, or the germinating filament springing from the zoospores, may give rise either to zoospores again or to sexual organs, or they may remain sterile, the results varying according to the external conditions of nutriment, temperature, and light. Similar variable results were obtained from the culture of oosperms. As in Hydrodictyon, there is no regular alternation of generations. A powerful production of zoospores takes place when a vigorous tuft undergoes a change in its external conditions, whether from air into water or from running into stagnant water, or a great change in the amount of light. The conditions for the formation of the sexual organs are much more complicated than those for growth. A low temperature or a small amount of light will maintain a tuft in the sterile condition for an indefinite period. The formation of the sexual organs was found to obey the same laws in Vaucheria terrestris , hamata, geminata , uncinata , and aversa ; but the phenomena of non-sexual propagation differ in the different species. In V. terrestris and aversa there a, re no special organs for this mode ; V. geminata and uncinata produce motionless spores. V. clavata appears to differ from V. sessilis only in its physiological phenomena ; growing in rapidly running water, its sexual activity is greatly reduced, while the formation of zoospores is proportionately promoted. Fungi. Mastigochytrium, a new genus of Chytridiacege.J — Prof. G. v. Lagerheim describes under this name a new genus of Chytridiacese allied to Bhizophidium, with the following diagnosis : — Zoosporangia extramatricalia, sessilia, unicellularia, basi filamentis mycelicis radici- formibus ramosis, matrice immersis et pilis validis lateralibus instructa ; * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., x. (1892) pp. 366-74 (1 pi.). t Yerhandl. Naturf. Gesell. Basel, x. p. 45. See Bot. Centralbl., li. (1892) p. 377. % Hedwigia, xxxi. (1892) pp. 185—9 (1 pi.). 74 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO zoosporaB (non visas) per ostiola expulsae ; sporangia perdurantia ? The only species, M. Saccardise , is parasitic on Saccardia Durantae , itself a parasitic fungus from Ecuador. Mycele of Peronospora.* * * § — Dr. P. Voglino Las determined by ex- periment that the mycele of the Peronospora of the vine may pass from the autumn leaves into those of the young buds, where it remains with- out further development through the winter, and may spread, in the next spring, to the leaves and inflorescence. Fungus-parasites on Mushrooms.f — According to MM. J. Costantin and L. Dufour, mushroom-beds are liable to two diseases caused by the attacks of parasitic fungi, and known as “ mole ” and “ chancre.” The former causes sponginess of the tissues, and is produced by a Mycogone allied to M. cervina , which is the chlamydosporous form of a Hypomyces (Ascomycetes). It has also a sclerodermic form. The fungus which causes chancre presents the appearance of a Verticillium , but is simply the conidiferous form of the same or of a closely allied species. Instruc- tions are given for obviating or curing the diseases. M. J. Costantin J further describes three other parasitic diseases which attack mushroom-spawn, known as “ vert de gris,” “ platre,” and “ chanci.” The first and second of these are produced by fungi belong- ing to the Mucedineae, both types of new genera ; that which causes “ vert de gris ” he describes under the name Mycelioplithora lutea , the fungus which produces “ platre ” is named Verticilliopsis infestans. The fungus to which “chanci” is due has a peculiar odour, but its organs of reproduction have not been observed. The spread of these parasites is greatly assisted by certain insects which infest the mushroom-beds, especially Sciara ingenua. Commenting on these communications, M. E. Prillieux § states that the disease known as “molle” or “mole ” is due to the parasitism of a fungus which often produces at the same time fructifications of two different kinds, characteristic of the genera Mycogone and Verticillium ; the Mycogone bears a very close resemblance to ill", rosea. Fungus-parasites of Apples and Pears. ||— Dr. P. A. Dangeard de- scribes in detail the various diseases to which apple and pear trees are liable. The following are due to the attacks of parasitic fungi : — (1) Diseases of the stem and branches : — “ le chancre cancereux ” is always found to be accompanied by Nectria ditissima, which is doubtless the cause of tbe disease ; “ le chancre noduleux ” is caused by the attacks of a louse, Schizoneura lanigera var. Pyri , accompanied by the Cladosporium form of a pyrenomycetous fungus, Cucurbitaria elongata or Biplodia mamillana ; ordinary cancer is produced by Fusicladium pyrinum ; dry-rot of the wood by Polyporus sulphureus, or less often by PtycJiogaster auran- tiacus or Hydnum Schiedermayri. (2) Diseases of the leaves : — “ fuma- gine ” of the leaves is caused by Fusicladium dendriticum ; rust by * Giorn. coltivatore di Casalmonferrato, 1892, 7 pp. and 5 figs, t Comptes Rendus, cxiv. (1892) pp. 498-501; Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxix. (1892) pp. 143-6, 148-9; and Rev. Gen. de Bot. (Bonnier ) iv. (1892) pp. 401-6, 463-72, 549-57 (4 pis.). J Comptes Rendus, cxiv. (1892) pp. 849-51. § Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxix. (1892) pp. 146-8 (1 fig.). j| Le Botaniste (Dangeard), iii. (1892) pp. 33-116 (10 pis. and 3 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 75 several species of Gyninosporangium , chiefly G. Sabinse, juniperinum, and tremelloides ; oidium of the apple by Erysiplie Tuckeri and other ill- defined allied species. (3) Diseases of the fruit cancer is due to the attacks of Fusicladium dendriticum ; dry-rot (pourriture) to Monilia fructigena. (4) Diseases of the root : — the disease known as “ pour- ridie,” or “ blauc desracines” is produced by the rhizomorphous form of Agaricus melleus. Fermentation of the roots is a phenomenon due to asphyxia (want of oxygen) in living cells, containing sugar, causing the splitting up of this substance into alcohol and carbon dioxide, without the presence of any microbe. The insects which are destructive of apples and pears are also described, and remedies suggested for the various diseases. Discriminating and Photographing Yeasts.* — Herr P. Lindner points out that stroke cultivations on wort-gelatin render it possible to dis- tinguish between different yeast races, though their discrimination is easier effected by means of the giant colony. The ordinary view is that this shape of yeast-colonies is incapable of affording a diagnostic cri- terion, owing to their great similitude. The author, however, shows that this is only true for small colonies. If yeast races be cultivated in flasks containing strong wort-gelatin until the colonies are very large, the shapes of these giant colonies are characteristic. The form and appearance of the colonies was fixed by photography, by which the differences among the colonies was per- manently recorded. Zirconium light was used for illumination. The author also alludes to a “ negro yeast,” isolated from pombe. This might be called a “ fission-yeast ” as it does not sprout but divides into two halves by the pushing in of a partition. Each half, after division, grows up to the same size as the mother-cell. Spores are formed, and it ferments wort very well. Influence of different Wine Yeasts on the Character of the Wine.j — Herr T. Kosutany mentions that at the present time the presence of the Phylloxera has been ascertained in 1717 parishes in Hungary, and that the attempt to repair the devastation produced by this insect by the introduction of American vines (plants resistant to the pest) has failed, owing to the disagreeable after-taste of wine made from these grapes. The author attempted to determine to what factors the character of a wine was due — whether they were primary, i.e. connected with the must, or secondary, i. e. set up during fermentation. Of course, if they were primary, they were inevitable, but if secondary, they might be pre- ventive. Wine must made from Hungarian grapes, and containing 22 • 1 per cent, of sugar, was inoculated with various kinds of wine yeasts, and then fermented. The wine thus made showed notable differences not only in chemical composition — e. g. with the same must Meneser yeast produced 9*43, and Griinweltliner yeast 10-77 per cent, of alcohol — but also in bouquet, odour, and taste. The author hopes that, by pursuing this line of investigation, a * Wocbenschr. f. Brauerei, 1891, p. 815. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Para- sitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 250-1. t Landw. Versuchsstationen, 1892, p. 217. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Para- sitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 301-2. 76 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO better class of wine may eventually be produced from grapes of poor quality. Fermentation of Bread.* * * § — The fermentation of bread, says Boutroux, is principally an alcoholic fermentation of the sugar in the flour, in which the yeast plays a double part. It causes the formation of gas, which makes the bread swell up, and prevents the bacteria present in the flour from developing, whereby the souring of the dough, and decom- position of the gluten is obviated. As the gluten remains intact, every gas bladder in bread is incased in an elastic membrane, which on baking becomes still more delicate. It is rare to find yeast in bread, and impossible to discover bacteria by microscopical means in fermenting dough ; and the probable reason of this is that as dough is made with very little water, and as almost all of this is absorbed by the gluten and the starch, very little remains for the yeast cells. Influence of Yeast on the Smell of Wine.t — Sig. G. Soncini has observed that if must of wine be fermented with yeasts obtained from different districts, the wine will have a bouquet resembling the wine of the country from which the yeast was derived. Influence of Tartaric Acid on Brewer’s Yeast.J — Dr. E. C. Hansen, in some experiments made with brewer’s yeast, which are practically a continuation of those made for the purpose of testing the value of Pasteur’s pure yeast, has found that the cultivated varieties are com- pletely repressed by the wild races. The experiments were made with yeast from a well-conducted brewery. The yeasts were cultivated in Pasteur’s cane-sugar tartaric acid solution, and kept constantly at 9° C., or at the ordinary room temperature. In the course of the experiments it was found that a solution of 10 per cent, saccharose and 4 per cent, tartaric acid formed an excellent medium for showing whether there were any wild sorts in yeast lees. Three or four cultivations sufficed to give a decisive result. Morphology and Biology of the Thrush Fungus (Oidium albicans).§ — MM. G. Roux and G. Linossier obtained cultivations by means of Esmarch’s and Koch’s methods on gelatin, at 15°-20°. The colonies attained an ultimate diameter of 4-5 cm. They did not liquefy gelatin, were at first white, but later on became brownish. The source of the cultivation was aphthous patches in the mouth. The form of the fungus was predominantly yeast-like ; that is, in most of the cultiva- tions small oval bodies were the prevailing shapes, although in some media (melon) the filamentous were in the greatest abundance. No purely filamentous cultivation was obtained, all being mixed with yeast- like forms. The fungus was grown on 27 different media, details of * Le Bulletin Med., 1891, p. 793. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. n. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 153-4. f Nuova Rassegna di Viticoltura ed Enologia d. R. Scuola di Conegliano, 1891, No. 16. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 253. X Zeitschr. f. d. ges. Brauwesen, xv. (1892) p. 2. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 146-8. § Arch. Med. Exp. et Mat. Pathol., 1890, pp. 62-87, 222-52. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xi. (1892) pp. 733-6; xii. (1892) pp. 162-5. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 77 which are given in the original. The vexed question of spore-formation is next discussed, and the authors reconcile contradictory observations by reporting that the various forms described are merely phases in the development of the clilamydospore. These bodies are developed at the end of a mycele, and are spheroidal cells with well-defined membrane, and, at first, finely granular contents. The contents soon aggregate to form a central body, surrounded by a number of highly refracting spherules. From the chlamydospores is developed the fungus, but the exact manner was not observed. The authors conclude their morpho- logical examination by pointing out that the thrush fungus cannot be ranked with the family of Saccharomyces, and that the determination of its exact position is not at present possible. The biological relations of Oidium albicans are considered under three divisions ; the first dealing with conditions associated with change in the form of the fungus ; the second with the influence of an acid or alkaline reaction of the medium ; and the third with the nutrition of the fungus. In the course of these researches some interesting facts were brought to light, e. g. the simpler the molecular weight of the food- stuff supplied — at any rate, as far as carbohydrates are concerned — the more suitable was this as a pabulum ; and the more complex the nutrient medium and its constituents, the more mixed did the vegetative forms of the fungus become. Cultivations constantly exhibited the tendency to retain their special characters for several generations. The most favourable reaction for the medium was a slightly alkaline one at starting. If too alkaline, growth was at first retarded, but after- wards accelerated owing to decomposition taking place in the medium. Slight acidity seemed to have no action on the growth, though too much acid stopped it. In any favourable conditions of growth the yeast form was predominant ; when the conditions were inimical, then the filamentous form occurred ; and, of course, there were many intermediate phases, called globoso-filamentous. The action of various gases and the effect of the absence of air on growth are exhaustively discussed. One of the methods of observation pursued deserves a passing notice. It was the same as that used by liaulin for Aspergillus niger, the principle of which is to weigh the results of crops of a pure cultivation obtained under definite stringent conditions. In this way the value of different nutritive media was appreciated. Pure Cultivations of Actinomycosis and its Transmissibility to Animals.* — Prof. M. Wolff and Dr. J. Israel have succeeded in making pure cultivations from a case of Actinomycosis hominis by sowing the granules on agar kept at 37° and devoid of air. Successful cultures on eggs, fresh or boiled for three to four minutes, were also obtained. Within and around the grains distributed over the agar surface are formed granulations, at first hyaline, but afterwards becoming opaque. On transferring the first cultivations to a fresh agar surface in three to five days numerous little granulations, resembling dewdrops, not larger than a pin’s head, make their appearance. These usually remain separate, but may become confluent. Though the microbe is undoubtedly * Virchow’s Archiv, cxxvi. p. 11 (8 pis.). See Annales de Micrographie, iv (1892) pp. 354-6. 78 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO an anaerobe, yet the presence of a small quantity of oxygen does not prevent its growth, for it will develope in puncture cultivations even though the access of air be not prevented — of course best at the lowest part of the puncture. It grows very well in alkaline bouillon. The microscopical appearances presented by this microbe are very variable: short and long rods, simple, straight, branching or wavy filaments, cocci and felt-like masses, especially from the egg cultures, are to be seen. The cocci are sometimes found free, but more frequently within the rods or filaments. The authors refrain from expressing a definite opinion as to their exact nature, but do not regard them as spores or degenera- tion conditions. They stain well by Gram’s method. In none of the cultivations were club-shaped elements met with, bat by injecting these cultivations into animals, tumours containing club- shaped bodies were produced. Twenty-two animals were inoculated with the agar cultivations, and in all, except one (a sheep), Actinomyces tumours were developed. Most of the inoculations were injections into the peritoneal sac. Pure cultivations were made from the tumours in the infected animals. The authors consider that this micro-organism should be placed among the Mucedineae, although its pleomorphism is obviously very marked. Alternation of Generations in the Uredineae.* * * § — Herr P. Dietel lias established a new example of this phenomenon, identifying JEcidium Bellidiastri , parasitic on Bellidiastrum MicJielii , as a stage in the development of a new species of Puccinia , P. firma, found on Carex jirma. Uredineae parasitic on Berberis.f — Herr P. Magnus describes several new species of Uredineae parasitic on various species of Berberis : — TJropyxis Naumanniana on B. buxifolia , from an island in the Magellan Straits, distinguished by the pedicel of the teleutospores being broader than the spores themselves ; Puccinia Meyeri- Alberti, from Chile, in which the groups of teleutospores are surrounded by a tuft of paraphyses ; JEcidium Leveilleanum, from Chile, characterized by the flask-shaped form of the cells of the peridium ; Puccinia neglecta, on a Berberis- leaf of uncertain origin ; Uredo Stolpiana , from Chile, in which the germ- pores of the uredospores are distributed in two rings. Fungus-parasites of cultivated plants. — M. E. PrillieuxrJ describes a disease which attacks the leaves of the quince, causing them to turn brown and flaccid. It is caused by a Monilia , nearly allied to M. Lin- hartiana , parasitic on Prunus Padus, which is the conidial form of Sclerotinia Padi. Dr. J. B. De Toni § enumerates and describes the various parasitic fungi which attack the tobacco-plant. Of these, some are peculiar to the genus Nicotiana, viz. : — Lsestadia Marii , Phyllosticta Tabaci , P. cap - * Hedwigia, xxxi. (1892) pp. 215-7. t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., x. (1892) pp. 319-26 (1 pi. and 1 fig.). t Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxix. (1892) pp. 209-12 (1 fig.). § ‘ Le Malattie Crittogamiche della planta del Tabacco,’ Padova, 1892, 4 pp. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 79 suit cola, Ascocliyta Nicoti arise, and Oidium Tabaci ; while others — Macrosporium commune, Epicoccum purpurascens, and Peronospora Hyo- scyami — are found also on other plants. Herr E. Rostrup * attributes a very prevalent disease of the beet, known as “ heart-rot,” to the attacks of Sporidesmium putrefaciens. He finds on the plants affected a pycnid-forra, to which he gives the name PJioma sphserosperma, and identifies it as a stage of development of the same fungus. A new species — Peronospora Cytisi — is described, which causes great ravages in seedlings of the laburnum ; and a leaf-disease of Camellia japonica, caused by Pestalozzia Guepini. Herr P. Magnus t gives a fuller description of the structure and life-history of Peronospora Cytisi. Herr P. Dietel J contributes full descriptions of Phragmidium deglubens and Bavenalia inornata, both parasitic on leguminous trees. Mycorhiza of the Fir.§ — Herr G. Henschel finds the mycorhiza only on the roots of young unhealthy fir-trees in Upper Austria ; by fur the greater number of the trees, including all the more vigorous ones, are entirely free from it. He regards it as injurious rather than symbiotic. New Genera of Fungi. || — Among a collection of Fungi from Ecuador, Herr N. Patouillard and Prof. G. v. Lagerheim describe a new genus of Agaricinese with a superior hymene, Bimbachia , with the following diagnosis: — Fungi homobasidiosporei, carnosi, erecti, pezizseformes ; hymenium leve, nonnullis venis e centro radiantibus reticulatum, et paginam superiorem pilei sistens ; pagina externa sterilis, cum stipite contigua ; sporae hyalinae. Mr. G. Massee describes a new genus DendrograpJiium, which is in reality a compound Helminthosporium or a Podosporium with the conids in chains ; the conids are coloured and septate ; also another new genus Thwaitesiella, separated from Badulum. New Luminous Fungus.** — Under the name Pleurotus lux, M. P. Hariot describes a new species of luminous fungus from Tahiti, distin- guished from other luminous species of the same genus by its smaller size, and by belonging to a different section, the “dimidiati.” It is found especially in the rainy winter season, and emits at night a light similar to that of the glow-worm, and so bright that it is used by the native women to illuminate flowers worn for personal adornment. The property lasts for about twenty-four hours after the fungus has been gathered. * Tidsskr. f. Landokonomi, 1891, 17 pp. ; and Gartner-Tidende, 1892. See Bot. Centralbl., lii. (1892) p. 186. f Hedwigia, xxxi. (1892) pp. 149-51 (1 pi.). j Tom. cit., pp. 159-65 (1 pi.). § Vierteljahrsschr. f. Forstwesen, 1892. See Bot. Centralbl., li. (1892) p. 392. || Bull. Soc. Myc. France, vii. (1891) pp. 158-84. See Bot. Centralbl., lii. (1892) p. 11. t Grevillea, xxi. (1892) pp. 1-6. ** Journ. de Bot. (Morot) vi. (1892) pp. 41 1-2. 80 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Mycetozoa. Plasmodiophora Vitis and californica.* * * § — MM. P. Viala and C. Sauvageau describe in further detail the diseases of the vine known as “ brunissure ” and the Californian disease caused respectively by Plasmo- diophora Vitis and californica. The latter is exceedingly destructive to both the wild and the cultivated vines in California, but is at present unknown in Europe. The relationship of these organisms to allied species is discussed in detail. Protophyta. a. Schizophyceae. Biology of Diatoms.-)* — L’Abbe Count F. Castracane describes a form of moist chamber or live-box, which he has found peculiarly well adapted for following out the life-history of individual diatoms. His observations under these conditions confirm him in the view that diatoms during the early stages of their existence remain fixed to one spot; and that the usual mode of their propagation is by spores or gonids. In another paper J the same author reviews the opinions of the various authorities, and the arguments in favour of the existence of a mode of propagation by means of spores. He further states his con- viction that, even in this embryonic stage, diatoms are enclosed in a more or less silicified envelope. The remains of these envelopes are sometimes to be found in the form of minute siliceous agglomerations within the parent frustule. No trace remains of the sporangial sac within which these embryonic forms were enclosed. Species of Diatoms. § — Dr. A. M. Edwards doubts the existence of true species, or even genera, among the Diatomacese. At all events, he claims to have established that all the various species of Schizonema and Homoeocladia are but forms of two species, while both these genera must be united with Nitzschia. Again, there are no good characters to distinguish Schizonema from Navicula ; and the twenty-four species of Micromega can all be grouped under Navicula foetida. Dr. Edwards’s arguments are based on the fact that he finds specimens of the alleged different species or genera “ in the same tube.” Schmidt’s Atlas der Diatomeenkunde. — The last part published of this magnificent work (Heft 45) consists of 4 pis., 177-180 ; it is almost entirely occupied with species and forms of Melosira , fossil and recent, also a few of Skeletonema and Trochosira. B. Schizomycetes. Influence of Light on Bacteria. || — Prof. H. Buchner, who recently showed the germicidal influence of light on bacteria suspendei in water, has now demonstrated its fatal action on cultivations of bacteria on solid media. Alkaline meat-pepton-agar is liquefied by boiling, and * Journ. de Bot. (Morot) vi. (1892) pp. 355-63, 378-88 (1 pi.). Cf. this Journal, 1892, p. 836. t La Nuova Notarise, iii. (1892) pp 146-51. Cf. this Journal, 1892, p. 655. + Mem. Pontif. Accad. Nuovi Lincei, 1892, 31 pp. § Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., xiii. (1892) pp. 212-6. [| Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 217-9 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 81 then, having been cooled down to 40°, is inoculated with somo kind of bacterium ( B . typhosus , B. coli comm., B. pyocyancus , B. choleras, &c.). The bacteria arc to be regularly disseminated throughout the media, and then the agar is poured into a flat glass vessel. When cold and set, some dovice — e. g. a cross or letters of black paper — is fixed on the under surface of the capsule. The capsule is turned upside down, and the under surface of the agar plate exposed for 1-1^ hours to direct, or 5 hours to diffuse sunlight. The plate is then placed in a dark place, and in 24 hours the device appears from the development of the colonies, the rest of the plate being a blank. An illustration taken from a photo- graph of an agar plate sown with typhoid bacteria shows the result of the action of light extremely well. Effect of Chloroform on Bacteria.* — M. Kirchner obtained the following results from his experiments with chloroform on bacteria : — (1) Chloroform possesses no inconsiderable power over a largo number of bacteria, but not over the spores of most of them. Of the pathogenic bacteria, anthrax, cholera, and typhoid bacilli, and St. pyo- genes aureus were quickly devitalized, while the spores of tetanus and anthrax were unaffected even after prolonged action. (2) Chloroform has no inhibitory action on spore development; for at a suitable temperature, and in the presence of chloroform, the spores become bacteria, and then the action of chloroform takes effect. (3) Chloroform is no disinfectant in the broader sense of the word, but it possesses a certain antiseptic value which renders it suitable for preserving albuminous substances, as it represses fermentation and putrefaction. (4) To be efficient, chloroform must be used not only in the undis- solved condition, but in saturated solution, care being taken to prevent evaporation. Soluble Pigments produced by Bacteria, f — M. L. Viron has suc- ceeded in isolating some soluble pigments produced by bacteria, and in cultivating the micro-organisms which made them. From an orange-flower water was obtained, by evaporation, a substance consisting of greenish granules, of rodlets and yellowish scales. This organic residue was composed of three different pigments, imparting to solutions violet, green, and yellow colours. As these pigments were not developed in sterilized water, they must have been due to the presence of living organisms, and by means of plate cultiva- tions on different media some chromogenic cultures were isolated. The pigment was produced only on solid media. One of these organisms is regarded as a variety of M. cyaneus Schroter ; another is called Bacillus aurantii , largish rodlets grouped in pairs ; and a third B. fluorescens liquefaciens. Injection of the coloured fluid produced by this last showed pathogenic properties, but with the two first it was not so. After being bred through a few generations, these micro-organisms lost the power of producing pigment, but it came back again if they were cultivated in stronger nutrient media. * Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, viii. (1890) pp. 465-88. See Bot. Centralbl., 1. (1892) pp. 359-60. f Comptes Rendus, cxiv. (1892) pp. 179-181. 1893. G 82 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO New Phosphorescent Bacterium.* * * § — Herr C. Eijkmann describes a new phosphorescent bacterium, Photobacterium javanense , common on marine fish in the Dutch East Indies. It is most nearly allied to P. Pfluegeri, but differs from that species, P. phosphor esc ens, and P. patho- genicum in its greater motility and in its adaptation to a higher tem- perature. It does not liquefy gelatin, and has a bluish-green light with much white. “ Mai Nero” of the Vine.f — Dr. B. Pasquale has studied, especially in Sicily, the phenomena and causes of this destructive disease, which manifests itself in the form of black spots and streaks on the leaves. He believes it to be due to the attacks of a parasitic Schizomycete which developes chiefly in the tissues rich in protoplasm and in other plastic materials, such as the cambium, the medullary rays, the cortical paren- chyme, and the soft bast of the axile organs. Micrococcus tetragenus concentricus.J — Prof. S. L. Schenk gives this name to a new micro-organism which occurred in the faeces of a patient suffering from stomachic catarrh. It has numerous character- istics, the most notable being the formation of concentric rings in gelatin culture. Micrococcus pneumoniae crouposae.§ — Dr. G. M. Sternberg calls attention to the fact that he was the first to describe the micro-organism so intimately associated with pneumonia, and which has received the different aliases of Microbe septicemique de la salive (Pasteur), Coccus lanceole (Talamon), M. Pasteuri (Sternberg), Pneumococcus (Fraenkel), Diplococcus pneumoniae ( Weichselbaum), B. salivarius septicus (Fliigge), St. lanceolatus Pasteuri (Gamaleia). The author’s paper was entitled “ A fatal form of septicaemia in the rabbit, produced by the subcutaneous injection of human saliva.” But, besides substantiating his claim to priority, the author has the further object of suggesting a suitable name for the micro-organism which, as he points out, is not a diplococcus but rather a streptococcus. Micrococcus agilis citreus.|| —Dr. K. Menge adds another flagellated coccus to the list. This bacterium was found on a gelatin plate, and its suspected source of origin was a pea infusion, although it was also found in the air of the laboratory. It appears to be about the same size as M. agilis t The arrangement of the individual elements is variable and presents no specific order. In hanging drop-cultivations the movements were seen to be very lively, and the flagellum was easily stainable by Loeffler’s method. The flagellum was found to be about six times as large as the diameter of the coccus, and was best demonstrated when 15 drops of 1 per cent. NaHO were added to 16 ccm. of Loeffler’s mordant. The micro-organism grows well on agar and gelatin, and aerial colonies are of a yellow colour, but their shape does not appear to present any- thing specially characteristic. Cultivations were also made in bouillon, * Geneesk. Tijdschr. Neederland. -Indie, xxxii. (1892) pp. 109-15. See Bot. Centralbl., lii. (1892) p. 10. f Malpighia, vi. (1892) pp. 229-34. t MT. Embryol. Inst. K. K. Univ. Wien, 1892, pp. 81-91 (3 figs.). § Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 53-6. || Tom. cit., pp. 49-52. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 83 in milk, and on potato. The optimum temperature was about 20° C. The formation of pigment was found to depend on the influence of light ; for, although there was no diminution in the energy of growth, yet when the cultivations were kept in the dark they remained quite white. No ex- periments were made on the formation of pigment with different kinds of artificial light, nor any examination of the chemical properties of the pigment. Disease of the Nun (Liparis monacha).* — Herr C. von Tubeuf records some observations made in the Bavarian woodlands during 1890 and 1891 on diseases affecting the Nun ( Liparis monacha). One of these, a kind of lethargy, eventually fatal, is caused and spread by bacteria. It is a malady of the digestive system, fostered by definite climatic- conditions. The caterpillars ceased to eat, became flaccid, their head and body drooped, and they hung on by a few pairs of feet only. The skin becomes partially filled out with a brown oily fluid, from which the malady might be designated the fat disease. In this fluid all sorts of bacteria, which eventually destroy the caterpillar, are found. The sick nuns collect in thick masses at the tops of the pine trees, where they become torpid and die — a phenomenon known as the “ topping of the nuns.” At the same time many caterpillars may be seen in a lethargic state on the trunks. The blood and intestinal contents of sick caterpillars were examined, and especially that of the foregut, which was ejected during the irritative stage. When healthy, this was green and composed of fragments of leaves with some bacteria, but in the sickly caterpillar it became brown with masses of bacteria. From cultiva- tions, a mobile bacterium {Bad. monachse) 1 /x long and 0 * 5 fx broad was obtained : this usually was in pairs or chains. The colonies did not liquefy gelatiD. In colour like mother-of-pearl or opal with yel- lowish centre, the colonies present a characteristic lobate appearance which becomes more marked with age. Bac. monachse is strongly aerobic. Healthy nun caterpillars were infected by feeding them on leaves which had been sprinkled with wTater containing this bacterium, while the caterpillars of other butterflies were unaffected. Usually the disorder is very chronic, and when acute is the result of cold wet weather, when, owing to the caterpillars having little to eat, the Schizomycetes are enabled to multiply in the foregut rather than in the solid contents of the after-gut. New Chemical Function of the Cholera Bacillus.| — M. J. Ferran has found that by cultivating the cholera vibrio in slightly alkaline bouillon containing lactose, paralactic acid is produced in quantity suf- ficient to impart to the medium a distinctly acid reaction, and if it be coloured with litmus the medium turns red. A cultivation made in slightly alkaline bouillon to which lactose has been added, and kept at 30° C. for five days, presents a scum composed of large bacilli, in the interior of which highly refracting bodies resembling spores can be seen ; finally all the protoplasmic contents disappear, and these little bodies, which stain very well with methyl-violet, are set free. * Forstlich-naturwiss. Zeitschr., i. (1892) pp. 34-47, 62-79 (4 pi.). See Cen- tralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1S92) pp. 268-9. t Comptes Kendus, cxv. (1892) pp. 391-2. G 2 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 81 The same cholera bacillus sown in alkaline bouillon remains alive for quite three years, provided that provision be made for daily renewing the air by stuffing the neck of the cultivation apparatus with cotton- wool. Yet if, under exactly similar conditions, some lactose be added to the bouillon, the microbe soon perishes in consequence of the presence of the acid produced by itself. The growth of the microbe is always rapid and luxuriant in plain bouillon, but if lactose be present it is far more so, the cultivation acquiring a surprising density in a few hours; but when the medium turns acid the growth is suspended and the organism dies. The author concludes by pointing out that paralactic acid, so useful as a remedy for diarrhoea caused by B. coli commune , may be efficacious in the case of cholera -diarrhoea. Influence of Wine on Development of Typhoid and Cholera Bacilli.* * * § — Dr. A. Pick points out that when typhoid and cholera are rife it would be a good thing to dilute drinking-water with an equal volume of wine. This he deduces from the results of some five experiments on infected water diluted with white or red wine. The mixtures were left for twenty-four hours, and then cultivations made. It was found that even in half an hour there was a perceptible diminution in the number of germs, and in twenty-four hours they had all disappeared. Action of Bacillus of Malignant (Edema on Carbohydrates and Lactic Acid-t — Herren R. Kerry and S. Fraenkel state that when lactic acid, in the form of its calcium salt, is dissolved in bouillon containing peptone and Kemmerich’s meat extract, and the solution, placed in an atmosphere of hydrogen, is inoculated with the bacillus of malignant oedema, fermentation occurs. After remaining from 8 to 10 days, the solution contains propyl alcohol and formic and butyric acids, but no ethyl alcohol. Bacterium which ferments Starch and produces Amyl Alcohol.^ — M. L. Perdrix has separated from Paris water a bacillus, B. amylozymicus , which ferments starch with production of amyl alcohol. It is separated by cultivation on potato, and finally on gelatin. The bacillus is 2-3 /x long and 0 • 5 /x thick ; the rods are joined in pairs and chains, and in the absence of oxygen are, like Vibrio butyricus , motile. The rods are readily stained ; the spores are set free on the dissolution of the walls of the mother-cell. This bacillus flourishes only in the absence of oxygen, but readily either in a vacuum or in hydrogen, nitrogen, or carbonic anhydride. The optimum temperature is 35° ; it grows quite well at 20-25° ; at 16 -17° fermentation commences at the end of four days. Its maximum temperature is 42-43°. It will grow in all the usual culti- vating media, ferments sugars and starch, but does not attack cellulose or calcium lactate, differing in this respect from V. butyricus. Mixed Cultivations of Streptococci and Diphtheria Bacilli.§ — Dr. M. von Schreider confirms the results of Roux and Yersin as to the * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk , xii. (1892) pp. 293-4. t Chem. Monatsb., 1891, pp. 350-5. See Journ. Chem. Soo., 1892, Abstr., p. 91. % Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 1891, No. 5. See Journ. Chem. Soc., 1892, Abstr., p. 90. § Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 289. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 85 increased toxicity of mixed cultivations of diphtheria bacilli and Strep- tococci, micro-organisms invariably associated in diphtheritic membrane. Whether the substance which is precipitablo from its aqueous solution by means of alcohol is an albumoso or not is left undetermined. Streptococcus obtained from the Blood of a Scarlet Fever Patient.* — MM. d’Espine and Marignac obtained from the blood of a scarlet fever patient a pure cultivation of a Streptococcus which presented clear differences from St. pyogenes and from the short Streptococcus of Lingelsheim. The question whether this microbe has any aetiological significance for scarlet fever is left undecided, as inoculation experiments on human beings are prohibited. Bacterium coli commune.f — MM. Lesage and Macaigne have been carrying on experiments relative to the virulence of intestinal bacteria. B. coli commune did not show that it was pathogenic to animals, although it had been derived from a man suffering from diarrhoea. Diarrhoea, for example the simple diarrhoea of children, say the authors, makes B. coli commune virulent. In cases where no diarrhoea has existed B. coli commune does not migrate during the first twenty- four hours after death into the organs of the body, although it does so if there have been diarrhoea, ulceration of the intestine, or pulmonary disorder. Besides this harmless B. coli commune , which the authors consider a saprophyte, B. coli septicum, an organism of great virulence, and B. coli pyogenes , not quite so virulent, are found in the intestine of sick persons. B. coli cholerigenes, isolated by Gilbert and Girod in several cases of cholera nostras, both in adults and children, is a very virulent organism, and preserves its power for seven months. The more severe the case the more frequent became the presence of this micro-organism, while in less severe cases several other bacteria accompanied it. Differential Characters of Bacterium coli commune and Bacillus typhosus. t — According to M. E. Tavel the following differences exist between B. coli commune and B. typhosus : — (1) The former only exhibits molecular movements, the latter shows lively spontaneous movements. (2) On grape-sugar-agar the first forms gas, the latter none. (3) The former imparts a slight red colour to bouillon and clouds it strongly, with the latter it remains pale yellow and never shows a scum. (4) On potatoes the former forms a thick grey-yellow culture, the potato becoming greyish-brown ; the typhoid bacillus produces scarcely visible colonies, and the colour of the potato remains unchanged. (5) The typhoid bacillus has flagella, B. coli commune none. The author is of opinion that the careful and judicious use of these criteria will enable a differential diagnosis between these two micro-organisms to be made. * La Semaine Med., 1892, No. 29. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 157. t La Semaine Med., 1892, p. 40. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk , xii. (1892) p. 257 X La Semaine Med,, 1892, p. 52. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 256-7. 86 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Relations of, and Differences between Bacillus coli communis and Bacillus typhosus.* — By comparing the appearances of the organisms obtained from the fteces and from the blood of typhoid patients MM. Rodet and Roux have endeavoured to establish a direct relation between B. coli communis and B. typhosus. The blood, obtained by punctur- ing the spleen, gave B. typhosus ; and the fascal matter, inoculated in bouillon and kept at 44° *5, gave pure cultivations of B. coli communis. Similar results were obtained from cultivations on gelatin plates. These results afford support to the hypothesis that the typhoid organism is only a modification of B. coli communis , and the authors strive to show that the differences between the two microbes are not sufficient to create two distinct species. Thus, cultivated in gelatin, typhoid bacilli are not constant in character and they frequently resemble cultures of B. coli communis. In bouillon the latter grows more vigorously and forms a slight scum, but similar scum is sometimes formed by B. typho- sus, and when kept at 44° the appearances of both are quite similar. Yet B. coli communis can bear a higher temperature than B. typhosus (46° • 5 and 45°). Potato cultivations also present differences, chiefly in colour. The microscopical characters of these organisms are chiefly that B. coli communis is short, the cells being of equal length. It is less mobile and stains more easily than the other. The bacillus of Ebertli is of unequal lengths and more slender. Anything which weakens the vitality of B. coli communis (heat, antiseptics) tends to make it resemble B. typhosus. Hence the authors conclude that the latter organism is a degenerate variety of B. coli communis; yet they do not assert that typhoid fever is produced by B. coli communis , although it may acquire typhogenic properties. Against this view, MM. Chantemesse and Widal point out that B. coli communis can be found not only in typhoid but in other fever patients, and that the Ebertli-Gaffky bacillus retains its typical characters in the organs of typhoid patients even though it remains encapsuled for fifteen months. If B. coli communis become pathogenic (peritonitis, suppuration, choleraic diarrhoea), its characters are un- altered and it never resembles B. typhosus. Nor do the symptoms and lesions occasioned by B. coli communis ever resemble those of typhoid fever. An important distinction between the two is that B. coli communis ferments sugar and B. typhosus never does. Yet this distinction has been denied, on the authority of Dubief, who finds that B. typhosus can ferment glucose, although much less energetically. Pathogenic Bacterium in Frogs’ Livers.|— Dr. F. Fischel finds that the livers of healthy frogs often contain bacteria. Plate cultiva- tions were made from the mashed up livers, and in about 36 hours numerous colonies, about the size of pins’ heads, were observed lying deep in the gelatin. The organism was also grown on agar, potato, blood-serum, and in bouillon. The gelatin was not liquefied. The micro-organism as obtained from hanging drop cultivations is a rodlet of * Journ. des Connaissances Med., 1890; Seance de l’Acad. de Med., 13th Oct., 1891. See Ann. de Microgr. iv. (1892) pp. 361-3. f Fortschr. d. Med., ix. p. 340. See Annal. de Microgr., iv. (1892) pp. 307--8. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 8? 1/2-1 /x long, and 1/4-1/2 p broad. It is extremely mobile, and is easily stained with phenol-fuclisiu and by Gram’s method. Mice inoculated with bouillon cultivations die in 30-48 hours after subcutaneous injection, and 18-24 after intra-peritoneal injection. Blood taken from these infected mice kills fresh mice in 36 hours. After 6 days the animals no longer die, although they sicken for a time. At this period the cultivations no longer show bacilli in chains, but in discoid masses, and apparently surrounded by a capsule. Very similar results were obtained from infecting rabbits. By cultivation in artificial media this microbe soon lost its virulence. It was not found in the water in which the frogs were kept. Streptococcus longus.* — Dr. Behring finds that pathogenic Strepto- cocci are divisible into two species : — A. Streptococcus brevis ; B. Strepto- coccus longus. The latter may be further differentiated into several sub-species, e. g. — 1. Cocci which cloud bouillon ; 2. Cocci which do not cloud bouillon. Group 2 is, again, subdivisible into three varieties : — a. Cocci which form a soft mucoid sediment ; b. Cocci which form a scum or crumbling sediment ; c . Cocci which “ ball ” together, and tend to stick to the sides of the tube. The most important point about these differences seems to be that the more the cultivations show this balling the more virulent they are, especially for white mice ; and the author’s researches were principally directed to discovering if the variations of these pathogenic cocci were mere sports of the same species, or whether the cocci found in different diseases were specifically constant. The experiments, which were made in collaboration with other observers, tended to show that there was no specific difference, the par- ticular form of disease being due to the condition of the natural medium (the patient). The observations, however, resulted in what the author considers a very important fact. It was found that an animal which had been rendered immune to the Streptococcus most virulent to it, has acquired immunity to all other Streptococci. Phagocytes and Muscular Phagocytosis.f — The tail of a tadpole has been sufficient to stir up a scientific strife, not only about the powers, but even touching the actuality of the phagocyte. The almost universal belief that the white corpuscles of the blood exercised phago- cytic functions has been rudely shaken. It had become generally understood that when a phagocyte was spoken of, a wandering meso- dermic cell, an amoeboid corpuscle of the lymph or of the blood, was almost always meant, although some fixed cells (of doubtful origin) possessed the power of catching, incorporating, and assimilating other cells. It would now appear that this is a mistake. The inventor of phagocytosis disdains any such notion. It is wrong to mix up a phago- cyte and a leucocyte. “ II ne m’est jamais arrive do les identifier avec des leucocytes,” says M. E. Metschnikoff. For the general belief there is much excuse, considering there are explicit statements to the effect that phagocyte and leucocyte are synonymous expressions. * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 192-6. f Annal. Inst. Pasteur, vi. 1892. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xi. (1892) pp. 582-4 ; xii. (1892) pp. 81-7. 88 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The disappearance of the tadpole’s tail has been described by M. E. Metschnikoff as being the result of a “ muscular phagocytosis,” a condition in which the whole of the muscle becomes converted into a mass of phagocytes, inclosing within them the striated substance of the muscles ; these phagocytes are therefore developed from the muscle itself, and are not connected with leucocytes at all. In the formation of the muscular phagocyte the sarcoplasm and nuclei of the fibril partici- pate, the myoplasm — i. e. the sarcolytes — being destroyed within them. Eventually these phagocytes appear in the abdominal cavity as lymph- leucocytes. According to Dr. A. Looss, the degeneration is carried out through the agency of the lymph ; according to M. E. Metschnikoff, it is self- begotten of the muscle-fibril. In his reply, Prof. E. Metschnikoff * makes his position quite clear as to the cause of the atrophy of the tadpole’s tail. It is the result of phagocytosis, an active process, and not, as Dr. Looss considers, due to absorption of the muscular tissue by the fluids of the body. Moreover, the two observers seem to be at variance as to their facts, for according to Metschnikoff, the striated muscular substance only disappears, while Looss contends that the whole fibril is absorbed. It is, therefore, no wonder that considerable scientific recrimination takes place, and though Prof. E. Metschnikoff’s facts seem indubitable — for, as he says, well- known savants such as Malassez have admitted their correctness — yet his adversary is clearly his superior in polemical writing — e. g. it is not argument to say that certain illustrations show no nuclei, and yet they were undoubtedly present — that is merely another way of saying that a scientific opponent has, well, suppressed certain facts, and is not fit for ordinary society. Spleen and Immunization.! — Dr. A. A. Kanthack, after noting the results of Tizzoni and Cattani, who showed that it is impossible under certain circumstances to render rabbits from which the spleen had been removed immune to tetanus, remarks that tetanus is, par excellence , an intoxication disease, and that it would be illogical to draw general inferences therefrom. It is important, therefore, to ascertain the beha- viour of animals without spleens towards other microbes, the virulence of which depends in a less degree on intoxication. The infection of Bacillus pyocyaneus was chosen, and its action observed (1) on rabbits from which the spleen bad been removed, and then treated in company with other fresh animals by various methods of immunization ; (2) on rabbits which had been rendered immune, and then deprived of their spleen. The experiments showed that in Pyocyaneus infection, absence of the spleen exerted no influence whatever. Bacteriological Examination of Water.| — One of the principal objects of Herr Max Dahmen’s investigation was to ascertain the optimum amount of sodium carbonate which should be added to meat-pepton- gelatin in order to bring about the development of the greatest number * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 294-6. t Tom. cit., pp. 227-9. X Chemiker-Zeitung, xvi. (1892) No. 49. See Centralbl f. Bakteriol. u. Parasi- tenk., xii. (1892) pp. 302-3. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 89 of germs. In dealing with Rhine water this was found to be 0 • 15 per cent. It is also pointed out that bacteriological examination should be directed less towards the quantity of germs in a given bulk of water than to their quality, for it is obviously very important to detect the presence of pathogenic and putrefactive bacteria even when a chemical analysis may have pronounced it fit for use. Distribution of Water-bacteria in large Water Basins.* — Dr. J. Karlin ski records some observations made on the bacteria of Lake Borke in Bosnia. The physical characters of the lake, its average temperature, the composition of the water, are first described, after which some new bacteria peculiar to this water are dealt with. A largo number of observations were made, and the result of these went to show that there is a connection between the depth of the water and the number and character of the bacteria at the different levels, and also at different distances from the bank. Pyosalpinx and Bacteria.!— Dr. Witte states that in two out of four cases of pyosalpinx operated on by Dr. A. Martin Bacillus lanceolatus Fraenkel was found, and in the third case bacilli resembling those of symptomatic anthrax. However, when the latter were inoculated in white mice, the animals died with extensive oedema of the subcutaneous tissue, and the result was due to the bacilli of malignant oedema. In case 4 the contemporaneous presence of staphylococci and of gono- cocci in the pus of pyosalpinx is an important discovery, as their co- existence has been denied. Changes in the Microbicidal Power of the Blood during and after the Infection of the Organism.! — It is well known, say Dr. A. von Szekely and Dr. A. Szana, that the number of microbes present in extra-vascular blood or blood serum is at first diminished, but some hours after inoculation an increase is observed, while there are cases in which defibrinated blood or blood serum remains sterile in spite of the large number of microbes with which it was infected. An analogous diminution is found to occur even when bouillon is used instead of blood or serum. The germicidal action has, therefore, been attributed to the physical property of the medium — namely, its density. While admitting the probability that some of the germicidal power of blood may be due to its density, the authors refuse to ascribe the whole of this power to a mere concentration of the fluid. At present, the chief interest in this question is whether the circulating, living blood possesses a similar germicidal power to that of extra-vascular blood. The direct experimental proof of this is, from the nature of things, difficult, and the authors attempt to solve this question indirectly. The position they take up at starting is that the microbicidal power is a property of living blood, and that if there be any connection between this property and the course of the disease, then it must alter directly the germs have firm hold of the organism, and also when the organism has victoriously withstood the infection. * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 220-3. t Centralbl. f. Gyn., 1892, No. 27. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 266. X Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 61-74, 139-42. 90 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO After alluding to the experiments of Charrin and Roger, Lubarsch and Kovighi, the results of which are contradictory the one of the other, the authors mention the method they adopted. The principal experiments were made with Bacillus anthracis , cholera bacillus, and St. pyogenes aureus , and a few with hydrophobia. The blood was obtained from the carotid, and while strict aseptic precautions were adopted during the operation, the use of antiseptics was carefully avoided, in order that the blood might not be contaminated with a foreign element, and thus endanger the results of the experiment. The blood was received into sterilized glass vessels by inserting the artery into the neck of the flask. The blood was then defibrinated by means of glass beads, and removed to another vessel, in order that the clot might not interfere with the equal distribution of the microbes. The blood, placed in little flasks, was caused to set obliquely, and then the flasks, having been set upright, were kept at a temperature of approximately 4° C. The blood was infected with agar cultivations rubbed up into an emulsion either with 0*75 per cent, salt solution or with bouillon. Upon the uniform distribution of the germs in the serum or defibrinated blood great stress is laid. Blood inoculated in the foregoing manner was tested from time to time by removing a loopful, and then, having carefully mixed it with liquefied gelatin, it was spread out on plates, and these kept at a temperature of 22°-24° C. In the first set of experiments the microbicidal power of blood taken from an animal with anthrax was examined, and it was found that blood serum or defibrinated blood of rabbits suffering from anthrax can destroy anthrax bacilli, even though these are demonstrable in the blood ; but when the disease has acquired a firm hold this power is lost. The second set relates to experiments with St. pyogenes aureus , and these showed that the blood of rabbits infected with St. pyogenes aureus possesses up to a few hours before the death of the animal its germicidal power, and that this property is first lowered during the act of dying, and is altered in such a way that the microbes in the blood not only do not disappear, but actually increase after the lapse of 5-7 hours. In the third set the blood was taken during and after the infection of the animal with cholera bacilli. It would seem that defibrinated blood taken from an animal the blood-stream of which is crowded with bacilli, affords a medium for the multiplication of micro-organisms, but that 24 hours after an intravenous injection, and therefore when all the bacilli had disappeared from the circulation, the germicidal power in- creased, and when the animal became hydresmic this microbicidal action was still more powerful. In the next set it was found that the febrile state also increased the microbicidal power. The last set of experiments was devoted to the connection between the quantity of the microbes and the amount of the microbicidal power, and these showed that the same quantity of blood was capable of destroying a definite number of microbes. Fraenkel and Pfeiffer’s Photomicrographic Atlas of Bacteria.* — This very useful and excellent atlas is now completed. In all, there * Berlin, 1891-2. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk, xii. (1892) pp. 249-50. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 01 have appeared 15 parts and 74 plates. The last few numbers deal chiefly with Bacillus typhosus, the microbes of pneumonia and suppura- tion, but numerous other organisms are represented, such as recurrens spirillum and some bacteria pathogenic to animals ; at the conclusion are found fungi, such as Actinomyces , Achorion Schonleinii , and others. Bailey, W. 0. — Bacteriology in Medicine; its Usefulness and Scope, and especially its application to Public Health Service. Alabama Med. and Surg. Age, 1891/92, pp. 199-211. Blanchard, A. — Sur un Spirille geant, developpe dans les cultures de sediments d’eau douce d’Aden. (On a giant Spirillum developed from Cultures of the Sediment of the Fresh Water of Aden.) Rev. Gen. Sci. Pures et Appliq., 1891, pp. 21 -2. Charrin et Phisalix — Abolition persistante de la fonction chromogene du bacillus pyocyaneus. (Permanent Destruction of the Chromogenous Function of Bacillus pyocyaneus .) Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol., 1892, pp. 576-9. Conn, H. W. — Some Uses of Bacteria. Science, New York, 1892, pp. 258-63. Galeotti, G. — Ricerche biologiche sopra alcuni bacteri cromogeni. (Biological Researches on some Chromogenous Bacteria.) Sperimentale, 1892, pp. 261-85. Griffiths, A. B. — Sur une nouvelle leucomaine. (On a new Leucomaiue.) Compt. Rend., CXY. (1892) pp. 185-6. Gronlund, Ch. — Eine neue Torula-Art und zwei neue Saccharomyces-Arten. (A new species of Torula and two of Saccharomyces.') Zeitschr.f. d. Ges. Brauwesen, 1892, pp. 281-3. Le Fert, P. — Patologia generale e bacteriologia. (General Pathology and Bac- teriology.) Vol. III. Milan, 1892, 16mo. Linsley, J. H. — Micro-organisms of the Mouth. Med. Record, II. (1892) pp. 59-63. Loir. A. — La microbiologie en Australie; etudes d’hygiene et de pathologie comparee poursuivies a l’lnstitut Pasteur de Sydney. (Microbiology in Australia; Studies in Hygiene and Comparative Pathology pursued at the Pasteur Institute, Sydney.) Thesis. Paris, 1892, 4to, 86 pp. Metohnikoff, E. — Les idees nouvelles sur la structure, le developpement et la reproduction des bacteries. (New Ideas on the Structure, Development, and Reproduction of Bacteria.) Rev. GCn. Sci. Pures et Appliq, 1892, pp. 211-6. Pere, A — Contribution a la biologie du bacterium coli commune et du bacille typhique. (Contribution to the Biology of Bacterium coli commune and of the Bacillus of Typhus.) Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 1892, pp. 512-37. Roux, G. — Un bacillus coli ne faisant pas fermenter la lactose. (A Bacillus coli which does not ferment Lactose.) Gaz. Ho pit. de Toulouse , D92, p. 139. Santori, Dr. Saverio — Ricerche batteriologiche sulla decomposizione putrida dei vegetali. (Bacteriological Re.-earches on the Putrid Decomposition of Plants.) Ann. htit. d’ Igiene Sperim. R. Univ. Roma, I. p. 97. Schardinger, — . — Ueber das V orkommen Gahrungerregender Spaltpilze im Trink- wasser und ihre Bedeutung fur die hygienische Beurtheilung desselben. (On the Presence of Fermentative Schizomycetes in Drinking Water, and their Hygienic Import.) Wien Klin. Wochensehr., 1892, pp. 403-5, 421-3. Schenk, S. L.— Grundriss der Bakteriologie. (Elements of Bacteriology.) Vienna, 1892, large 8vo, xii. and 204 pp., 99 woodcuts. Sternberg, G. M. — Practical Results of Bacteriological Researches. Amer. Journ. Med. Sci., XI. (1892) pp. 1-15. Vaughan, V. C. — A Bacteriological Study of Drinking Water. Amer. Journ. Med. Sci., 1892, pp. 167-98. Woodh ead, G. S.— Address in Bacteriology. Brit. Med. Journ., 1892, pp. 285-90- 92 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO * This subdivision contains (1) Stands, (2) Eye-pier es and Objectives; (3) Illu- minating and other Apparatus; (4^ Pi otomicrography ; (5, Micioscopical Optics and Manipulation ; (f>) Miscellaneous. MICROSCOPY. a. Instruments, Accessories, &c.* (1.) Stands. Fig. 2. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 93 Messrs. W. Watson and Sons’ No. 4 Van Heurck Microscope (B) (fig. 2). — Mounted on plain tripod foot, showing centering screws to stage. Height, when placed vertically and racked down, 13J in. The instrument is identical in all respects with the A and B forms, but is mounted on a different foot. Messrs. W. Watson’s Fine- Adjustment. — In calling attention to their system of fine-adjustment, Messrs. Watson write as follows:— “ The entire body [of the instrument] is raised or lowered by means of 94 SUMMARY OP CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO a milled head fixed to a screw having a hardened steel point, acting on a lever, in a perfect fitting dove-tail slide, about 2^ in. long. The prin- ciple of it is shown in the accompanying figure (fig. 3). At first si glit it would appear that the screw controlling this important movement has to bear the entire weight of the body of the instrument, Fig. 4. as in the Continental models. This is a common error, but not in accordance with fact. The turning of the milled-head screw actuates a hardened steel lever B, varying in length according to the size of the instrument, the fulcrum C of which is placed as closely as possible to the sliding fitting in which the movement of the body takes place, which reduces the weight carried by the milled head to considerably less than ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 95 in any other form. For instance, in our Edinburgh Student’s Micro- scope— a section of a limb of which is shown in fig. 3 — the total length of the lever arms is 2T\r in., the arm on the one side being 3/8 in. long, and on the other 1-J-J- in. The weight of the body, fittings, &c., is 17 oz. The resistance at the end of the lever is therefore 3^ oz. We have not included the reactionary spring in these figures, as this is employed in all forms of fine-adjustment, but the resistance of this is minimized at the point of force, in the same ratio as the weight. Also by means of the long lever an extremely slow motion is obtained, the movement being lessened in the same proportion as the weight. All fine-adjustments must wear in course of time as the result of friction, and in the majority of cases it is irremediable, except in the maker’s or a skilled mechanic’s hands. In our form the fitting is sprung and has two screws (shown in fig. 4, A), by means of which any wear as the result of friction can be at once taken up by the user. This is of the greatest importance to residents abroad, the necessity of returning an instrument to be adjusted being obviated. The coarse-adjustment fitted to our instruments is as shown in fig. 4, and is effected by means of a diagonal rack and spiral pinion, which ensures the smoothest possible motion and an entire absence of backlash, the teeth of the pinion never leaving the rack. High powers can be exactly focused by its means without the aid of the fine-adjust- ment. This adjustment and all the frictional parts of the instruments are fitted with screws, as in the fine-adjustment, which by being very slightly turned compensate for wear and tear.” Note on Watson’s Edinburgh Student’s Microscope. — Mr. E. M. Nelson read the following note at the November meeting : — “ It will be remembered that a certain amount of controversy was raised with regard to a Microscope exhibited here by Messrs. Watson and Sons last year.* I am now alluding not to the general design of that instrument, but solely to the fine-adjustment. Whatever the general design of an instrument, or however simple or complex its movements may be, its real value for work entirely stands or falls with the quality of its fine-adjustment. It is well to remember the axiom propounded by the late T. Powell, ‘ that a Microscope without a fine-adjustment, but with a good coarse- adjustment, is to be preferred to one, however elaborate, with a bad fine- adj ustment.’ The question in dispute, therefore, is of supreme importance. At that time my opinion with regard to the fine-adjustment was asked, but, never having seen it, it was impossible for me to express any opinion on the subject. Since then Messrs. Watson and Sons wrote to me, saying that they were confident of the soundness of the principle of their fine- adjustment, and that if I would examine one, they would submit an instrument for my prolonged investigation. To this I agreed, and I am now in a position to answer the question asked last year regarding this fine-adjustment. The adverse critics said that this fine-adjustment was on the Zent- mayer plan, and as the Zentmayer fine-adjustment was a miserable failure, this one must be a failure also. This might have been very * This Journal, 1891, p. 434. 96 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO true had their premises been correct, hut the fallacy of the criticism lay in the fact that this fine-adjustment is not the same as Zentmayer’s. The reason why Zentmayer’s fine-adjustment broke down was because it had no sprung grooves; the slides worked in solid Y-shaped grooves, so that in more or less time the effect of wear made itself apparent, the fitting became loose, and as there was no means of tightening it up again, the Microscope in the end became only fit for the proverbial dust-bin. The essential point of a Microscope is the springing of the dovetail grooves, and, so far as I am aware, it is to Messrs. Powell and Lealand that ‘ microscopy ’ is indebted for this valuable invention or adaptation. Whether springing of dovetail grooves was previously used in instru- ments other than the Microscope I am unable to say, but my impression is that Messrs. Powell and Lealand were the first to use it in the Micro- scope. Now, in Watson’s Microscope we have two sprung slides, one for the coarse-adjustment, and one for the fine. The moment either movement exhibits the slightest sign of wear the slack can be imme- diately taken up by tightening the screws. There is no reason, there- fore, why in years to come this instrument should not work as well as it does to-day. There is one point, however, which must be mentioned, and that is the weight of the body and of the coarse-adjustment slide is thrown on the fine-adjustment lever. It differs, therefore, from Powell’s, inasmuch as the fine-adjustment in this instrument moves the whole body, whereas in Powell’s it only moves the nose-piece. Strictly speak- ing, in this instrument there is no nose-piece at all. In general, a Microscope which has much weight on its fine-adjustment is to be regarded with suspicion. All who have had much to do with the Micro- scope know painfully well how soon the fine-adjustments of the Conti- nental Microscopes, which have a considerable weight of brasswork thrown on a delicate screw, become useless. Here the Campbell dif- ferential screw with its strong threads has come to the rescue. In Watson’s instrument wTe have a somewhat similar compensation : the arms of the lever being 1 : 4 J, the weight which ultimately falls on the fine-adjustment screw is reduced in that proportion. It must be remem- bered, too, that we are not now dealing with such large or heavy tubes as in the Powell instrument, but with far smaller and lighter tubing. The actual weight on the screw is, I am told, a trifle under a quarter of a pound,* which is, of course, not excessive. This instrument may be said to be identical with what may appropriately be called Swift’s No. 2, with this difference : in Swift’s the lever is parallel to the body, and in this it is at right angles to it. In Swift’s side-lever No. 1 the instru- ment had a nose-piece, which only was moved as in the Powell ; in his No. 2, however, both the body and the coarse-adjustment slide were moved ; but in his No. 3 or present form only the body is moved. A lever at right angles to the body has two advantages over a side-lever, the first being that the screw-head is as conveniently placed for use with one hand as with the other ; and the second is, that for photomicro- graphy, the gearing to the focusing rod is more simple and direct. There is one very ingenious and novel adaptation in this instrument which I would like to bring to your notice ; the fine-adjustment screw is * When the tubes and coarse-adjustment pinion-heads are made of aluminium this will be further reduced. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 97 a left-handed one, therefore the movement of the noso-piece follows the apparent movement of the screw. In other words, when you think you are turning the screw downwards you are in reality raising it, and by doing so you are lowering the nose-piece. This plan removes tho single objection to tho Powell plan of fine- adjustment, viz. the reversal of the movement, which is confusing until the idea is overcome by practice. I have brought this to the notice of tho Society, as I feel sure they have no wish to disparage any instrument which may be brought before them by an erroneous criticism founded on a misconception of its con- struction.” Nachet’s Hand-Microscope. — This instrument, shown in fig. 5, is intended for circulation amongst an audience. Contrary to the usual arrangement in Microscopes, the preparation is held on its upper surface Fig. 5. by the stage in such a way that the different preparations are at once brought into focus when this has been regulated once for all. For finding the point of the object which it is required to demonstrate, the instrument can be adjusted on a base-plate, and can be separated again for circulation amongst the audience. Nachet’s Movable Stage. — In this stage, represented in fig. 6, two carriers, perpendicular to one another, move the preparation in all 1893. H 98 8UMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO directions. The latter is simply placed upon the stage and is held firm by the pressure of the spring on the right against the stop on the left. The forward movement is effected by the rack and pinion, and the lateral by the transversal screw. As seen in the figure the apparatus is attached to the ordinary stage by a screw pressing against the column of the slow motion. (3) Illuminating- and other Apparatus. Nachet’s Camera. — The new camera, shown in fig. 7, is mounted on two columns of nickelled copper on which it can be raised to different Fig. 7. heights above the Microscope. The columns are hinged so that the camera can be inclined at any angle. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. The bellows carries a union formed of two pieces, one fixed on the camera and the other screwed on the body-tube of the Microscope. These two pieces aro froo, one in the other, so that the movements given to tho Microscope are independent of the camera. Nachet's Camera Lucida. — The instrument seen in fig. 8 is a modi- fied form of the camera lucida described in this Journal, 1887, p. 61 9. It carries two racks, one for adjusting the camera lucida, the other for Fig. 8. adjusting the stage beneath the lens P. The modifications in this model consist : — (1) In the addition of a stage adjustable in height so as to bring the object into the focus of the lens, while the camera lucida is kept at the same distance from the table on which the drawing is to be made. (2) In the possibility of drawing beneath a very weak lens, objects placed on the table beneath the mirror. For this purpose the stage is h 2 100 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO removed and replaced by a small table provided with supports for the hands. (3) By turning the ring, the mirror passes from the horizontal to the vertical plane, and it is possible thus to reproduce beneath the same weak lens any object placed vertically in front and to reduce it to any extent required. The small frame in front of the prism is for the reception of convex or concave glasses for the correction of parallax, or for tinted glasses intended to equalize the illumination of the object and the paper. Nachet’s Compressor. — The advantage of the model shown in fig. 9 is that all the points of the object are compressed equally owing to the two surfaces of glass being parallel to one another. New Microscope-Lamp as Safety Burner.* — Herr P. Altmann describes a new lamp for heating drying ovens, &c., which in point of * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 786-7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 101 safety possesses some advantages over those in ordinary use. The auto- matic arrangement for cutting off the gas when the flame, by accident or otherwise, has been extinguished is novel and ingenious. Fig. 10 shows a single burner as used for small thermostat, and fig. 11 a double burner for heating ordinary cultivating ovens. To light the burner, a match is applied for some seconds to the lower part of the loop at A (fig. 12). The vapour tension, resulting from the heating of the bent tube, acts upon a metal membrane which opens the gas valve, and keeps it open as long as the flame is burning. Should, however, the flame by any accident be extinguished, the temperature of the tube falls, the hydraulic pressure is diminished and the gas- valve is again closed. An Improved Form of Dr. Edinger’s Apparatus * for Drawing Objects under Low Powers. — Mr. E. M. Nelson writes to us : — “ The following is a description of the instrument made and exhibited for me by Mr. Curties, at the special exhibition on November 30th. My improvement consists in securing a far larger angle from the source of illumination and then condensing it so that it may all pass through the front lens of the objective, which on that occa- sion was a Zeiss aa. This increased illumination will, I think, be found to be an improvement on Dr. Edinger’s method. On referring to fig. 13 it will be seen that the magnified image of the object is projected on the paper so that there is no troublesome camera or other apparatus to look through, and no previous knowledge or practice in drawing is necessary. The outline of the image is directly traced on the paper on which it is projected, in the same way that a magic lantern view might be traced on the sheet on which it was cast. The instrument consists of a vertical board A B, with a tube C fitted at right angles to it ; this tube has a mirror M of common looking- glass fixed at an angle of 45°. Below this there is a specially con- structed condenser D E, consisting of two lenses D and E such that either of them can be used independently or they may be used together as in the figure. For very low powers the large lens D is alone used, for higher powers the small one E, while for still higher both D and E are used together. T is a simple stage, the slide being held against the lower side of it by spring clips. On the upper side there is a wheel of diaphragms ; the use of this wheel of diaphragms is totally distinct from that in an ordinary Microscope, where its office is to regulate the angle of the cone of illumination, because here it merely limits the size of the field. O is the objective (for a medium power a Zeiss a a will be found very suitable). Both the objective-holder O and the stage F are fixed to a separate block GH which slides in grooves on the board AB, and is clamped by the screw S. This arrangement allows the stage and the objective to be placed at a proper distance from the condenser. The illumination of an object in projection, especially in low power projection, differs essentially from * See this Journal, 1891, p. 812. Fia. 12. hA'AVi 102 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 3 be focused on the front lens of the objective. 0 is fitted with rack-and- pinion focusing adjustment. At the back of the board A B there is a ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 103 bracket to hold an ordinary Microscope lamp with an attached bull’s- eye. Only the bull’s-eye K (one of my doublets) is shown. Finally the board A 13 slides in uprights on the base P (not shown) ; this is to allow the magnification to be altered by increasing or decreas- ing the distance between the objective and the paper on the base-board P on which the drawing is to be made. To use the instrument, in the first instance the bull’s-eye K is focused to the edge of the lamp flame and parallel rays are sent on the mirror M. The condenser suited to the power is arranged at D. The distance between K and D should not be less than 12 in. Having placed the object in the clips on the stage, and having roughly focused the objective, the screw S must be loosened and the whole block G H moved up or down so that the rays from the condenser are focused on the objective. The field is then limited by the wheel of diaphragms. The illumination from an ordinary Micro- scope lamp with a 1/2 in. wick will be found sufficient when the appara- tus is used in a darkened room, but if scattered light interferes with the image, cloth curtains may be provided to shield it off. This instrument was shown on the evening of the special exhibition with oxy-hydrogen illumination, a miniature jet and zirconium disc being employed, by which means sufficient light was obtained although the room was lighted by electricity. The instrument gives an inverted and transposed image, the draw- ing is therefore precisely as it is in nature, which is not the case in some cameras which correct the inversion but leave the transposition.” (4) Photomicrography. Nachet’s large Photomicrographic Apparatus. — In this apparatus, represented in fig. 14, the two slide-ways superposed allow of a separa- tion of 2 m. between the objective of the Microscope and the sensitive plate. The camera, measuring 18 by 24 cm., is divided into two parts connected by bellows of equal length. The front portion carries a special chamber with which the body-tube of the Microscope makes a light-proof connection. In the upper part of this chamber, at 0, there is a lid which allows of the adjustment of the projection eye-pieces. Exact focusing is effected by means of the rod CT in connection with an endless screw E, which engages in the wheel H, placed in front of the screw-head of the slow motion, and connected with it by a spiral spring of such resistance that the motion may be communicated to it instantaneously and without vibration. The connection between the rod and tangent screw is of the same kind. The extremity of the upper slide is provided with a levelling screw Y to keep it in contact with the table on which the apparatus is placed. On this table are placed the different illuminating apparatus: heliostat, oxy-hydrogen lamp, ordinary lamp, &c. Bousfield’s Photomicrography.*— The second edition of this guide to the science of photomicrography has just appeared. It has been entirely rewritten and much enlarged. It is extremely well got up, and the illustrations, including specimens of photomicrography, are frequent. For those more interested in photographing histological and bacterio- * J. and A. Churchill, London, 1892, pp. 174, 34 figs, and 1 pi. Fig. 14. NACHET’S LARGE PHOTOJJICROGRAPHIC APPARATUS. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 105 logical specimens this work will bo very useful, as most of tho space is devoted to such preparations, the photographing of diatoms being only mentioned. At the end of the work is an appendix, showing how to prepare objects to be photographed. Podura Scale. — The following is the text of tho remarks made by Mr. T. F. Smith at the Society’s meeting last November (see this Journal, 1892, p. 908), which were illustrated by several photomicro- graphs : — In the papers read 16th December last and March 16th by the Hon. J. G. P. Yereker and Dr. A. Clifford Mercer on the subject of the structure of the Podura scale there is a direct conflict of evidence, in so much that while Mr. Yereker describes the structure as consisting of a hyaline beaded membrane having minute featherlets inserted in it, such featherlets being forked at the end, Dr. Mercer has seen nothing in the shape of spines or featherlets projecting from torn or folded scales, and doubts their existence. At the last meeting of this Society Mr. H. L. A. Wright throws his weight on the side of featherlets, but the evidence offered in support of this seems to have been of such an inconclusive character as to leave the question exactly as it stood before. It was my good (or bad) fortune some two or three years ago — when perhaps I was a little more sanguine of being able to solve the mystery of the scale than I am now — to devote a great deal of attention to this subject, and gained a little positive knowledge which I beg to offer to-night in hope the evidence produced may be able to carry the matter one step further. In estimating the value of the evidence already given us, it is necessary to consider the circumstances under which the images were produced ; and here I cannot help thinking that both observers have failed to take due advantage of the modern methods of illumination, or to get the best performance out of the objectives in their hands. Mr. Nelson’s remark when discussing Mr. Yereker’s paper, that the method of illumination used reduced the performance of an oil-immersion to rather less than a dry objective is so forcible and so true, that it would be an impertinence for me to add to it ; but from internal evi- dence offered by the reproduction of the prints referring to the Podura, I should say that Dr. Mercer has also been governed too much by the conventional appearance of the scale, and produced only the ordinary “exclamation marks” with the light streak on them, with which we have been so familiar for the last forty years. Now there are only two conditions under which you can produce these appearances with an oil-immersion. First, if the scale is on the cover you must throw the objective so much out of adjustment that the resulting image is valueless ; or, secondly, if the scale is on the slip, there is an air-space between it and the cover, and the lens performs, as Mr. Nelson says, rather worse than a dry objective. I submit two prints * here in support of my remarks — Nos. 1 and 2 : No. 1 taken with a dry 1/6-in., and showing the usual “markings,” and No. 2 taken with Zeiss’s 2-mm. apo. of 1*40 N.A., and in a fixed setting for a 160-mm. tube. In No. 2 you see the conventional “mark- ings ” have disappeared altogether, and in their place appears a series of * Copies of these prints are in the Society’s Library. 106 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO white pin-like forms with secondary structure between. Now I offer no opinion as to the truth of the whole of the appearances, but only produce it as an example of what an oil-immersion objective of large aperture shows when working at its best. Print No. 3 shows a scale folded over, and two of the same pin-like bodies projecting nearly their whole length from the line of the fold. No. 4 also shows a scale folded over, and there the projections, although less pronounced, are still visible. On No. 5 I show three or four of the “ pins” separated from the scale altogether, and I think there is sufficient evidence in the last three prints to prove that they are real, and not ghosts. But this is not the whole of the structure, and what that whole is it is not at present for me to say, nor do I early expect to, but I am still collecting evidence, and hope to carry the matter still a little further at an early date. (6) Miscellaneous. The late Sir Richard Owen, K.C.B., F.R.S.— Although the Fellows will have read numerous obituary notices of this distinguished natural- ist, they will expect to have, in their own Journal, some account of the man who was the first President of the Society. Although he does not appear to have been among the most constant of those friends of Dr. Bowerbank who met at the latter’s and at one another’s homes to discuss microscopical problems, his abilities and his position marked him out as the first President of the Society which grew around that nucleus, so that he occupied the chair in 1840 and 1841, and delivered the first two Presidential addresses. He retained throughout life a warm interest in the affairs of the Society, and none expressed more warmly than he his satisfaction at the improvement in the prospects and activity of the Society, which has been so remarkable during the last fifteen years. His own most important contribution to the microscopical side of his science is to be found in his large work on c Odontography,’ illustrated by 168 beautiful plates, many of which are devoted to the details of the minute structure of the teeth of Vertebrates. Born in 1804, on July 20th, originally of Huguenot extraction, and endowed with the constitution, both physical and mental, of a giant, Owen probably produced, single-handed, a larger amount of descriptive work than any other naturalist. Although, in recent years, he was regarded as a conservative, if not an obstructive, he was full to the brim of a philosophical desire to generalize and to speculate. If we say that he generalized about things different to those on which, say Prof. Haeckel or Mr. Romanes speculate, we are, after all, only saying that men and times change. His acuteness in solving palaeontological pro- blems has almost become a proverb. Of his speculations some have been shown by later discoveries to have been justified, some have had to be modified, others to be decisively rejected ; but, it is to be remembered that Owen was a philosophical as well as a descriptive naturalist. As was well said by Prof. Huxley, he was not only the continuator of Cuvier, he belonged also to the philosophical school of Geoffroy Saint- Hilaire and Oken. With regard to the branches of Zoology which he studied, his range ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 107 extended from the Sponge Enplectella to the manlike Gorilla and to Man himself ; in every division of the Animal Kingdom he made researches of prime importance to the student of Comparative Anatomy ; some divisions thereof, such as the Fossil Reptiles, the Dinornis, the Fossil Mammals of Australia, the Marsupials, were for years almost his especial property. His generalizations extended from the wide difference between analogy or functional, and homology or structural resemblance, to the morphology of the digits of odd- and even-toed Ungulates. Even those philosophical speculations which have been universally rejected are still recognized as the cause of investigations in himself and others. Though a man of the most pronounced individuality of character, his affection and esteem for those who preceded him, and especially for Georges Cuvier and John Hunter, was intense, and was a distinct note of his personality. When the history of sanitary science in this country is written the name of Owen will be found associated with that of Edwin Chadwick and John Simon. To the lovers of Natural History he will, for genera- tions to come, be remembered as the prime mover in the erection of the splendid edifice at South Kensington, which is now the “National Museum of Natural History.” To those who had the benefit of his personal acquaintance, his loss is one that it is difficult to express in words ; those who did not know him at home had no idea of the lovable and affectionate nature of one who will, perhaps, be for all time the greatest zoologist our country has produced. Bacteriological Department of King’s College. — Most of the Fellows will remember one of the last of our Conversazioni held at King’s College, when Prof. Crookshank opened his Bacteriological Laboratory for our inspection, and they will read, therefore, with interest the report lately made to the Council of the College by the Principal and the Dean of the Medical School. “ The rapid development of bacteriology has been one of the most remarkable events in the history of medical progress during recent years. Ten years ago bacteriology was only represented by researches which excited scientific interest when published, but the subject did not form a part of the training of a medical student, nor was any knowledge of it regarded as essential to the general medical practitioner. The discoveries which rapidly followed in Germany and France, and the establishment of classes of instruction for medical practitioners and scientists in Germany, created a demand for similar instruction in this country. During the past five years that demand has increased, until bacteriology has come to be recognized and taught as a distinct branch of medical science ; and in London and the provinces opportunities for carrying on original research have been provided at public health institutions and in the medical schools. From the report which follows of the work of the Bacteriological Laboratory of King’s College, for the six years since its foundation, it will be seen that not only was King’s College the pioneer in providing a laboratory devoted to this special branch of medical education, but the laboratory continues to maintain a unique position in giving systematic teaching on this subject in England. In 1886 the Council resolved to 108 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO meet the great demand, which existed at that time and has since increased, for courses of lectures and practical instruction in bacterio- logy. Mr. Crookshank, a former pupil of King’s College, accepted the Lectureship, the first appointment of its kind in this country, and accommodation for practical instruction was provided in one of the class- rooms of the physiological laboratory. The success of these classes was so great that the Council resolved to provide special and permanent accommodation for the courses of instruction, and to grant facilities also for original research. For this purpose the Council created a depart- ment distinct from that of physiology, and one of the largest lecture- rooms in the College, admirably adapted for microscopical work, was converted into a teaching and research laboratory and lecture-room, and additional rooms were built for the Professor and to complete the necessary accommodation. The laboratory was duly licensed for research, and Mr. Crookshank was promoted to the newly created professorial chair ; and with the aid of a contribution from him of 1000/. towards the expenses of the laboratory, the Council were able, without any loss of time, to completely equip the laboratory with all the fittings, instruments, and material necessary for the investigation of the diseases of man and the lower animals, and for the study of bacteriology in all its applications. To enter as a pupil, or for the purpose of undertaking original investigation, it is not necessary to have had any previous connection with King’s College. The laboratory has been opened to all, and, as set fortli in the original syllabus, special inducements were offered from the very first to medical men in practice, medical officers of health, analysts, medical and veterinary officers of the services, and any others whose duties might prevent a daily attendance. It will be a source of satisfaction and gratification to the Council to learn that, from the foundation six years ago up to the date of this report, the number of students qualified and unqualified who have entered the laboratory for instruction or for research amounts to 419. This number comprises general practitioners, army and navy surgeons, medical officers of health, analysts, biologists, veterinary surgeons, and veterinary and medical students. A few have previously been connected with the College or Hospital ; a great number have been qualified medical men from the United States ; others have come from New South Wales, Queensland, Tasmania, China, India, Ceylon, Chili, Cape of Good Hope, and Trinidad; and if the medical officers of the army and navy on leave from foreign service are added to this list, they will serve to illustrate how widely the laboratory is known, and the Council will realize still more fully how great a want existed, and that it has been met by their action. It will be still more gratifying to refer somewhat in detail to the work done in the laboratory as regards original research and work on behalf of the State. Among the first to make use of the laboratory in con- nection with work for the Government may be mentioned Prof. Brown, C.B., of the Board of Agriculture. The Hon. H. N. MacLaurin, M.D., President of the Board of Health, New South Wales, passed through a course of instruction, and paid special attention to actinomycosis. On his return he continued his observations, and published them in the Official Reports of the Board. Mr. Park, Government Veterinary Surgeon, Tasmania, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 109 came over to study bacteriology, particularly actinomycosis and tuber- culosis, and was thus enabled to make valuable reports and suggestions at the Australasian Stock Conference. Prof. Anderson Stuart, of Sydney, passed through a special course of instruction, and investigated the tubercle bacillus, preparatory to proceeding to Berlin to study Koch’s treatment of phthisis. His researches were published in an exhaustive report to the Government, aud the assistance which he received in this laboratory was acknowledged in the preface to his report. [Others follow for which we have no space.] Important researches have been carried out on behalf of the Agri- cultural Department of the Privy Council — now the Board of Agricul- ture— and Prof. Crookshank, who undertook these researches, received in 1890 the thanks of the Privy Council. The results were published in the following reports : — (1) Report on the so-called Hendon Cow Disease and its relation to Scarlet Fever in Man. (2) Report on a Micro-organism alleged to be the contagium of Scarlet Fever. (3) Report on Anthrax in Swine. (4) Report on Tubercular Mammitis in Cows and the Infectivity of the Milk. (5) Report on Actinomycosis in Cattle in Great Britain. (6) Report on Actinomycosis in Man in Great Britain. (7) Report on Actinomycosis in Cattle in Foreign Countries. (8) Report on Actinomycosis in Man in Foreign Countries. (9) Report on Cowpox and Horsepox. The Council will see from this Report that original investigation has been a very important part of the work conducted in the Laboratory of King’s College since its foundation ; but as a department of King’s College, it is especially necessary at the present time to lay stress upon the fact that it has occupied and still retains a unique position in this country as a teaching institution. It was not only the first laboratory established, but it always has been, and still is, in marked contrast to the bacteriological laboratories attached to the pathological department of some of the medical schools, in that systematic courses of instruction are regularly given throughout the whole academical year, and are open to any one. It is a public laboratory, and as such has already attracted a large number of workers, not only from London and the provinces, but from our colonies and other countries. It will not be out of place in this report to add that Prof. Watson Cheyne, previous to the creation of a surgical pathological laboratory, made use of the bacteriological laboratory for a part of his work on tubercular disease of bones, and Prof. Ferrier also, pending the equip- ment of a neurological laboratory, performed there some of the experi- ments which were published in his most recent work on Cerebral Localization.” B. Technique.* Behrens’ Introduction to Botanical Microscopy, f — This work differs considerably in its scope from the standard work for the botanical laboratory, Strasburger’s ‘ Botanisches Praktikum.’ The latter is chiefly * This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro- cesses ; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes, (4) Staining and Injecting; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &c. (6) Miscellaneous. t ‘Leitfaden der botanischen Mikroskopie,’ Braunschweig, 1892, 208 pp. and 150 figs. no SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO concerned with the best modes of treatment of a great variety of botanical preparations and tissues, and with the demonstration of pro- cesses of botanical physiology, which it takes up in succession and in considerable detail. The work under review is rather a guide to the use of the Microscope by botanists, applicable to the whole scope of his investigations, and may be regarded as a supplement or companion to Strasburger’s work. The first section is concerned with the Microscope as an instrument, and with microscopical appliances, and contains nothing that will not be found in ordinary English text-books. The second and larger portion is a guide to the preparation of botanical objects for the Microscope, and treats the subject more in detail than do English treatises, including the most recent methods recommended by the best workers. Here will be found directions for hardening, fixing, clarifying, and softening, the preparation of botanical sections, the use of staining materials, the preservation of the sections when made, and similar daily needs of the microscopical botanist. For the fixing of algfse, and of the protoplasmic contents of the higher plants, Ripart’s fluid is recom- mended, consisting of 0*3 grm. cupric acetate, 0*3 grm. cupric chloride, 1 ccm. glacial acetic acid, 75 ccm. camphor-water, and 75 ccm. distilled water ; for studies of the cell-nucleus a very dilute solution of gentian- violet, 0*3 grm. dissolved in 100 ccm. of absolute alcohol, and this again diluted with 1000 times its volume of distilled water. Cl) Collecting: Objects, including- Culture Processes. Preparing Nutrient Bouillon for Bacteriological Purposes.*— Herren Petri and Massen give the following for preparing bouillon : — Fresh chopped meat containing little fat is soaked for one hour in the necessary quantity of distilled water. It is next heated for three hours at about 60° C., after which it is boiled for half an hour and filtered. When cold the degree of acidity of the fluid is tested from samples of 10-20 ccm. As a rule 10 ccm. require by the litmus reaction 1*8 ccm. ; by the phenolphtalein reaction, 3 ccm. of 1/10 normal caustic soda solution. The broth obtained from the meat of different animals did not present any striking differences. After the addition of alkali pepton and salt it is boiled for some time, best over the open fire for a quarter of an hour, and then filtered hot. Too long and too frequent boiling are to be avoided. The bouillon and the medium prepared from it are to be. kept in the dark. Degree of Alkalinity of Media for Cultivating Cholera Bacilli. t— Dr. M. Dahmen made a series of experiments to determine the most suitable degree of alkalinity for the cultivation media of cholera bacilli. From them he concludes that for the examination of faeces for cholera bacilli a gelatin with 1 per cent, of soda is the most suitable, and that a faintly alkaline medium is not only not sufficient, but absolutely unsuitable. Method for Sowing Bacteria on Gelatin Plates and other Surface Media.J — Hr. P. Troppau practises the following device for sowing * Arbeiten aus d. Kaiserl. Gesundheitsamte, viii. No. 2. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 484. t Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 620. X Tom. cit., pp. 653-4. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. Ill germs on nutritive media. Tlio bacteria to bo cultivated are first disseminated in a small quantity of sterilized water, and some of this is then run over the plate, made of gelatin, serum, vegetable albumen, and the like. The capsule and plate are then placed under the bell of a powerful air-pump. If this work well the water is soon evaporated, leaving the germs behind scattered all over a smooth surface. Care must be taken not to make the surface too dry. This procedure is said to offer the advantage of allowing the inspection of the characteristic shape of superficial colonies at very early stages. Inoculations are easily made from any particular colony, and counting the colonies is much facilitated. Culture of Diatoms.* — Dr. P. Miquel states that a very favourable medium for the artificial culture of freshwater diatoms is ordinary fresh water in which have been thrown stems of grasses, the cortical substance of grains of wheat, barley, or oats, fragments of Muscineae, &c. ; soluble carbohydrates, albuminoids, &c., have an injurious rather than a favour- able influence. The presence of a very small proportion — from 1 to 5 per mil. — of certain salts, such as those of soda, potash, or lime, in the condition of chlorides, bromides, iodides, phosphates, and sulphates, has a marked favourable effect on the multiplication of diatoms ; but they appear to prefer to obtain their silica from that set at liberty by the decomposition of plants rather than from soluble silicates. The marine kinds are easily cultivated in artificial sea-water, especially if containing fragments of Fucus or other sea-weeds. In another paper on the same subject, the same author j gives full instructions as to the best mode of cultivating diatoms, both freshwater and marine, the best media for their growth, the most favourable tem- perature, light, &c. The most destructive enemies to diatoms are bacteria. An apparatus is described for their culture free of bacteria. Cultivation of Diatoms.J — Dr. L. Macchiati, in a preliminary com- munication, points out that diatoms are easily cultivable in the nutritive solutions used in vegetable physiology, provided that a few drops of silicate of potash be added to the medium. Or the very water which the diatoms inhabit may be used. This, when filtered, and with the addition of a few drops of strong silicate of potash solution, forms an excellent fluid. The medium, placed in a watch-glass, is then inoculated with a loopful of the water inhabited by the diatoms, and the two fluids having been thoroughly mixed together by stirring, a loopful of the mixture is placed on the surface of a cover-glass, the exact thickness of which is previously ascertained. To the margin of the cavity of a hollow-ground slide is then applied some vaselin, and this is carefully placed over the cover-glass. The slide, now containing a hanging drop cultivation, is turned over. In such a drop the diatoms are in an almost natural state, and their development and mode of life may be watched under a power as high as 1/18, though the lens commonly employed by the author is a dry apochro- matic with focal distance of 4 mm. and N.A. 0*95. In combination * Comptes Rendus, cxiv. (1892) pp. 780-2. t Le Diatomiste, 1892, pp. 73-5, 94-9, 121-8, 149-56 (3 figs,), f Jourm. de Micrographie, xvi. (1892) pp. 1 1 6—20. 112 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO with eye-pieces 6, 12, 18, magnifications of 372, 750, and 1125 were obtained. The best part for observing the diatoms is the edge of the drop, and this should be first centered under a low power. Preparing Litmus Tincture for Testing Reaction of Gelatin.* — According to Dr. M. Dahmen, a very sensitive litmus solution may be prepared from Mohr’s formula. The litmus is to be thoroughly worked up with hot distilled water; the filtered solution is then evaporated, and having been treated with acetic acid to saturation, is again evapo- rated down to the consistence of a thick extract. This mass is then placed in a flask, and a large quantity of 90 per cent, alcohol added. The blue pigment then precipitates a red dye and acetate of potash remains in solution. The litmus is next filtered off, and having been washed with alcohol, is dissolved in warm water and again filtered. The solution must be kept in vessels stopped with cotton-wool, as in tightly-closed bottles it soon loses its colour. Sterilizing Incoagulable Albumen.f — M. E. Marchal suggests that the action of certain salts may be utilized to prevent the coagulation of egg albumen when heated to 100°. These salts are borate of soda, sulphate of iron, and nitrate of urea. The following are the quantities of these substances to be used for the purpose : — Solutions of 2 to 5 per cent. : — Borate of soda, 0 • 05 grm. per litre ; sulphate of iron, 0 * 001- 0*006 grm. per litre. Solutions of 10 per cent. : — Nitrate of urea, 4 to 5 grm. per litre. Thus prepared, the liquids may be sterilized at 100° in cultivation flasks. It is hardly necessary to point out that nitrate of urea should not be used to prevent the coagulation of albumen if the experiments relate to nutrition or fermentation of matter containing albumen. Sterilization of Water by Pressure .J — MM. Rouart, Geneste, and Herscher have constructed an apparatus for sterilizing water effectually and economically by a combination of heat and pressure. It consists of four distinct parts — a boiler, primary and secondary converter (or cooler), and a clarifier. The water to be sterilized is introduced into the primary converter — a cylindrical metal vessel surrounded by a worm in which water heated to 120°-130°, and just coming from the boiler, is circulating. From the converter, and having there been raised to 100°, the water is conducted along a pipe to a worm running round the boiler, where it is heated up to 120°- 130°. From this worm the water then passes through the worm in the primary converter, thence through the secondary converter, and finally, having passed through the clarifier, completes its circuit. The secondary converter is also a worm sur- rounded by cold water, and might be termed the cooler. The clarifier is filled with powdered silica, apparently between layers of canvas, and is not intended for a filter, but to impart a clearness or limpidity to the water which has been removed from it by the heating it has gone through. The water having passed through the clarifier, is delivered bright and clear, and fit for all the purposes of life. * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 622. f Bull. Acad. Roy. Sci. de Belgique, xxiv. (1892) pp. 323-7. X Journ. de Microgr., xvi. (1892) pp. 145-52 (2 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 113 Thermo - Regulator for Petroleum Heating.* — Dr. P. Altmann describes an apparatus by which a thermostat can bo maintained at a constant temperature where the source of heat is not gas. It consists of a contact thermometer, tho tube of which is immersed in the water space of the incubator. At the top of the tube is a box with dial and two hands, one of these is fixed at any desired temperature. As the temperature of the incubator rises, the free hand moves until it touches the fixed hand. This makes an electric contact, and a current passes to the other part of the apparatus. Here by means of an electromagnet and a lever two mica plates are made to close over the lamp in such a way that the heat is directed away. As the temperature of tho thermostat falls, so does the free hand of the contact thermometer fall away from the fixed hand, and then the contact is broken, whereupon the mica plates fall back, and the heat reaches the thermostat again. The apparatus works quite automatically, and is said to maintain a constant temperature. Apparatus for Obtaining Samples of Deep SeaWater and from the Sea Bottom.! — Mr. H. L. Bussell describes an apparatus which he has used with very satisfactory results, for collecting samples of deep sea water. It consists of a large-sized test-tube, tightly fitted with a rubber cork, having a single hole. The opening in the cork is closed by a glass tube, which projects about 3/4 in. below the lower end of the stopper. The upper part of this small tube is bent at right angles to the long axis of the collecting tube, and drawn out to a fine calibre. The various parts having been carefully sterilized, are fitted together, and a partial vacuum produced either by means of an air-pump, or by just heating the tube. The end of the tube is then sealed. To prevent the ingress of air, the cork should be coated with a mixture of beeswax and resin. Samples of water are obtained by clamping the tubes to a holder in such a way that the drawn-out end lies close to the connecting line. When sunk to the desired depth, a lead messenger is sent down the connecting line. This catches the end of the fine tube, breaks it off, and destroys the vacuum. The tube then fills with water. There is no danger of the sample getting mixed with water from other depths, as the tube is effectually stoppered by means of imprisoned air. The apparatus used for obtaining material from the sea bottom consists of an iron tube (gas-pipe) pointed at one end. The other end is fitted by means of a screw with a removable “ sleeve,” the upper end of which is closed by a valve. As the weighted instrument descends, the water passes through the pipe, and when the bottom is struck, the pipe is forced into the soil, and so fills with a compact mass of material. When withdrawn, the water-pressure closes the valve, and prevents the contents from being washed out. Though the apparatus is theoretically imperfect, it practically delivers samples of the sea bottom quite uncon- taminated. Puritas Water Filter. t — Dr. M. Jolles, from experiments with Micrococcus prodigiosus , finds that the Puritas Water Filter is only * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 654-5 (2 figs.). f Bot. Gazette, xvii. (1892) pp. 312-21. i Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 596-605. 1893, t 114 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO suitable for the filtration of waters which have not undergone sufficient natural filtration, and that it does not deliver a germ-free water. Testing the Pasteur-Chamberland Filter * — Drs. T. Smith and Y. A. Moore show how, by a very simple contrivance, it can be demon- strated that the pores in the porcelain bougie are bigger than most bacteria. A bougie of the usual shape is put inside a long, pretty narrow test-tube, and the latter plugged at the top with cotton-wool. The combination is then dry- sterilized. To show how the bacteria pass through, a flask of bouillon is inoculated with a pure cultivation of a species of bacterium, and having been incu- bated for some hours, is run into the filter by means of a sterilized pipette. The flask is then connected with an air-pump, and some of the fluid drawn through the filter until the latter is surrounded up to a certain height with a layer of fluid. The whole apparatus is then incubated. In a few days the bouillon becomes turbid. The experiment may be reversed ; that is, the fluid may be sucked up into the filter from without, but the details of the process are more complicated, and much less satisfactory. Method for Differentiating between Bacilli of Typhoid Fever and Water Bacteria closely resembling them.j — Dr. J. Weyland examined some drinking water suspected of giving rise to enteric fever, and isolated therefrom a species of bacterium the morphological and cultiva- tion characteristics of which were not to be certainly distinguished from those of true typhoid bacilli. The negative indol reaction served to increase the suspicion of their identity. The author first set about comparing the vitality of these bacilli with those of real typhoid, but no notable differences were shown, and recourse was had to chemistry. As the bouillon cultivation of both kinds had an acid reaction, the amount of acid formed in 10 ccm. of milk serum was first ascertained. For this Petruschsky’s method was adopted, but phenolphtalein was substituted for litmus as indicator. After having been incubated for three days, it was found that the serum inoculated with the real typhoid required 8-9*1 ccm. of 1/100 alkali solution to neutralize it, while the pseudo-typhoid took 12 *9-15 *4 ccm. The amount of carbonic acid formed by the two kinds of bacteria was then determined by Pettenkofer’s method ; this consists in forcing the carbonic acid formed by the bacteria into tubes filled with baryta water, and estimating the diminution of alkalinity by titration with oxalic acid. The only caution to be observed is that the fermentation bulbs must be kept at similar temperatures, as the slightest difference in heat has an important influence on the production of carbonic acid. This part of the experiment lasted 10 days, and the result of it was that the pseudo- typhoid bacilli were found to have produced about five times as much carbonic acid as the true typhoid bacilli. A repetition of the experiment gave a similar result. It was accordingly determined that the water bacteria in question were not typhoid bacilli. * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., pp. 628-9 (1 fig.), f Archiv f. Hygiene, xiv. p. 374. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 338-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 115 New Biological Test for Cholera Bacteria.* — Herr O. Bujwid finds that iodoform exerts considerable influence on the growth of cholera bacilli, and little or none on that of bacteria resembling cholera vibrios. If cholera bacilli be mixed with gelatin and placed in a test-tube, and then exposed to the vapour of iodoform the gelatin will remain unliquefied for 10 to 15 days, while in control tubes the superficial layers begin to be liquefied on the second day. It is noteworthy that the quantity of iodoform in the vapour is so small, that even after 18 days no diminution in weight can be detected by most sensitive scales. In 10 to 15 days liquefaction begins and proceeds, the iodoform notwithstanding. No like effect was produced by the following sub- stances : — Camphor, naphthalin, hypochlorite of calcium, turpentine, thymol, phenol. Iodine has some, but much weaker, effect. On the choleroid bacteria, e. g. B. Finkler-Prior , Vibrio MetscJmikovi , B. Miller i, B. Benecki, the effect is much weaker, and liquefaction is perceptible on the third day. The difference is little dependent on external conditions, and holds good for low and high temperatures, even for such at which the gelatin begins to liquefy ; for the liquefied gelatin remained quite clear under the iodoform action, while the control gelatin is quite cloudy. Old and new cultivations give the same reaction, and the author thinks that the action of iodoform should be added to the methods for distinguishing cholera bacilli from other bacteria, and that this might be known as the iodoform test. Bacteriological Diagnosis of Cholera. t — According to Dr. Pfeiffer the only certain procedure for diagnosing cholera is by cultivating on the gelatin plate. Colonies of cholera bacilli can be certainly recog- nized in 24-36 hours, and more especially if the cultivations be made with dejecta in which liquefying bacteria are rare. Bujwid’s reaction with mineral acids is regarded as very uncertain and the presence of comma bacilli in microscopical preparations from suspected material should only be regarded as presumptive evidence. On the other hand, the method of Schottelius may be adopted in many cases, though if there be time it should be controlled by the plate method. Schottelius’ method consists in mixing the material to be examined with a thick layer of bouillon, and as the cholera bacilli are strongly aerobic they grow on the surface, forming a delicate scum which is almost a pure cultivation. Cop lin, W. M. L., and D. Be van — A Test Reaction for the Culture of the Micrococcus pyogenes aureus. Med. Record , II. (1892) p. 70. Dei Sant i. L. — Note sur la sterilisation de l’eau par precipitation. (Note on the Sterilization of Water by Precipitation.) Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol., 1892, pp. 711-3. M erke, H. — Ein Apparat zur Herstellung keimfreien Wassers fur chirurgische und bakteriologische Zwecke. (Apparatus for producing Germ-free Water for Surgical and Bacteriological Purposes.) Berl. Klin. Wochenschr., 1892, pp. 663-5. * Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 595-6. f Deutsch. Med. Wochenschr., 1892, No. 36. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 483-4. i 2 116 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Petri, E. J., u. A. Maas sen — Ueber die Bereitung der Nahrbouillon fur bakteriologische Zwecke. (On the Preparation of Nutrient Bouillon for Bac- teriological Purposes.) Arb. a. d. ft. Gesundheits-A., VIII. (1892) pp. 311-4. Petri, E. J. — Eine Flasche zur Sterilisation und zur keimfreien Entnahme von Eliissigkeiten. (A Sterilization Flask, and means for obtaining Parts of Fluids free of Germs.) Arb. a. d. ft. Gesundheits-A ., VIII. (1892) pp. 316-7. (21 Preparing- Objects. Examination of Blood of Amphibia.* — Herr M. C. Dekhuyzen makes use of test-tubes with not too thin walls, holding 8 com., and having a diameter of 14 mm. ; they are placed in a simple wooden stand, and filled with the fixation fluid or with simple salt solution. In the latter cases the tubes are filled first with water and boiled, and the slides are treated in the same way ; the cover-glasses are cleaned with acetic acid, and water, and, after drying, with ether. The two fluids used were (a) (1) a 2 per cent, solution of osmic acid, (2) 6 per cent, acetic acid containing 24 per cent, of a watery solution of methylen-blue and a little (0*014 per cent.) acid fuchsin ; (b) the other fluid contained 20 volumes of acetic acid mixed with 80 volumes of methylen-blue solution ; 6 volumes of this fluid mixed with 14 volumes of a 1/5 per cent, solution of acid fuchsin gave the required concentration. Before every fixation 2 ccm. of the last deep-blue mixture was well mixed with 6 ccm. of 2 per cent, osmic acid and placed in small tubes which were filled up to the top. It is important to be very careful in allowing the blood when it comes from the blood-vessels to come into the most intimate contact with the fixing mixture. The blood-cells sink to the bottom. After thirty minutes a drop of the fluid should be placed on a stick, and then some of the bottom be drawn up and added to it ; the cover-glass should be run round with xylol balsam. The preparations must be kept from the light. Examination of Land Nemertines.| — Dr. A. Dendy, after various trials, finds that the best way of killing Geonemerti s australiensis is first to hold the worm in vapour of chloroform for about half a minute, when the animal will contract to its normal resting condition and be rapidly stupefied. Then quickly plunge the worm into strong spirit. The creature is thus killed and hardened while under the influence of chloroform, and the proboscis is not ejected at all, nor does the body break up. If it is desired to kill specimens with the proboscis ejected they may be suddenly immersed in strong methylated spirit or in a cold saturated alcoholic solution of corrosive sublimate. The sections of the worm were stained with borax-carmine or Kleinenberg’s haematoxylin ; both methods should be employed, for the latter reagent brings out with wonderful distinctness the network of excretory tubules, which were not to be recognized in specimens treated with borax-carmine. Killing Nematodes for the Microtome.:): — Mr. C. W. Stiles recom- mends the following method : — Only one worm can be killed at a time ; place it on a large slide with a few drops of water, place a second slide * Verhandl. Anat. Gesell., 1892, pp. 90-3. f Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 1891 (1892) pp. 89 and 90. I Amer. Natural., xxvi. (1892) p. 972. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 117 over the worm and move it slowly to and fro. This movoment causes the worm to straighten. As soon as the Nematode assumes the desired position pipette in the fixing solution between the slides, continuing the motion of the upper slide till the worm is dead. By this method a specimen can be obtained which is perfectly straight and sound. Pressure on a delicate worm may be avoided by pasting a piece of paper on the upper surface of the second slide, and using that as a handle. As a killing liquid Mr. Stiles generally uses a solution of corrosive sublimate — f- 70 per cent, alcohol -f- a few drops of acetic acid heated to 50° ; this passes through the cuticle very rapidly. Methods of Studying Development of Amphiura squamata*— Mr. E. W. MacBride fixed his specimens with corrosive sublimate in distilled or in sea water ; with a mixture of three parts sublimate and one part acetic acid ; with chromic, picric, and glacial acetic acid ; with Flemming’s solution, alcohol of 30 per cent., or alcohol (hot) at 70 per cent., with a few drops of corrosive ; with one-fifth to 1 per cent, osmic acid ; or with osmic acid followed by Muller’s fluid for 18 to 20 hours. He found that the only liquid which gives reliable results is osmic acid, though there are certain disadvantages in its use, for it renders the animals very brittle and has little penetrating power. The shrinkage which follows its use is entirely prevented, and the brittleness is diminished if the osmic acid is followed by Muller’s fluid. All liquids which decalcified as well as fixed were of no use as they gave rise to cavities by the evolution of gas in the still soft tissues. The method finally adopted by the author was to kill the animals in a solution of about half per cent, osmic acid allowed to act for ten minutes or so ; after mixing with water they were transferred to Muller’s fluid for 18 to 20 hours, then put at once into alcohol of 30 per cent, and brought slowly up into alcohol of 90 per cent. In this last they were hardened for a night ; two or three drops of nitric acid were then added to some fresh alcohol of 90 per cent., and the animals were immersed in this till decalcification was complete, a process which occupied not more than twenty hours. Double staining was used in order to be certain about the boundaries of sinuses, since the ordinary plasma of Echinoderms stains with great difficulty. Mayer’s paracarmine was used as a nuclear stain ; this has the great advantages that it acts rapidly, and that all superfluous stains can be extracted by 70 per cent, of alcohol, which can be allowed to act for an indefinite time. The plasma stained was applied on the slide ; two were found to give good results — solution of picric acid in turpentine, and Mayer’s oxidized haemoglobin or “ haematein.” The advantage of the former is that it can be used with the shellac method of mounting without any danger of staining the mounting agent. For embryos pre- served in glacial acetic acid Mayer’s hEemalaun was used ; this gives a blue nuclear stain and colours much of the plasma a faint yellow. The embryos were imbedded in paraffin and cut into series of sections in a plane parallel to the line joining the madreporite with the mouth, and at the same time perpendicular to the plane of the disk. The specimens were always carefully oriented before being cut, a point * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxxiv. (1892) pp. 131-4. 118 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO to which, in Mr. MacBride’s opinion, Cuenot has not paid sufficient attention. Very thin sections — 3^ p,, 4J- p, and for adults and oldest stages 7 p — were made. The author states that he obtained perfect series of sections with finely differentiated stain, and clear, sharp outlines; the sections are said to be clearer and more diagrammatic than the figures he has been able to make of them. Preparation of Larvae of Asterias vulgaris.* — Mr. G. W. Field found that Kleinenberg’s picric salt gave the most satisfactory results for billing these larvae. Flemming’s, followed by Merkel’s fluid, gave excellent results, as did also Perenyi’s fluid. Oil of cedar or of origanum proved most satisfactory for clearing. Preserving Cunina.f — Dr. 0. Maas killed the Cunina- stock and its buds with Flemming’s chrom-osmic-acetic acid (5-20 minutes), gradually washed them with water, and passed them through a series of dilutions of alcohol up to 90 per cent. Thence some were replaced in water and stained with borax-carmine, but the unstained forms gave best results. Methyl-blue was also used to demonstrate the nervous system. The most important point is to see that the medusae are properly placed before they are cut. Preparing and Staining Yeast.J — Dr. H. Moeller used for fixing yeast preparations a 1 per cent, solution of iodide of potassium saturated with iodine, this fluid ten times diluted, and also iodine-water. The material and the fixative may be mixed together at once or upon the cover-glass, which merely requires a smear. When fixed and dried the preparation must be thoroughly hardened. This may be done by leaving the preparations in the iodine solution for a day, and then after washing in water and weak spirit keeping them in absolute alcohol for one or two days. The time required for hardening may be diminished by repeatedly boiling the alcohol, and the preparations are more clearly stained if they are then immersed in chloroform for a day. It is always useful to pass the cover-glasses once or twice through the flame. The preparations are best stained by means of haematein and picric acid, the latter acting as a mordant. But it is essential that the prepara- tions should be thoroughly fixed and hardened ; they may then be treated with a saturated aqueous solution of picric acid for 1/2-3 hours ; the preparation is then passed through water so as to wash off some, but not all of the picric acid. For staining, an alkaline solution of hema- toxylin is used. It would not appear, however, that the foregoing staining was more advantageous than that with anilins, of which the following were successfully employed : — phenolfuchsin, alkaline methy- len-blue, Gram’s method, and also gentian- violet in carbolic acid, water, glycerin, 1 per cent, acetic acid, and 1 per cent, iodide of potash. If the anilin dyes are used the preparation should be over-stained and then differentiated by some decolorant ; if Gram’s method be adopted alcohol must be used ; but for other stains a mixture of equal volumes of glycerin and water was found to give the best result. As soon as the desired degree of decolorization is attained the preparation * Quart. Joum. Micr. Sci., xxxiv. (1892) p. 106. t Zool. Jahrb., v. (1892) pp. 271-300 (2 pis.). j Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 537-50 (1 pi.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 119 is washed in water, dried in the air, and mounted in balsam, styrax, or dammar. The grana or microsomes were best brought out by staining with some anilin dye and then differentiating with 2 per cent, acetic acid. Spores are very easily stained by treating the preparation with boiling phenolfuchsin aud then washing out in 4 percent, sulphuric acid. The yeasts used for these observations were natural cultivations of ordinary bottom yeasts. The yeast was shaken up with distilled water and then, after settling, the fluid decanted off. The sediment, after having been thus treated several times, was kept for the observations. Method for Discovering Tubercle Bacilli in Milk with the Centri- fuge.*— Herr Ilkewitsch says that he has successfully employed the following method for detecting tubercle bacilli in milk after these organisms had been precipitated by the centrifuge. The author was led to this procedure by finding that the intraperitoneal inoculation of guinea-pigs and rabbits was ofttimes unsuccessful. After the cream has been separated 20 ccm. of the milk are coagulated with citric acid. The residue separated from the whey by filtration is dissolved in an aqueous solution of sodic phosphate, treated with 6 ccm. of sulphuric ether, and then shaken up for 10 to 15 minutes. The solution below the fat layer is drawn off by opening a tap at the bottom of the collecting vessel and then placed in the centrifuge. The sediment is separated from the fluid by means of a copper ball dropped into the separation-tube. This allows the fluid to be poured off and the sediment left behind. The sediment is then spread out on cover-glasses and obtained in the usual way. (4) Staining- and Injecting. Method for Staining Tubercle Bacilli.-)*— Dr. B. A. van Ketel has devised the following procedure for detecting tubercle bacilli in sputum, &c. In a wide-mouthed flask capable of holding about 100 ccm., 10 ccm. of water and 6 ccm. of acid, carbolic, liquefactum are mixed. About 10-15 ccm. of the fluid to be examined are then added and the flask having been closed with a caoutchouc stopper is vigorously shaken for about a minute. With milk or very thin sputum the water may be omitted. After the shaking the fluid becomes milky ; the flask is then filled up with water and again shaken. The fluid is then poured into a conical glass and allowed to subside. In from 12 to 24 hours some of the deepest lying sediment is removed with a pipette and spread on a cover-glass. The dried and heated cover-glass preparation is then washed in ether or chloroform and afterwards in alcohol, or the pre- paration may be treated with ether-alcohol. This is specially necessary if the preparation turn out rather thick. The cover-glass is then stained by the Ziehl-Neelsen method. The foregoing procedure is extremely simple, easily carried out, and produces a bright distinct microscopical picture. * Miinchen. Med. Wochenschr., 1892, No. 5. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 441-2. f Aich. f. Hygiene, xv. pp. 109-24. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) pp. 689-90. 120 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Staining Solutions made with Carmine, Cochineal, and Hsematin.* — Dr. P. Mayer, who has been at some pains to investigate the origin of cochineal and the composition of carmine, finds that carminic acid is not the sole staining principle, but that this acid must be considered in conjunction with alumina and also with calcium. The practical outcome of his investigations and experiments are formula} for staining solutions having a fixed composition and giving a definite result. Of these we may mention the following : — Carmalum. — Carminic acid, 1 grm. ; alum, 10 grm. ; distilled water, 200 ccm. The solution is made with the aid of heat and the clear supernatant fluid or the filtrate used. The solution will keep if a few crystals of thymol be added, or if 1 per cent, salicylic acid or 5 per cent, salicylate of soda be used. Paracarmin. — Carminic acid, 1 grm-. ; chloride of aluminium, 1/2 grm. ; chloride of calcium, 4 grm. ; 70 per cent, alcohol, 100 ccm. The solu- tion is made cold or by the aid of heat, and after having stood is filtered. There is no necessity to differentiate the stain with acidulated alcohol, although this may be done. A staining solution made with cochineal, and having similar but less efficient properties to the foregoing : — Cochineal, 5 grm. ; chloride of calcium, 5 grm.; chloride of aluminium, 0*5 grm.; nitric acid (sp. gr. 1 • 20), 8 drops ; 50 per cent, alcohol, 100 ccm. The cochineal is to be finely powdered and mixed with the salts in a mortar. The spirit and acid are then added, and the mixture heated to boiling. It is allowed to stand for some days and filtered. The author concludes by referring to lisemacalcium, a solution devised by him some time back. I He finds that it tends to throw down a deposit and decompose after a time, but this may be prevented by preparing the solution in two flasks, one containing the spirit, the acid, and the calcium chloride ; the other the hasmatin and the aluminium chloride. The two solutions are mixed when required for use. Demonstrating Cholera Vibrio.j: — Dr. L. Heim gives the following as a very practicable procedure for demonstrating the presence of the cholera vibrio. From the evacuation or from the intestinal contents a flakelet of mucus should be taken, and having been spread out on a cover-glass, stained with fuchsin and examined with an oil-immersion for vibrios. At the same time another little flake of mucus is to be placed on a cover-glass, and a drop of bouillon added thereto. The cover is then fitted over a hollow-ground slide, and the margins vaselined to make a hanging drop cultivation. Two other particles are to be distributed, one in a test-tube filled with bouillon, the other in a test-tube containing gelatin. From the latter plate cultivations, after some attenuations, may be obtained. Even if the usual indispensable apparatus be wanting, the suspected material may be inoculated on bouillon or a 2 per cent, pepton solution, and a plate culture made from the gelatin solution, the latter serving for further inoculations. This procedure is to be repeated during the next 24 hours, during which the * Mittheil. Zool. Station zu Neapel, x. (1892) pp. 480-501. t See this Journal, 1891, p. 831. 1 Centialbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 353. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 121 bouillon tubes, together with the hanging drops intended for micro- scopical examination, are to be left. The latter should be protected from the light and kept in a warm place, best in an incubator. If the cholera germs have been in the excreta, they may bo detected with a low power on the plates in 21—48 hours, and may then be inoculated in gelatin or pep ton bouillon. In these the cholera-red reaction with sulphuric acid may be obtained the next day. In default of the double capsule, a couple of dinner plates or saucers, the undermost being covered with blotting-paper, will serve the purpose of making a moist chamber. The incubator may be replaced by a pot or saucepan partly filled with water at 30°-27°. In this the test-tube, &c., may be incubated by fixing them in beakers laden with sand to keep them steady. The saucepan is covered with its lid, and a temperature approximate to that of the body is maintained by means of a night-light placed under the pot. Staining Flagella of the Tetanus Bacillus.* * * §— As a rule, says Dr. K. Schwarz, the tetanus bacillus has a flagellum at one of its rounded ends, and this is usually somewhat, occasionally considerably, larger than the bacillus itself. In sporogenous bacilli the flagella cannot be perceived. The flagella were best stained by Loeffler’s method on bacilli taken from bouillon cultivations developed under hydrogen, and 48 hours old. Two drops of 1 per cent, soda solution were added to the mordant. Trenkmann’s method was not successful. Staining Flagella of Bacteria.j — Herr L. Luksch finds that by sub- stituting ferric acetate for the sulphate of iron in the mordant devised by Loeffler for staining bacterial flagella, the disagreeable deposit on the surface of the preparation is obviated. It is certainly true that this deposit renders the original procedure J less effective in practice than the promise held out, and it is noted by the author that Loeffler’s solu- tion should be made with the ferric, and not with the ferrous salt, but if the acetate gets rid of the surface deposit the distinction may be neglected. The author’s solution is made from freshly prepared cold saturated ferric acetate ; in other respects the formula is the same as Loeffler’s, except that to the 16 ccm. of the mordant, 5-10 drops of acetic acid are added. When the preparation has been slightly warmed for one minute it is washed in water and then in 20 per cent, acetic acid to give greater clearness. It is again washed in water several times, after which it is warm-stained with anilin-water-fuchsin or anilin-water-gentian-violet. Examining Sputum in Sections.§ — When examining sputum in cover-glass preparations many of the delicate and fragile cells, says Dr. Gabritschewsky, are destroyed, but this may be avoided by making sections of sputum which has been fixed and hardened. For this purpose alcohol, Flemming’s fluid, chromacetic acid, picric acid andisaturated sub- * Lo Sperimentale, 1891, p. 373. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 391. f Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 430. t See this Journal, 1890, p. 678. § Deutsch. Med. Wochenschr,, 1891, No. 43. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 395. 122 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO limate solution are well suited. Muller’s fluid cannot be used as it softens and disintegrates the masses of expectoration. The staining solutions employed by the author were alum-carmine, safranin, and hsematoxylin-eosin. By this method in three cases out of four examined, giant cells were demonstrated. Rapid Staining of Tubercle Bacilli in Tissue preserved in Muller’s Fluid.* — M. Letulle gives the following procedure for staining tubercle bacilli in tissues which have been hardened in Muller’s fluid. Accord- ing to this, and indeed other writers, Muller’s fluid is unsuitable as a hardening agent when these micro-organisms are to be sought for. After hardening in Muller’s fluid the material is treated with spirit and then imbedded in celloidin. The sections are then stained with haematoxylin and next with a rubin solution (2 per cent, carbolic acid water with rubin to saturation). The sections, after having been washed with water and alcohol, are further stained with iodine-green (iodine-green 1 grm., 2 per cent, carbolic acid water 100 grin). The preparations are then mounted in the usual way. The nuclei are stained violet, hyaline bodies rose, and the bacilli dark red, the rest remaining white. The whole procedure lasts barely half an hour. Hofmeister, F. — Ein Apparat fur Massenfarbung von Deckglastrockenprapa- raten. (Apparatus for Staining dry Cover -glass Preparations.) Fortschr. d. Med., 1892, pp. 531-6. C 5) Mounting-, including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c- Preserving Fluid and Fixing Material.f — Dr. F. Krasser recom- mends as a preserving fluid for vegetable substances a mixture of 1 vol. acetic acid, 3 vols. glycerin, and 10 vols. of a 50 per cent, solution of sodium chloride. In this solution sections of beet and of etiolated potato-shoots retained their structure and their colour for nearly a year. Salicy 1-aldehyde is a good fixing material for chromatophores, as e.g. the pigment of Solarium Lycopersicum. For this purpose Dr. Krasser uses a 1 per cent, alcoholic solution. Glycerin Mounting. J — Dr. C. E. McClung recommends the use of glycerin in the following : — “ The use of glycerin as a mounting medium is not as universal as its qualities merit it should be. The convenience with which a balsam mount is made proves a temptation which many microscopists cannot resist, and as a result, numerous mounts are entirely spoiled by consigning the object to a medium not adapted for its reception. There is a fitness in all things, and the saying is as apjDlicable to microscopy as to other departments of work. Balsam has its use and glycerin its application, and the two should be confined to their respective provinces. Frey says, £ What balsam is to dry tissues, glycerin is to moist ones,’ and the saying might be made even more emphatic. Glycerin has the advantage of being non-volatile, colourless, slightly * Gazette Hebd., 1892, No. 22. See Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., xii. (1892) p. 441. t SB. K. K. Zool.-Bot. Gesell. Wien, May 20, 1892. X The Microscope, xii. (1892) pp. 201-3. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 123 affected by changes of temperature and of having a high refractive index. An advantage of special importance is that it remains perfectly colourless for any length of time, while balsam, in a few years at most, becomes yellow, and finally so opaque that the preparation is worthless. The soft, natural appearance which objects mounted in glycerin have renders any extra labour incurred in their preparation a matter of little moment to the artistic manipulator. The difficulty experienced in the manipulation of glycerin deters many from its more frequent employment. If attention is paid to details, however, it will be found but little more difficult to use than balsamic mediums. In order to bring out the points of importance, a brief description of the preparation of an ideal mount will be expedient. Attention is first directed to the material and apparatus used. The glycerin should be pure, and free from dust and air-bubbles. To keep it free from these contaminations, devices such as are recommended by Carpenter and Prof. James are excellent. These are bottles containing the glycerin, and provided with glass tubes, whereby the glycerin is forced out by air-pressure. The cements may be of a balsamic nature, but preferably zinc oxide or asphalt. Any cement not affected by the medium may be employed, but experience has proven that the two above named are the best. The other essential parts of the completed mount are the slip and cover-glass. No special mention is required concerning these except that they should be perfectly clean. To ensure this, the practice of leaving them until ready for use in a bath of ordinary battery fluid is recommended. In preparing a mount, the operations naturally divide themselves into four divisions, coming under the heads — (1) preparing the cell ; (2) preparing the section ; (3) placing section in the cell ; and (4) securing the cover-glass to the cell. Under the first head attention is called to three points, viz. thickness of the cement, depth of cell, and age of the cell. Upon the consistency of the cement depends in a great measure the formation of a good cell. It should not be thin enough to spread, yet should flow readily and smoothly from the brush. The depth of the cell should be such that a complete support shall be provided for the cover-glass without causing it to bear upon the object when cemented down, and yet should not be of such a depth as to interpose an unnecessary stratum of glycerin between the section and cover-glass. Of more importance, perhaps, than any other point, is the direction regarding the age of the cell. It is a common practice to ring a cell and use it while fresh, the manipulator arguing that a more perfect union of cell-wall and cover-glass is secured in this manner. Perhaps this is true, but it is at the expense of the slide’s usefulness. An author already quoted is authority for the statement that an ordinary balsam cell will, in drying, shrink 30 per cent. Under these conditions and in view of the fact that glycerin is non- compressible, something must give way when the cell contracts; and this is either the cover-glass or cell-wall. Whichever it is, the final result is the destruction of the mount and loss of all the work involved in its preparation. This leads us then to make the following statement : 124 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO — Never use a 4 green ’ cell. The older the cell the better, and, at ordinary temperatures, two weeks is the shortest space of time in which a cell of medium depth will become seasoned. Assuming the mount to be a section of vegetable tissue, the steps involved in its preparation would be the cutting, staining, washing, and dehydrating. The length of this article will not permit any reference to cutting, so the process of staining is next noticed. Any stain insoluble in the glycerin may be used. It is best applied immediately after the cutting of the section. After the section has acquired the proper depth of colour, it should be thoroughly washed, and then placed in glycerin. From here it goes through the next process — placing in the cell. In placing the section care should be exercised to have it exactly in the centre of the cell. With the section thus situated a drop of glycerin is allowed to fall upon it from the dropping-bottle. Take the clean cover-glass between the left thumb and forefinger, and place the left side in contact with the drop of glycerin ; draw it over until supported on the left edge of the cell- wall ; loose the hold of the left hand and allow the cover-glass to fall gradually by supporting the right edge with a needle. Having thus placed the cover-glass and centered it, place a clip upon it. The superfluous glycerin thus forced out is washed away by means of a jet of water from the wash-bottle so directed as not to strike under the cover-glass. Some water does get under, but this does no harm, as it supplies moisture which the glycerin otherwise would have by ‘ creeping * from the cell. When thoroughly dried by means of strips of bibulous paper the slide is ready for the last step — securing the union of cover-glass and cell-wall. This result is best obtained by ringing once around the cover-glass and allowing this coat to dry before applying cement enough to hide the junction of the cover-glass and cell-wall. When this latter step is accomplished the mount is essentially complete, but no one who has a pride in his work will leave the slide unstriped. There is no more beautiful slide than one formed of white cement and ringed with black. Properly labelled and cleaned, the slide is ready for the cabinet ; and if the due amount of care has been exercised in its preparation, it will always be a source of pride and pleasure to its owner.” An Aqueous Solution of Hsematoxylin which does not readily deteriorate.* — Prof. S. H. Gage writes as follows : — “ For most of the purposes of histology there is no more satisfactory and generally applicable stain than hasmatoxylin ; and experience has shown that aqueous solutions are on the whole preferable to those containing a considerable quantity of alcohol. Every microscopist knows, however, that aqueous solutions of haematoxylin soon begin to deposit a dark precipitate on the bottle and become filled with granules, and frequently with threads or fungus mycelium. As so many chemical changes are due to living ferments, bacteria, fungi, &c., it occurred to the writer that the deterioration of the haema- toxylin might be due to some living ferment or ferments, and if these could be eliminated the solution would retain its excellence. Experi- ment proved the correctness of this supposition, for an aqueous haema- * Microscopical Bulletin and Sci. News, ix. (1892) pp. 36 and 7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 125 toxylin, prepared as directed below, made in February of tbo present year, is at present writing, after eight months, as good as when first made. During the eight months it has remained in the laboratory, and has been subjected to all the vicissitudes of heat, dust, &c., that an ordinary histological reagent must endure. The bottle has no deposit upon it, and the solution is entirely devoid of the spores or mycelium of fungi, and is in fact as good as when first made. Formula : — Distilled water, 300 ccm. ; potash alum, 10 grm. ; chloral hydrate, 6 grin. ; haematoxylin crystals, 1/10 grm. To prepare the solution, place the water in an agate or porcelain dish and add the alum either in powder or small pieces. Boil the water and alum for five minutes. When cool add the chloral hydrate and the haematoxylin. It is advantageous to dissolve the haematoxylin* in 5 to 10 ccm. of absolute or 95 per cent, alcohol before adding to the alum solution. The colour will be quite light at first, but in a week or two it will be of a dark purple. The boiling is to destroy all living objects in the water or alum, and the chloral hydrate is to prevent the development of germs that accidentally reach the solution after its preparation. The solution may be made more concentrated by adding haematoxylin. For slight dilution, distilled water will answer, but the mixture of alum, chloral, and water is the best diluent.” 126 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. The Conversazione. The following is the list of objects exhibited at the Conversazione held on November 30th, 1892, in the Banqueting Saloon, St. James’s Hall Kestaurant : — Mr. T. D. Aldous : — Photographs of old Microscopes. Mr. J. M. Allen : — Eotifera, viz. Brachionus pala, Eucblanis lyra, Noteus quadricornis, and Polyartlira sp. Mr. F. W. Andrews : — Section of Fossil Coral ; Section of Garden Pea ; Melicerta ringens. Eev. G. Bailey : — Foraminifera. Mr. E. E. Branham : — Pond-life. Mr. E. Bartlett: — Vorticella sp., from the Serpentine. Mr. W. E. Baxter : — Aulacodiscus dispersus x 600. Messrs. E. and J. Beck: — Amphipleura pellucida ; Scales of Podura (Lepidocyrtus curvicollis ) ; Leaf of Vallisneria , showing circu- lation of sap ; Bacillus tuberculosis in sputum. — All the foregoing objects shown under a 1/12 Oil-immersion Objec- tive. Mr. J. B. Bessell : — Photomicrographs of Diatoms taken by Mr. W. E. Brown. Mr. W. A. Bevington : — Head of Spider. Mr. E. T. Browne : — Sarcodictyon catenata , from Port Erin, Isle of Man. Mr. J. Browning : — Microscopes and Spectroscopes. Mr. W. Burton : — Lophopus crystallinus and Eotifers. Mr. F. Chapman : — Foraminifera from the Gault of Folkestone. Mr. W. J. Chapman: — Pond-life. Mr. H. G. Coombs : — Spines of Echinus. Mr. T. Curtie^ : Licmophora ; Spines of Echinus. Mr. E. Dadswell : — Pond-life. Mr. F. Enock : — Heads of Insects. Mr. F. W. Ersser : — Circulation of the Blood in the Foot of a Frog. Mr. F. Fitch : — Mouth of Bibio sp. ; Mouth of Saw-fly ; Mesosternum of Blow-fly. Mr. T. E. Freshwater : — Bees and Bee Culture. Mr. J. W. Gifford : — Gland in Tongue of Kitten, preparation fixed by injection with osmio-aceto-chromic solution, stained logwood and safranin ; Kidney of Kitten, preparation fixed by injec- tion with chromic acid, stained logwood. Mr. C. H. Gill : — Pure Cultivation of a Species of Nitzschia ; Pleurosigma attenuatum invaded by a Parasitic Fungus ; Photomicrographs of Diatoms. Captain C. E. Gladstone, E.N. : — Transverse Section of Leaf-bud of Sycamore. Mr, H. Groves : — Batrachospermum atrum ; Nitella opaca , showing cyclosis. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 127 Mr. J. Hart: — Flower and Leaf-buds; Textile Fabrics and Sections of Cotton ; Sections and Photomicrographs of tho Spines of Echinus. Mr. F. W. Heinbry : — 2Etea anguina ( Anguinaria spatulata). Mr. J. E. Ingpen : — Specimens illustrating Dr. Hodgkinson’s method of examining Iridescent Bodies. Messrs. Johnson & Son: — Synapta sp. from New Zealand; Distomum sp. ; Section of Kidney ; Stand of Microscope by Yarley, about 1812. Mr. G. C. Karop; — Aracbnoidisci in situ; Chromatoscope and Con- denser. Mr. T. Lambert : — Indian Tortoise Beetle. Mr. R. Macer : — A Living House-fly ( Musca domestica'), showing head, antenme, compound eyes and proboscis. Mr. G. E. Mainland : — Fibro-cells from Orchid ; Polyxenes lagurus. Mr. C. C. Muiron : — LopJiopus crystallinus ; Melicerta ringens ; Spongilla jluviatilis ; Stephanoceros Eichhornii. Mr. J. H. Mummery : — Blood Preparations (Prof. Ehrlich’s film pre- paration) ; An eosinophilous Leucocyte. Messrs. E. M. Nelson and C. L. Curties: — Resolution of Navicula rhom- boides by 1/2-in. Apochromatic and Monochromatic Light X 570. A new Spkerometer. Diagrams showing the Chromatic Curves of Displacement of the images by various lenses at their conjugate foci. Jubilee Microscope fixed to Lamp-stand, showing conjugation of Spirogyra ; the Microscope had also a separate stand and a handle for use in the field, designed 1887. Projection Instrument for drawing with low powers, 16-30 diameters. Mr. J. M. Offord : — Diatoms from Bori ; Tongue of Blow-fly. Col. R. O’Hara: — Jaw of Cobra, showing Poison-fang in situ ; Fangs of Cobra, showing construction, and poison channel; Dental Bulb of Oxyuris curvula. Mr. F. Oxley : — GonocJiilus volvox. Mr. F. A. Parsons : — Doto coronata ; Eolis coronata. Messrs. Powell & Lealand: — Circulation in Vallisneria with 1/4 in. Apochromatic and Apochromatic Condenser. Mr. B. W. Priest : — Spongilla iglooiformis, showing Statoblasts, Penn- sylvania. Mr. F. Reeve : — Fern Spores ( Davallia sp.). Dr. H. B. Robinson : — Human Hairs in their Sheaths, longitudinal and transverse sections. Mr. C. Rousselet : — A tank showing Pond -life in Winter ; Rotifera. Sir David L. Salomons : — Dick’s Petrological Microscope, with improve- ments, exhibited by Messrs. Swift. Mr. G. C. Seligman : — Section of Wart. Mr. W. Smart : — Proboscis of EcJiinorJiyncus sp. from Freshwater Trout ; Unexpanded Wing of Tortoise-shell Butterfly. Mr. Alpheus Smith : — Pond-life. Mr. G. F. Smith : — Petrological Slides. 128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Mr. T. F. Smith : — Diatoms. Kev. G. Southall : — Photomicrographs. Mr. A. T. Spriggs: — Ferns ( Osmunda regalis and Hare’s Foot). Mr. A. W. Stokes : — Scales of Ferns, polarized ; Acetate of Copper, polarized; Tissue-paper, polarized. Mr. W. T. Suffolk : — Mouth of Blow-fly. Messrs. Swift & Sons : — Dick’s Petrological Microscopes ; Aluminium Microscope : Paragon and Challenge Microscopes ; Topaz ; Mica ; Hyposulphate of Soda ; Daphnia ; Melicerta ; Hydra ; and Bacillus tuberculosis. Mr. J. Terry : — Pond-life. Mr. J. J. Yezey : — Lung of Frog injected. Mr. H. J. Waddington: — Campanulina acuminata ; Medusa; Asterina gibbosa; Caprella ; Pycnogonum ; Nymphon ; Cirratulus; BowerbanJcia ; Pedicellina ; Tubularia ; Young Molluscs; Eolis ; ShepTierdella ; and Botifera. Messrs. W. Watson & Sons : — Edinburgh Students’ Microscopes ; Group of Eggs of Butterflies, Moths, &c. ; Scales of Insects arranged as a Vase of Flowers; Echinococcus from Brain of Sheep; Group of Diatoms from Bori, Hungary ; Group composed of Diatoms, &c. ; Hydrozoon ( Coryne fruticosa) ; Lip of Cat, showing Sensory Hairs ; Bacillus of Cholera ; Bacillus of Tetanus. Mr. W. West : — Liver of Hedgehog, injected ; Spore of Fern ( Davallia ). Mr. G. Western : — Conochilus volvox and other Botifera. Mr. T. C. White : — Comb and Brush of House Ant. Mr. B. D. Wickes: — Eyes of Hunting Spider ( Salticus tardigradus ). Mr. J. Willson: — A Miniature Volcano — Platinocyanide of Strontium, polarized ; Hymenoptera from Ceylon. Meeting of December 21st, 1892, at 20, Hanover Square, W., the President (Dr. B. Braithwaite, F.L.S.) in the Chair. The Minutes of the meeting of 16th November last were read and confirmed, and were signed by the President. The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the Society given to the donors. From The Microscope. By Dr. H. Van Heurck. English edition by W. E. Baxter. 400 pp., 3 pis., text illust. (8vo, London, 1893) Mr. Wynne E. Baxter. Nuove Osservazioni microscopiche del P. D. G. M. della Torre. 136 pp., 14 pis., text illust. (4to, Napoli, 1776) Mr. Frank Crisp. A Manual of Bacteriology. By Dr. G. M. Sternberg. (8vo, New York, 1892) The Author. I Funghi piu dannosi alle Piante coltivate. Del P. Yoglino. Pts. 1-8 The Author. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 129 The President said there wore two matters which ho wished to mention at that meeting. The first was with reference to their recent Conversazione, which he thought every one would agree was a great success, and on behalf of the Council lie wished to take that opportunity of thanking all those who had helped to mako it so. Everything which he saw on that occasion was beautifully exhibited, and those who were present appeared to thoroughly appreciate the objects shown. It reminded him of some of the gatherings they used to have in the early days of the Society, and he hoped they would on some futuro occasion be able to carry out a similar meeting with equal success. The other matter to which he desired to refer was the deafii of Sir Richard Owen, The newspapers had no doubt made them acquainted with the fact, but perhaps it might not be known to the younger Fellows of the Society that he was their first President, having been elected in 1840, or fifty- two years ago. Though on account of his advanced age and infirmity it was long since they saw him amongst them, he was, no doubt, very well known to every one by his writings, his books on ‘ Odontography ’ and ‘Vertebrate Anatomy’ having had a wide circulation. Many years ago, when he (the President) was an apprentice, Otven’s lectures on Comparative Anatomy were appearing in the ‘ Lancet,’ and he used to make them his great study at the time. The loss was to him — perhaps more than to many present that evening — a personal one ; but as Sir Richard Owen had been so intimately associated with their Society as its first President, they had decided, after passing a resolution of condolence, to adjourn the meeting out of respect to his memory. No papers would therefore be read that evening, but after the transaction of such business as was actually necessary, the sitting would be suspended. The following resolution, drawn up by the Council, was then sub- mitted to the meeting, and unanimously adopted : — “ The President, Council, and Fellows of the Royal Micro- “ scopical Society, having heard with sincere regret of the death “ of Sir Richard Owen, the first President of the Society, desire “ to record their sincere condolence with his family, and their “ appreciation of the great loss which science has sustained by “ the removal of one whose world-wide attainments had placed “ him at its head.” The President announced that their next meeting, on January 18th, 1893, would be the Annual Meeting of the Society, in preparation for which it would be necessary that evening to read the list of Fellows nominated by the Council for election as Officers and Council for the ensuing year. The Fellows present would also be asked to elect an Auditor for the Society’s accounts for the current year. The following List of Nominations was then read : — President — Albert D. Michael, Esq., F.L.S. Vice-Presidents — Prof. Charles Stewart, Pres. L.S. ; Robert Braithwaite, Esq., M.D., M.R.C.S. ; Frank Crisp, Esq., LL.B., B.A., Y.P. and Treas. L.S. ; and James Glaisher, Esq., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. Treasurer — William Thomas Suffolk, Esq. Secretaries —Prof . F. Jeffrey Bell, M.A., and Rev. W. H. Dallinger, LLD., F.R.S. 1893. K 130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Twelve other Members of the Council — Lionel S. Beale, Esq., M.B., F.B.C.P., F.B.S. ; Alfred W. Bennett, Esq., M.A., B.Sc., V.P.L.S. ; Eev. Edmund Carr, M. A., F.B.Met.S. ; Edward Uadswell, Esq. ; Charles Haughton Gill, Esq., F.C.S. ; Bichard G. Hebb, Esq., M.A., M.D., F.K.O.P. ; George C. Karop, Esq., M.B.C.S. ; Edward Milles Nelson, Esq. ; Thomas H. Powell, Esq. ; Prof. Urban Pritchard, M.D. ; Frederic H. Ward, Esq., M.B.C.S. ; Thomas Charters White, Esq., M.B.C.S., L.U.S. The President said that two Auditors of the accounts would have to be appointed that evening, and on behalf of the Council he nominated Mr. W. T. Suffolk to that office. Mr. J. M. Allen was then duly appointed Auditor on behalf of the Fellows of the Society, upon the nomination of the Bev. Canon Carr, seconded by Mr. J. J. Yesey. The meeting was then adjourned. New Fellows : — Ur. Algernon S. Barnes, Jr., Messrs. Joseph Blun- dell and James William Gifford, and Prof. Frank S. Johnson. Annual Meeting, held 18th January, 1893, at 20, Hanover Square, the President (Ur. B. Braithwaite, F.L.S.) in the Chair. The Minutes of the Meeting of 21st Uecember last were read and confirmed, and were signed by the President. The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the Society were given to the Uonors. From Reports of the Birmingham Natural History and Microscopical Society. (8vo, Birmingham, 1866-91) The Society. The Aquarian Naturalist. By T. Rymer Jones, xx. and 480 pp., 8 pis. (8vo, London, 1858) Mr. W. T. Suffolk. Prof. F. Jeffrey Bell read to the meeting a letter which the Council had received from the Bev. Bichard Owen, acknowledging the receipt of the vote of condolence passed at the last meeting of the Society with reference to the death of the late Sir Bichard Owen, their first President. Prof. Bell also read a letter addressed to the Council by Sir Henry Trueman Wood, Secretary of the Boyal Commission for the Chicago Exhibition, asking if the Society would be inclined to lend a collection of photomicrographs for the forthcoming Exhibition at Chicago. As it was stated that they must be sent in before the end of the present month, the Council felt it would be impossible for them to deal with the matter properly in the time at disposal, but if any of the Fellows PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 131 would like to send specimens they might bo able to send thorn in the course of next week direct to Sir H. Trueman Wood. Mr. Frank Crisp asked whether they were not to be sent in the first instance to the Committee to be examined ? Ho thought that the general feeling at the Council meeting was that this should be done. Prof. Bell said it was suggested, but no committee was appointed because there seemed to be no time for it to act. Mr. J. E. Ingpen thought if exhibits of this kind were to be sent in by individual Fellows they could not go to the Exhibition as being sent by the Society. The President said it would be most desirable that whatever went from the Society should be essentially good in quality, because to some extent their reputation would be at stake in the matter. Mr. Crisp thought this made some kind of selection necessary, even if it was only done by a committee of one. It was thereupon agreed, at the suggestion of Prof. Bell, that if any Fellows desired to exhibit photographs in connection with the Society they should send them in at once to the office to be forwarded for the purpose. The'* President having appointed Messrs. J. M. Allen and G. Western to act as Scrutineers, the ballot for the election of Officers and Council for the ensuing year was proceeded with. Prof. Bell said they had received a letter from the Manchester Microscopical Society stating that they had decided to hold a conver- sazione on January 21st, and asking any Fellows of the Society to be present as exhibitors. The invitation, he was afraid, came almost too late to be generally accepted, but he would place it upon the table so that if any one felt inclined to go down to Manchester on Saturday with his instrument he would know whom to address on the matter. The President, on rising to deliver the Annual Address, said that he had not yet written anything upon the subject which he intended to bring before them, but proposed on that occasion to continue, in a conversational way, the topic upon which he addressed them last year, namely “The Development of the Spores in Ferns and Bryophyta.” Last year he had traced the process of reproduction as far as the archegonia and antheridia, and he now proposed to speak upon the further development, more especially with regard to the Mosses and Sphagnums. By means of drawings upon the blackboard the structure and growth of the cells, stem, leaves, and inflorescence were then popularly explained, and a number of slides exhibited under Microscopes in the room were referred to in further illustration of the subject. The Rev. Canon Carr said he had much pleasure in moving a hearty vote of thanks to the President for the very lucid and interesting address which he had just given, and he thought it a great advantage to those who were not conversant with the subject to have it brought before them in that way by means of blackboard drawings, instead of having it read 132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. us a formal address. They were also afforded the further advantage of seeing for themselves under the Microscopes on the table many of the points of interest which had been described. Mr. W. T. Suffolk having seconded the motion, it was put to the meeting and carried unanimously. The President was much obliged for this expression of their good will. He feared that he had on the whole been rather a poor President, especially so far as his addresses were concerned, the great pressure upon his time making it almost impossible to do what he could have desired in the matter. Prof. Bell then read the Report of the Council for the past year as follows : — REPORT OF THE COUNCIL FOR 1892. Fellows. — During the year 1892, 32 new Fellows were elected, whilst 20 have died and 36 have resigned. Among the deaths the Council note with regret that of the first President of the Society — the veteran Sir Richard Owen, K.C.B., F.R.S. The considerable increase in the number of resignations may be explained by the Treasurer’s efforts to obtain subscriptions due to the Society from Fellows who are no longer interested in it. The List of Fellows now contains the names of 622 Ordinary, 1 Corresponding, 50 Honorary, and 86 Ex-officio ; or a total of 759. Finances. — Notwithstanding that the numerous deaths and resigna- tions have exceeded those of previous years, the Council are glad to report that the annual income from subscriptions is slightly above the average of the last five years. The Council note with satisfaction that the sale of the Journal is still increasing, the amount received from their publishers showing an increase of 37/. 6s. over that of last year. Booms. — The negociations with the Society’s landlords having been concluded, the rooms have been (as was promised in last year’s Report) opened for the use of Fellows on every Wednesday evening from November to June, and the Council are pleased to notice that the Fellows have expressed satisfaction with this arrangement. Library. — The addition of six new bookcases has greatly relieved the hitherto congested state of the Library, and allowed of the completion of the re-arrangement of the books. The Council have to report that a new Catalogue of the Library is being prepared, which will further increase the usefulness of the Library to the Fellows. Journal. — Save the proof afforded by the money returns, there is nothing special to report with regard to the Journal of last year. The Council have with great reluctance been compelled to raise the price of the Journal to non-Fellows from 5s. to 6s. per number, but this step has been forced on them by the higher rate at which printers are now paid. The Transactions, on which, as before, the Council feel that the reputation of the Society as a scientific body largely depends, contain PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 133 this year 12 communications, as against 11 last year, and are illustrated by 12 as against 10 plates. More papers would have been communi- cated had not two meetings during the past year been dies non , for the meeting of January was adjourned as a mark of respect to the funeral of H.R.H. the late Duke of Clarence, eldest son of H.R.H. our Patron ; and the December meeting was similarly adjourned as a sign of the regret which the Society felt at the death a few days previously of Sir Richard Owen, its first President. Conversazione. — The Council are happy to report that the change in the form of the Conversazione appears to have met with the approbation of the Fellows and their friends. The Conversazione was held on November 30th, and passed off very successfully, and to the satisfaction of those who attended. There were 68 exhibitors and about 321 visitors. The Council have to express their best thanks to all who assisted at the meeting, and especially are they grateful for the liberal supply of lamps, for which they are indebted to the kindness of Messrs. Baker. Treasurer. — It is with great regret that the Council have to announce to the Fellows that the many calls on the time of the present Treasurer make it imperative for him to resign his post. It is now nineteen years since Mr. Crisp was first associated with the Society as one of its officers, and it has been during these years that the Society has increased so much in numbers and in public estimation. If the Society will, as it assuredly will, elect him as one of its Vice-Presidents, it will still have the great benefit of his advice and experience ; but the Council, as the spokesman of the Society, is bound to give especial prominence to a grateful recognition of the many services of many kinds which Mr. Crisp has rendered it. It is a source of satisfaction to the Council that it has been able to find a Fellow, well known to the attendants at the meetings, fully conversant with the affairs of the Society, and of high position in the City of London, who is willing to offer himself for election in place of Mr. Crisp. The adoption of the Report having been moved by Mr. G. C. Karop, and seconded by Mr. J. M. Allen, was put to the meeting by the Presi- dent and carried unanimously. The Treasurer (Mr. Frank Crisp) then read the Annual Statement of Accouuts and submitted the Balance-sheet for the year 1892, duly audited by Messrs. J. M. Allen and W. T. Suffolk, who were appointed for the purpose at the preceding meeting. Mr; A. D. Michael said he rose to move the adoption of the Treasurer’s Report and Balance-sheet, but felt that he could not do so without expressing his sense of the extreme debt of gratitude which they owed to Mr. Crisp for his services to the Society, not only during the past year, but also during so many years which preceded it, services which had been so admirably performed, and had tended so greatly to the benefit of the Society. Mr. J. J. Vezey having seconded the motion, it was put from the vhair, and carried by acclamation. THE TEEASUEEE’S ACCOUNT FOE 1892. 134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. ^ociHCoooonooooM i-l C5 © rH t*h CO t> i— ( i— 1 rH i-* !-* r- 1 i— ( i— rH ,,CC'^(Ni-‘'^THU5Cap-i>OOOH(» i— l 00 o *♦1 55 02 © H t" CO (N(N H(N CO §.| ^ 5 ® W «*h l-s S -3 £ * .s « p a p,h^ ^ -tJ o a os x O 3 O W X -^r.° OO ^OQ ct^^c3C5a.2'dS «32So|dS-20c 3 J § lC‘S ^ .2 ? > « M O O * - C © ; K o ® s»->_s © O r® © -a .*2 Q ^WCCOHO^NOOCIOCS .t'OWlOCKMWWHNCO XhOCh-NOMo t*|QM!2i-OKOM CO CO 05 CO rH ® ® ® © Q ::::::::: : 02 M on "■’•■••■ • P h 02 o 2 • a £ g • **H •£> ’-*- .*3 fi H ® 02 . 02 _. . . bc c5 © 3 ’2'a'7?^3 gi-ifrj§ a £ 2 * O ^ jj ,, h o 5 2 a 2 M 8141 i.’siifj «| rHo Investments , 31s2 December , 1892. 1200/. Freehold Mortgages. 780/. 17s. 3d. India Three per Cents, (including 100/. Quekett Memorial Fund). The foregoing Annual Account examined and found correct, 4th January, 1893. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 135 The President then announced that the Scrutineers had reported that the whole of the gentlemen whose names were printed on the ballot paper had boon elected as Officers and Council of the Society for the ensuing year, as under : — President — * Albert D. Michael, Esq., E.L.S. Vice-Presidents — * Robert Braitli waite, Esq., M.D., M.R.C.S., V.P.L.S. ; *Frank Crisp, Esq., LL.B., B.A., Y.P. and Treas. L.S. ; * James Glaisher, Esq., F.R.S., F.R.A.S. ; *Prof. Charles Stewart, Pres. L. S. Treasurer — * William Thomas Suffolk, Esq. Secretaries — Prof. F. Jeffrey j Bell, M.A. ; Rev. W. H. Dallinger, LL.D., F.R.S. Twelve other Members of the Council — Lionel S. Beale, Esq., M.B., F.R.C.P., F.R.S. ; * Alfred W. Bennett, Esq., M.A., B.Sc., V.P.L.S. ; Rev. Edmund Carr, M.A., F.R.Met.S. ; * Edward Dadswell, Esq. ; ^Charles Haughton Gill, Esq., F.C.S. ; Richard G. Hebb, Esq., M.A., M. D., F.R.C.P. ; *George C. Karop, Esq., M.R.C.S. ; Edward Milles Nelson, Esq.; Thomas H. Powell, Esq.; Prof. Urban Pritchard, M.D. ; Frederic H. Ward, Esq., M.R.C.S.; Thomas Charters White, Esq., M.R.C.S., L.D.S. Dr. Braithwaite then vacated the chair and installed as President of the Society for 1893, Mr. A. D. Michael, F.L.S., whom he humorously characterized as a “mitey” man from whom mighty deeds would be expected. Mr. Michael said that it was not altogether a pleasant process to dispossess his predecessor, but when a person was introduced to a Society like that as its President it certainly became his duty to return thanks to those by whom he had been elected. But so far as the custom was concerned it was not one which exactly commended itself to his judg- ment, because, in making a selection, the Council were in the first place bound to consider the benefit of the Society and not that of the indi- vidual ; but in spite of this objection he was, on that occasion, going to follow the usual course, because he found it impossible altogether to eliminate the personal element from his own mind. He could not help feeling that when a body of gentlemen with whom he had worked for so many years, so pleasantly and so usefully as had been the case during his connection with their Society, had elected him to a position of the greatest honour which they could confer, it would be unpleasant to take the chair without any word of thanks ; therefore he returned them most heartily his thanks for the honour conferred. In one way, however, he hoped that the personal element would be expressed, and that was that by the united efforts of themselves and their friends the period of his presidency might be rendered one of active scientific work which should be equal to the best work of the past, and not unworthy of what they hoped yet to do in the future. The President said it now only remained for him to put to the meeting a proposal which had been duly moved and seconded, but not * Those with an asterisk (*) have not held during the preceding year the office for which they were nominated. 136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. yet voted upon, namely, “ That the best thanks of the Society be pre- sented to their retiring Treasurer, Mr. Frank Crisp, for his valuable services during the past year.” Carried unanimously. Mr. Vezey thought they ought not to separate without expressing their thanks to the Secretaries and Officers of the Society for their services during the past year. The success of the Society so largely was due to the time and attention which these gentlemen devoted to its interests that the Fellows would, he felt sure, not desire that such services should go unrecognized on the occasion of their Annual Meet- ing. He therefore asked to be allowed to move that the best thanks of the Society be given to the Secretaries and other Officers and Council of the Society for their valuable services during the past year. Dr. Braithwaite having seconded the motion it was put to the meeting and carried unanimously. Prof. Bell briefly responded. Dr. R. Braithwaite exhibited Drawings and Slides of Mosses illustrating the Presidential Address. New Fellows: — The following were elected Ordinary Fellows: — Dr. Thomas Stewart Adair, Messrs. Charles Adams and 'Charles Stephen Meachom. The Journal is issued on the third Wednesday in February, April, June, August, October, and December. 1893. Part 2. APRIL. To Non-Fellows, Price 6s. Journal may 12 1893 OF THE ^ Royal Microscopical Society CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZOOLO G-^2” -A- 1ST 3D BOTANY (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), MICROSCOPY,